Home

21209885F

1. Figure 7 18 Replacing the Detector Assembly Flow RTD Use the following procedure to replace the flow resistive temperature Rep lacement diction RTD see Figure 7 19 Equipment Required Sample flow RTD Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 3 Loosen the kynar fittings using the wrench and slide out sample flow RTD 7 36 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Transformer Replacement 4 Unplug the RTD connector from the measurement interface board flowtemp1 5 Carefully install the new RTD by following the previous steps in reverse Match the marked black line on the RTD to be flush with the fitting Note The black line is the pre measured depth for the RTD 4 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Udjustable Wrench Unplug RTD Connector Figure 7 19 Replacing the RTD Transformer Use the following procedure to replace the transformer Figure 7 20 Replaceme n
2. Water Collector Collector Assembly Figure 5 1 U S EPA PMio Inlet Once a month the sampler inlet should be dismantled and cleaned Mark each assembly point of the sampler inlet with a pen or pencil to provide reference marks during reassembly Disassemble the sample inlet unit according to Figure 5 1 If the assembly screws are frozen apply penetrating oil or commercial lubricant to make removal easier Clean all interior surfaces and the bug screen with a general purpose cleaner or compressed air paying particular attention to small openings and cracks Cotton swabs and or a small brush are helpful Completely dry all components Also monthly check the O rings for distortion cracks fraying or other problems and replace as necessary Apply small amounts of grease to the rings before assembling the unit Reassemble the unit in accordance with the previously scribed match marks Particular care should be taken to ensure that all O rings seals are properly seated and that all screws are uniformly tightened The same schedule should be used for the European PM Inlet e g Leckel at approximately a 1 2 month interval The components of the inlet should be inspected and cleaned as necessary Figure 5 2 provided below provides an image and design drawing of the inlet with references to parts Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Inlets Nozzle 8
3. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 42 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMpz5 test site Cologne winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 148 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Model 50301 SHARP SN 1 SN 2 Bornheim Summer Raw data 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m fa N y 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 43 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PM25 test site Bornheim summer Model 50301 SHARP SN 1 SN 2 Bornheim Winter Raw data Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 44 Results of the parallel mea
4. Instrument inputs and outputs Outputs Analogue 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA optional Digital RS232 RS485 TCP IP 10 status re lays Inputs 16 digital inputs 8 analogue inputs optional 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Page 49 of 424 A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 50 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Protocols Communication with PC over Ethernet and iPort software C Link MODBUS Gesytec ESM Data Streaming and NTP Simultaneous connections from different loca tions over Ethernet Status signals Error messages Available for an overview please refer to Chapter 6 of the instruction manual 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 51 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 4 Test programme 4 1 General The suitability test was carried out with two instruments of identical design with the serial
5. 16 67 000 002 16 74 16 60 18 0 120 17 5 4 J 00 100 5 17 0 4 80 2 8 a r 2 aH n WU Wi 1 oc SN 1 Flow rate l min 16 5 MI A i Ni N nW lh ANAM 60 5 Limit of flow rate e SN 1 VAC mmHg 5 SN1 SHARP g m O 16 0 4 L4 Q 15 5 4 20 eT 15 0 0 1 7 2011 0 00 2 26 2011 0 00 4 17 2011 0 00 6 6 2011 0 00 Figure 39 Flow of candidate SN 1 field 18 0 120 17 5 100 17 0 80 SN 2 Flow rate l min Pump vaccuum and SHARP concentration 2 Fl agi t Ei a itmi z 16 5 KA m W ngit N wy j NT dA Yy L 60 5 Limit of flow rate ir SN 2 VAC mmHg SN2 SHARP pg m 16 0 4 L 40 15 5 20 15 0 r r 0 1 7 2011 0 00 2 26 2011 0 00 4 17 2011 0 00 6 6 2011 0 00 Figure 40 Flow of candidate SN 2 field 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 141 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 8 Tightness of the measuring system The complete measuring system shall be che
6. cccccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 Table 35 Overview equivalence test of Model 5030i SHARP for PMa5 eeeeeee 154 Table 36 Uncertainty between the reference devices Uret for PMo5 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 156 Table 37 Summary of the results of the equivalence test SN 1 amp SN 2 measured component Piles raw data sich niemasnanisnaeisnaiiienanii teal 157 Table 38 Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 1 amp SN 2 after SION GNC ON GGION vee cc ccgess vests cacteatcenansaisassttatbacebenesassute tecenedectasgenvveneceuneeauies 169 Table 39 Stability of standard weight cccceceeeee eee eeeeeetee settee ee eeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneee 211 Table 40 Stability of the Control filters eee cece eee eeecnne eter eee eeeeeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteee 213 Table 41 Conditioning and weighing timeScales cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 214 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Page 10 of 424 Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figu
7. to return to the Main Menu or _ gt _ to return to the Run screen Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the concentration units PM standard ranges and to set the custom ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range DH pikari PME UY Sad ihe EE EE Concentration Units The Concentration Units screen defines how the particles concentration readings are expressed Concentration units of micrograms per cubic meter pg m and milligrams per cubic meter mg m are available When switching the selected units the instrument s analog ranges all default to the highest range For example when switching from mg m to ug m the ranges default to 10000 ug m Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings Note If the units change the instrument should be re calibrated A display warning will appear A e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Conc Units 3 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu ts ROR E CHS EUs EEE TE Saaad Bone a SHARP Range The SHARP Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example a SHARP range of 0 100 pg m sets the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 100 pg m by default The display shows the current SHARP range The next line of the display is used to change the range
8. Additionally the Model 5030 proportional radiation detector is sensitive to natural alpha activity of the aerosol passing through the sampling system The additional alpha count rate is used to measure the presence of Radon gas and infer the daughter nuclides of Radon gas These daughter nuclides create a small beta emission This externally sampled beta emission is perceived by the detector to be a higher count rate and the higher the count rate the less apparent mass detected Therefore by measuring the natural alpha activity due to Radon gas the proportional beta interference from the daughter nuclide emissions are subtracted from the count rate to provide a refined mass measurement This potential error from Radon gas interference may be in lower strength radioactive devices e g lt 100 pCi as high as actual particle concentrations especially after filter change or when the natural activity concentration changes The Model 5030 has implemented this procedure to determine separately the natural activity in the aerosol and to eliminate this error This procedure further allows the Model 5030 to provide a more stable reading at lower ambient particulate concentrations compared to similar methods Furthermore from this information the activity concentration of the natural noble gas Radon is derived Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 7 Introduction Specifications Specifications 1 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual T
9. Figure 52 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Cologne winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 161 of 424 100 90 4 a SN1 Bornheim Summer WA 80 4 Z 70 L D a 2 60 hk 8 50 ra So f 404 f a A 30 a A 20 aA A Ae 10 4 ki oA 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM 5 Reference yg m Figure 53 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Bornheim summer 100 a 90 a SN2 Bornheim Summer ZL Fil a0 4 A S 70 4 Z 2 2 60 LZ 3 50 2 E a 40 y S 30 4 ga Fd xy 20 4 a4 Ape a lake 10 4 a ad 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 54 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM2 5 Bornheim summer 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 162 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo F
10. Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 Table 30 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Description of the test sites cece eceeeeeee cnet eeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eetenaaaeaaaaaeeeeeeeenenea Description of the test site additional campaign 2013 cccceeeeeeeeeeees Technical data for Model 5030i SHARP manufacturer s specifications Overview of software versions during suitability testing eeeeeeees Field test Sit S ennnen ANE Ambient conditions at the field test sites daily mean values 00ceeee Evaluation of the Teddington summer campaign with rH adjusted To reeuticap teh ca thence ete nceneiseanasaiee E eeteners Ambient conditions at the additional site Bornheim Summer 2013 shown as daily mean values sessccicisierertesiasectisicnercestrssteirertnnmeeunene Results of the equivalence test at the site Bornheim Summer 2013 SN 1 58 amp SN 2 50 component PM2 5 raw data cccseeeeeeeeeeeees Results of the equivalence test at the site Bornheim summer 2013 SN 1 58 amp SN 2 50 component PM2z5 slope correction 1 068 Results of the equivalence tes
11. 0 048 0 383 0 585 21 87 11 4 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 SN2 Dataset No s Slope b Up Intercept a Ug Wom 217 ug m3 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 2013 44 0 904 0 934 0 045 0 520 0 549 14 41 11 4 Assessment 1 The expanded uncertainty of the data corrected by the slope of 1 068 lies for SN 1 58 and SN 2 50 beneath the allowed 25 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 67 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Closing the corrected data set for Bornheim Summer 2013 was included in the original equivalence evaluation from suitability testing see Table 38 according to point 8 2 Suitabil ity testing of CEN TS 16450 9 as additional 5th data set to check whether the criteria for equivalence test are still fulfilled Table 11 Results of the equivalence test suitability testing Bornheim summer 2013 SN 1 amp SN 2 component PMz5 slope correction 1 068 PM2 5 5030i Sharp 25 9 2 17 ug m3 Orthogonal Regression Betw een Instrument Uncertainties l Slope Correctea Slope b Up Intercept a Ua Reference Candidate All Data 11 7 0 997
12. 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUV Rheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 73 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Filter handling Mass determination The following filters were used for suitability testing Table 14 Used filter materials Measuring instrument Filter material type Manufacturer Reference instrument LVS3 Emfab 47 mm Pall The filter material Emfab Teflon coated glass fibre filters was used during the Combined MCERTS and TUV PM Equivalence Testing programme by special request of our British partners because according to 8 they consider it most appropriate for the measurement task The handling of filters meets the requirements of EN 14907 The procedures for filter handling and weighing are described in detail in Appendix 2 of this report 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 74 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5
13. Filter Tape Counter Possible Cause Loose reel nuts Broken tape Loose photo interrupt cable Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Tighten reel nuts Replace tape Verify connections Instrument Alarms Filter Tape Change Loose reel nuts Broken tape Tape motor nut turning Tighten reel nuts Replace tape Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace tape motor Instrument Alarms Bench Cam working not functioning Motor turning cam not Verify connector to measurement interface board Replace motor Verify setscrews on cam coupling Instrument Alarms Motherboard Status Instrument Alarms Interface Status Instrument Alarms 1 0 Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Re cycle AC power to instrument If still alarming change board Replace board Detector Alarms Alpha Detector Settings Re calibrate detector Verify alarm settings are between 0 minimum and 100 maximum Detector Alarms Beta Disconnected cable Defective detector Settings Verify cable connections Replace detector Beta counts trending towards zero Verify alarm settings are between 5000 minimum and 20000 maximum Nephelometer Alarms Board Status Disconnected cable Verify cable harness is connected to the base WARN
14. Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format lt STX gt MD09 lt SP gt lt address gt lt SP gt lt measured valuel gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt SP gt lt address 1 gt lt SP gt lt measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a lt CR gt then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 09 after the MD indicates that nine measurements are present in the reply string 10 for ten measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa and 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is n
15. Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030 SHARP Type of instrument Serial No SN1 SN2 A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 183 of 424 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions PM2 5 Measured values in g m ACT Page 2 of 11 Ref 2 PM2 5 g m Ref 1 PM10 pg m Ref 2 PM10 pg m Ratio PM2 5 PM10 SN 1 PM2 5 pg m SN 2 Remark PM2 5 ug ms Test site 4 7 2011 4 8 2011 4 9 2011 4 10 2011 4 11 2011 4 12 2011 4 13 2011 4 14 2011 4 15 2011 4 16 2011 4 17 2011 4 18 2011 4 19 2011 4 20 2011 4 21 2011 4 22 2011 4 23 2011 4 24 2011 4 25 2011 4 26 2011 4 27 2011 4 28 2011 4 29 2011 4 30 2011 5 1 2011 5 2 2011 5 3 2011 5 4 2011 5 5 2011 5 6 2011 23 2 34 9 23 4 31 3 18 0 24 4 32 0 31 9 24 2 34 8 22 3 31 5 17 1 23 2 31 5 31 9 Zero point Zero point Zero point SN1 switched off involuntarily Recovery after re start SN1 switched off for short time Outlier Ref PM2 5 Cologne Winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T V Rheinland D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Precisely Right Page 184 of 424 Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5 Mea
16. Reference Detector Board SHARP Board Assy Source Board SHARP Board Bracket Assy Scatter Detector Board Optical Bench RH Board Optical Bench Inlet Figure 7 3 SHARP Optics Component Layout 7 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly Removing the SHARP The SHARP optics assembly can be removed from the measurement case assembly Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering Optics Assembly the partition panel Figure 7 4 lt ___ Captive Screws 2 Electrical Connector Figure 7 4 Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly Equipment Required Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 4 Unfasten the two captive hardware screws Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel 5 Pull the cover in an upward direction 6 Replace the SHARP optics assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Removing the The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partiti
17. 100 90 4 4 SN2 Teddington Summer Sam zi 80 4 70 4 7 60 5 o 40 30 4 Vv 20 4 0 io PM 5 5030i Sharp pg m os 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM 5 Reference yg m Figure 58 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Teddington sum mer 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Page 164 of 424 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 100 F Z 90 5 Z a SN1 Fii y 80 5 7 x 70 4 xy E Pi g 60 4 ff a uv f k S 50 4 r fe x 3 f 40 4 E a agta 30 ae te 20 x 4 a DEA ra o 4 E m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 59 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PMz25 values 2 18 g m 100 7 Z a SN2 ae 80 sf 704 ee d ri J 2 60 5 Sf S 50 iv S WA a ye z 404 z x 30 4 a rer a 20 a 2 fi 10 K 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM 5 Reference yg m Figure 60 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM2 5 values 2 18 g m 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH
18. 2 Remove the cable from the bottom of the radiation shield assembly that houses the ambient RH temperature assembly 3 Remove the two mounting nuts on the mounting clamp of the radiation shield assembly Remove the radiation shield assembly 4 Turn over the radiation shield assembly and remove the three thumb screws 5 Remove the three spacers and mounting bracket 6 Slide out the ambient RH temperature assembly 7 Slide in the new ambient RH temperature assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Remove RH Temperature Assembly lt _ Unfasten Thumb Screws 3 Remove Cable Figure 7 22 Replacing the Ambient RH Temperature Assembly Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Front panel board f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop the board off of the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and
19. 5030i Sharp pg m a oO 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM 5 Reference yg m Figure 27 Comparison of reference and candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Ted dington Summer relative humidity threshold adjusted to 50 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR h 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH einland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 64 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Since these parameters differ from the ones determined during previous campaigns the possible causes for this discrepancy were analysed In this context the volatile content in fi ne dust was reviewed in detail The content of volatiles in suspended particulate matter had been determined in measurements carried out in parallel with measuring systems of the type TEOM FDMS The results showed that the test site Teddington Summer is characterised by a generally very low level of suspended particulate matter and a significantly high content of volatile dust components The average content of volatiles in suspended particulate matter PM 5 amounted to approx 35 during the campaign carried out in Teddington summer compared to a content of approx 20 25 during the three previous campaigns Based on si
20. 5V LCD DATA J2 o o N O o A UO N gt gt a oO Ground 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 1 Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input a a a A o N Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 3 Select oOo N OQO wo A WO N Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 5V Supply 2 NC 3 Ground Table 6 6 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator EXPANSION I O J1 1 Analog Voltage Input 1 2 Analog Voltage Input 2 3 Analog Voltage Input 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 22 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 4 Ground 5 Analog Voltage Input 4 6 Analog Voltage Input 5 7 Analog Voltage Input 6 8 Ground 9 Analog Voltage Input 7 10 Analog Voltage Input 8 11 Ground 12 NC 13 Current Output Return 14 Ground 15 Current Output 1 16 Current Output Return 17 Current Output 2 18 Current Output Return 19 Current Output 3 20 Current Output Return 21 Current Output 4 22 Current Output Return 23 Current Output 5 24 Current Output Return 25 Current Output 6 MOTHER BD J2 1 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Motherboard 8 RS485 to Motherboard Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector
21. 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 124 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 14 Response time The response time rise of the measuring system shall not exceed 180 s The response time fall of the measuring system shall not exceed 180 s The difference between the response time rise and response time fall of the meas uring system shall not exceed 10 of response time rise or 10 s whatever value is larger Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 125 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 15 Differ
22. Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 50301 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 5030 Coil Number Status 0 INVALID 1 LOCAL REMOTE 2 SERVICE 3 NOT USED 4 GEN ALARM 5 CONC ALARM 6 INST ALARMS Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Coil Number MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Status BETA DETECTOR ALARMS NEPHELOMETER ALARMS RH TEMP ALARMS PRES VAC ALARMS FLOW ALARMS NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED EXT ALARM 1 EXT ALARM 2 gt a gt a N lop ol P ow N EXT ALARM 3 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument A Note For additional information on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A Table C 2 Read Regis
23. RH JS sample relative humidity value 9 RH m1 non filtered mass in ug or mg based on units selected 0 reports offline in service mode online if NOT in service mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50302 SHARP Instruction Manual E 1 ESM Protocol Commands ESM Commands Supported Command Description UA beta count rate 1 s U beta zero count rate 1 s U alpha count rate 1 s alpha zero count rate 1 s U B C UD Q S U radon EEC activity concentration Bq m3 Read neph coef factor read device address instrument ID flags need nephelometer alarms Table E 2 Write Commands for 5030 Command d4 Description baud rate d7 device address instrument ID K4 concentration factor KB filter change dust load in ug KD KG filter change cycle in hours external heating control O off 1 RH control 2 TEMP control KH set point air flow regulation in l h KN O temp comp on pres comp off 1 temp comp off pres comp off KS nephelometer coef factor KU establishes the RH target value KT establishes the temp target value K norm Pressure K norm Temp Y write parameters to EEPROM Table E 3 Control Commands for 5030 Command A E 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Description pump off Thermo Fisher Scientific ESM Protocol Commands E
24. Table 3 2 lists the standard ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt SHARP Range Pr aT DN EEE TE Sanat Bone Table 3 2 Standard Ranges mg m pg m 0 1 100 1 0 1000 2 0 2000 3 0 3000 5 0 5000 10 00 10000 C1 C1 C2 C2 C3 C3 C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Range Menu Set Custom Ranges 3 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 3 for channels and pin connections ecocooceococ00o00o lelolololololelolelolelelelelelelels Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 PM 2 33 3 Neph 3 15 5 Flow 4 34 7 Ambient Temperature 5 17 9 Flow Temperature 6 36 11 Ambient Relative Humidity Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges which are user defined In the mg m mode any value between 0 1 mg m and 10 00 mg m can be specified as a range In the pg m mode any val
25. e The foils must not be wiped otherwise a loss or gain of mass can occur thereby biasing the mass calibration e Foils sets can be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific for recalibration as necessary e Separate foil sets are recommended for periodic QC checks auditing and calibration e Should the user suspect the foil window s has been damaged scratched or coated these foil sets should be returned to Thermo Fisher Scientific for re calibration The null foil has the same approximate mass as a clean filter spot and the span foil is a calibrated mass increase above the null foil Therefore the foils come in a set and must not be mixed with other sets since a bias in mass calibration will occur Since the beta attenuation method is linear with mass increase the Model 50302 need not be calibrated in the exact range of beta attenuation per filter spot What is important is calibrating the corresponding beta count reduction with an increase of calibrated mass Thermo Fisher Scientific Mass Coefficient Auto Mass Coefficient Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure Note To achieve the most accurate mass calibration the flow temperature should be as stable as possible and therefore the instrument should have the heating system turned off and the instrument should be allowed to equilibrate to shelter or ambient temperature If the Model 5030 Beta is mounted within an ambient shelter then the most stab
26. set bkg pm value This command is used to set PM backgrounds to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the background in current selected units The following example sets the PM background to 5 2 pg m Send set bkg pm 5 2 Receive set bkg pm 5 2 ok bkg sharp This command reports the current SHARP backgrounds The following example reports that the SHARP background is 4 pg m Send bkg sharp Receive bkg sharp 4 000E 00 pg m3 set bkg sharp value This command is used to set SHARP backgrounds to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the background in current selected units The following example sets the SHARP background to 5 2 pg m Send set bkg sharp 5 2 Receive set bkg sharp 5 2 ok set cal baro pres span This command automatically calculates the span coefficient based on the entered target pressure value The following example sets the calibration pressure to 720 5 mmHg Send set cal baro pres span 720 5 Receive set cal baro pres span 720 5 ok set cal flow pres span value This command automatically sets the flow pressure span based on the flow pressure entered at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for flow span based on the flow pressure to 50 5 mmHg Send set cal flow pres span 50 5 Receive set cal flow pres span 50 5 ok set cal flow span value This command automatically sets t
27. 0 011 0 059 0 189 lt 18 ug m3 12 1 1 040 0 027 0 251 0 267 2 18 ug m3 16 4 1 018 0 030 0 806 0 914 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset Nos r Slope b Up Intercept a Ua Wem gt 17 ugm3 Bornheim Winter 1 006 0 025 0 175 0 624 Cologne Winter 1 017 0 028 0 481 0 633 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 1 037 0 031 0 437 Teddington Summer 1 043 0 047 0 590 0 381 4 1 Bornheim Summer 2013 1 080 0 048 0 383 0 585 11 4 4 5 lt 18 ug m3 198 0 850 1 114 0 031 0 861 0 306 20 99 Combined Datasets 2 18 ug m3 55 0 951 1 035 0 032 1 069 0 959 17 45 100 0 All Data 253 0 962 1 016 0 013 0 104 0 209 13 58 25 3 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset Slope b Up Intercept a Ug Wem 2 17 ugm3 Bornheim Winter 1 033 0 029 Cologne Winter 0 990 0 025 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 885 0 028 Teddington Summer 0 947 0 048 Bornheim Summer 2013 0 934 0 045 lt 18 ug m3 207 0 838 1 004 0 028 0 009 0 282 11 34 4 8 Combined Datasets 218 ug m3 54 0 941 1 019 0 034 1 164 1 052 19 41 100 0 All Data 261 0 960 0 985 0 012 0 081 0 203 13 32 24 5 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambie
28. 11 6 17 2013 12 7 1 7 13 3 23 3 29 7 1004 64 7 0 9 185 0 0 12 6 18 2013 17 6 2 3 13 0 27 2 34 8 1005 61 3 0 4 178 0 0 13 6 19 2013 32 3 4 6 14 3 26 9 35 0 1003 67 8 1 9 244 0 0 14 6 20 2013 9 4 3 0 32 3 20 5 25 1 1003 78 5 1 0 187 34 6 15 6 21 2013 4 3 1 1 24 6 19 0 23 4 1005 69 8 1 6 196 0 3 16 6 22 2013 3 7 1 3 35 0 19 0 23 7 1004 67 8 1 8 198 1 5 17 6 23 2013 3 0 0 4 13 6 16 2 19 2 1005 69 9 1 6 216 0 9 18 6 24 2013 8 4 1 0 12 2 14 2 17 4 1013 76 9 1 8 255 1 5 19 6 25 2013 6 5 0 9 14 6 13 4 16 8 1018 Ti 1 8 259 0 3 20 6 26 2013 9 3 1 9 20 8 13 9 16 7 1018 70 9 14 250 9 8 21 6 27 2013 9 7 2 1 21 1 13 2 17 1 1014 78 5 0 7 230 3 9 22 6 28 2013 8 8 21 24 3 14 1 16 7 1010 86 1 0 3 174 16 4 23 6 29 2013 5 9 0 7 12 4 14 8 18 8 1012 73 9 2 6 269 1 8 24 6 30 2013 7 2 1 3 18 3 t7 22 4 1012 66 4 0 6 198 0 0 25 7 1 2013 EA A 1 4 17 9 18 8 25 4 1008 74 9 0 7 215 21 0 26 7 2 2013 7 9 1 6 20 5 21 6 27 1 1003 62 7 0 6 183 0 3 27 7 3 2013 3 7 0 7 19 0 17 5 20 1 1004 85 6 0 2 213 16 0 28 7 4 2013 Tae 0 4 5 3 20 0 24 7 1014 71 4 0 9 232 0 0 29 7 5 2013 13 0 1 3 10 4 19 8 24 8 1020 74 4 0 3 222 0 0 30 7 6 2013 13 2 2 0 15 4 22 4 29 3 1020 65 4 1 0 191 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS system 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quali
29. 7 After calibration perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Pressure Board Use the following procedure to calibrate the pressure board assembly Calibration Equipment Required Manometer 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Adjust the barometer pressure span by entering the actual barometric pressure value Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 Return to the Pres Vacuum Calibration choose Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span Calibrate the flow pressure span according to the following a Place digital manometer on bench 7 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Testing Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing b Turn on manometer and allow to self calibrate Do not move manometer while self calibrating c After zeroing the digital manometer connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P A port on the rear panel d Connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P A port on the rear panel e Open both Delta P A and A toggle valves to open flow through the manometer f Cal Flow Pres Span by entering the actual value read by the manometer g Press to save value h Turn off the manometer this meter does not have an automatic turn off feature
30. 7 IOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated ground 20 Ground 9 lOut5 21 Analog_In7 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog_In8 11 lOut6 23 Ground 12 Isolated ground 24 Ground Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 21 Detail i Installation Startup Power Connections A Startup 2 22 Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual Before the power is connected be sure that the front panel power switch is OFF and be sure to verify that the local power matches the label on the back of the analyzer WARNING The Model 5030 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Use the following procedure when starting the instrument 1 Turn the power ON and allow 12 hours for the beta detector to stabilize 2 Although the instrument has been calibrated at the factory if the instrument has been equilibrated temperature sensors may be checked Assure that the heater is off and that the instrument is sampling room air at a constant temperature for at least 1 2 hours with the cover removed 3 After a 12 hour stabilization the following steps should be performed a From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Under Instrument Controls i ii iii vi vii Flow should be set to 16 67 LPM Heater Control should be set to RH with a RH Threshold of 50 58 For lower RH threshold settings please contact technical support Filter Tape mass limit should
31. Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Detector 3 Pin Data Ref Det Source RH A 2 Pin Female not used Figure 7 27 SHARP Interface Board Connections Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Delrin Nut Replacement w Loosen screws ZA Loosen screws Figure 7 28 Replacing the SHARP Optics Board Delrin Nut Use the following procedure to replace the Delrin nut Figure 7 29 Replacement Equipment Required Delrin nut Philips screwdriver Set of standard hex drives Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the Pump Flow OFF From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump gt Pump Press to toggle and set the pump flow to OFF Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing Delrin Nut Replacement 2 Turn the Heater OFF From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Control Use until the value reads OFF and press 3 Loosen the two hex screws from the collar of the heater adapter cover 4 Loosen the two captive screws of the heater adaptor cover and slide up 5 Loosen the bottom 5 8 inch union nut and remove the tube adapter 6 Slide off the heater tube adapter down 7 Slide off ferrite bead upward
32. Clean inside parts of pump change Clean air passage Close valves Check cable connection Check cable connection Check cable connection Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Malfunction No SHARP Concentration Possible Cause Disconnected Scat Det cable Action Check cable connection No Zero Air Flow Rear solenoid valve normally closed Clogged in line filter or internal filter Pump unplugged Internal solenoid valve normally closed Check zero in bulkhead tubing connection Check pump exhaust connection Check internal T fitting for plug or tubing not connected Check rear panel connection replace valve Replace filter Plug in pump Check cable connection replace valve Kinked tube insert tube Insert tube in Y fitting or pump Insert blocking port plug connect tubing Ref Det Voltage Low or high source current Check source current level Adjust to 62 67 mA Check min and max values LED current 65mA Neph Cal Bad Zero Re zero Neph Temp High Low Check min and max values Re calibrate Neph RH Low High Check min and max values Re calibrate Led Current High Low Check min and max values Verify 65mA 5mA Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Alarm Message Instrument Alarms
33. Figure Board Replacement Equipment Required Photo interrupt board Hex driver 3 32 inch Philips head screwdriver 1 amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect cable 3 Remove mounting screws 7 32 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Proportional Valve Replacement 4 Remove board 5 Re install the photo interrupt board by following the previous steps in reverse Unfasten screws 2 Unhook Cable Figure 7 16 Replacing the Photo Interrupt Board Pro po rtional Valve Use the following procedure to replace the proportional valve Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Proportional valve assembly Hex driver 3 32 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 3 Disconnect connector from t
34. Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 15 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the top of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface board off from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board 4 To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement case assembly 6 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Photo Interrupt Board Replacement Mounting Studs 2 Measurement Interface Board Mounting Screws 2 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Photo Interru pt Use the following procedure to replace the photo interrupt board
35. Introduction The Model 50307 Synchronized Hybrid Ambient Real time Particulate SHARP Monitor is a hybrid nephelometric radiometric particulate mass monitor capable of providing precise real time measurements with a superior detection limit The SHARP Monitor measures the mass concentration of ambient PMio PM2 s and PM aerosol in real time The SHARP Monitor incorporates a high sensitivity light scattering photometer whose output signal is continuously reference to the time averaged measurements of an integral beta attenuation mass sensor as developed on the Model 5014 Beta This system achieves heretofore unattained short term precision and accuracy The SHARP Monitor incorporates advanced firmware to optimize the continuous mass calibration of the nephelometric signal ensuring that the measured mass concentration remains independent of changes in the particle population being sampled The SHARP Monitor incorporates a dynamic heating system DHS designed to maintain the relative humidity of the air passing through the filter tape of the radiometric stage below the user defined threshold typically below the point at which the collected particles accrete and retain liquid water This DHS system minimizes the internal temperature rise by not heating when sample relative humidity is below the threshold to which the heater is controlling As the ambient RH increases above the threshold the applied heating is optimized to maintain the RH th
36. Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Analog Output Calibration 7 24 Analog Output Calibration Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Input Channel Pin 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 11 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A At the Analog Output Cal menu press _ to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value Thermo Fisher S
37. T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 165 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 11 Application of correction factors and terms If the highest resulting expanded uncertainty of the candidate method is larger than the expanded relative uncertainty which is defined in the requirements on the data quality of ambient air measurements according to EU Guideline 7 the application of correc tion factors or terms is permitted The corrected values have to fulfil the requirements according to point 9 5 3 2 et seqq of the Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Am bient Air Monitoring Methods 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test Refer to module 5 4 10 6 4 Evaluation If evaluation of the raw data according to module 5 4 10 leads to a case where Wem gt Wano which means that the candidate systems is not regarded equivalent to the reference method it is permitted to apply a correction factor or term resulting from the regression equation ob tained from the full dataset The corrected values shall satisfy the requirements for all da tasets or subsets refer to module 5 4 10 Moreover a correction factor may be applied even for Wem lt Wago in order to impro
38. addr gw 192 168 1 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of 9 four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr gw 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr gw 192 168 1 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 192 168 1 200 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four 9 numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr ip 192 168 1 200 Receive set addr ip 192 168 1 200 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 252 0 set addr nm mask This command sets the netmask mask where mask consists of four numbers 9 ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr nm 255 255 252 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 252 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time pr
39. alarm flow min 16 00 LPM set alarm flow min value set alarm flow max value These commands set the flow alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing flow alarm limits in liters per minute liters per hour The following example sets the flow alarm maximum value to 17 34 LPM Send set alarm flow max 17 34 Receive set alarm flow max 17 34 ok alarm flow pres min alarm flow pres max These commands report the current flow pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the flow pressure alarm minimum value is 10 0 mmHg Send alarm flow pres min Receive alarm flow pres min 10 0 mmHg set alarm flow pres min value set alarm flow pres max value These commands set the flow pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing flow pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the flow pressure alarm maximum value to 50 0 mmHg Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send set alarm flow pres max 50 Receive set alarm flow pres max 50 ok alarm flow temp min alarm flow temp max This command reports the current flow temperature alarm maximum value setting The following example reports that the flow temperature alarm maximum value is 20 0 C Send alarm flow temp max Rec
40. in the case of erec For details on erec formatting see the Record Layout Definition section at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send erec Receive erec 07 53 05 04 09 flags 110000 PM 0 000 1 24Hr Avg PM 0 000 1 Coef A 1 000 Bkg A 0 000 Range A 10000 000 Flow A 0 000 6 5 3 1 1 1 O Temp Threshold A 30 000 Temp Threshold A 35 000 list lrec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list Refer to the sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable X x time lrec srec lrec rec num srec rec num lexy rec num sexy rec num lrec aa bb 00 pp qq yy srec aa bb 00 pp qq yy rec The starting record index number 1 most recent num The number of records to return 1 to 10 x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set
41. lay States neeesser a rN E E E R 3 64 Test val Oe OQUtP tS at oe ie oe enon E R tetas 3 64 Set Analog O tp ts sne nueig fea Rak nii iR 3 64 Instrument Configuration sesesseeeesesesesreessstsssestseseseseseseseseseses 3 65 Contact Infotmati nes istesin eieiaeo iaaii 3 65 Alatmis M nussicsenseriennnnu aen iaria 3 66 Instrument Alarmsnicceiira henii RE 3 66 x Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Filter Tape We tet an 2 ot extents tan tut caraanin tuted sf cc atcade tues e 3 67 Max Filter Tape Counter iiicccieiaccapapetcetinndibsaneistulecannaiet 3 67 Detector Alaris ostiu r Suskind eh cSschelaep ca a a eee weed 3 67 Min and Max Alpha Alarms j c3 10 scotsestevstesferasedstaragderseeuseeosieuseess 3 68 Minand Max Beta Alarms nm nanaonan aa 3 68 Wephelometer Alaris Sci cos a eae Sis RA i 3 68 Nephelometer Temperature ci ctsa sce sata cts ae og 3 69 Min and Max Nephelometer Temperature Limits 3 69 Nephelometer RH iscsiticucutiuecpacveknunnuwadiacdaukatiaiys 3 70 Min and Max Nephelometer RH Limits 3 70 LED Cree nt acdsee ie sen educa cengaads odes nhn a RR N E a RR a 3 70 Min and Max LED Source Current Eimits cesta se eee 3 71 Reference Detector Voltage ssesssssssesessersesererrsrrrerrerrereesesreees 3 71 RH Temperature Alarms ccccts2enjoverscistedivbesveruiverietantavisverseceuneteins 3 72 Ampie RA fest rinor eaa at Ea A a AE N 3 72 Min and Max Ambient RH Lim
42. optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 Six Feet optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M included with optional 1 0 Expansion Board 105968 00 SHARP PCB Assembly 104100 00 RH Temperature PCB Assembly 7 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Primary Measurement Head Assy Tape Radius Guide Detector Amp Bottom Filter Tape Supply Reel Radius Spindle Tape Wheel Assy SHARP Connection Bracket Assy Inlet External Solenoid Tube Mounting Block Assy PE n Counter Wheel Photo Cam Final Assy o Bop l Interrupt Board Assy Cam Photo Interrupt SHARP Connection Board Bracket Assy Pressure Board Proportional Valve w fitting Assy ibi Ball ma a rarr S 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Front Panel Digital Output Board Front Panel Board Motor w Photo Motherboard Measurement Interface Interrupt Coupler Assy Power Supply Board Optional Transformer Figure 7 2 Model 5030 Component Layout Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing External Device Connection Components
43. represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Gesytec protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There is one control command supported by the Gesytec protocol This lt control commands is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N initiates a filter change The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt CR gt OR lt STX gt ST lt address gt lt SP gt lt control command gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual D 3 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands If the received command does not satisfy the above formats or if the lt address gt does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to initiate a filter chang
44. specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction provides an overview of product features describes the principle of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the instrument Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display screens the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that can be used with this analyzer Chapter 10 Model 5014i to 5030i U
45. the measuring system resumes operation automati cally However at least the first 12 h worth of data after voltage returns shall be discarded since the system needs an equilibration phase after restart until the BETA detector adjusts to ambient conditions see point 6 1 4 1 4 Set up times and warm up times 6 5 Assessment All instrument parameters are protected against loss through buffering After the power sup ply has returned the measuring device goes back to failure free operational condition and resumes measurement However at least the first 12 h worth of data after voltage returns shall be discarded since the system needs an equilibration phase after restart until the BETA detector adjusts to ambient conditions Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 92 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 5 Operating states The measuring system shall allow the control of important operating states by telemet rically transmitted status signals 6 2 Equipment PC for data acquisition 6 3 Performance of test
46. the user can retrieve measurement data and instrument information change parameters and perform tests for controlling the functionality of the measuring sys tem Mg 7 m3 NEP SMFL Lae to RANGERRRAUGEEED I AGSEALARM Figure 14 Main screen of the user interface 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 43 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F The main screen is on the top level of the user interface It usually displays the SHARP con centration By scrolling down with the arrow buttons f the screens for PM concentration BETA NEPH concentration ambient air conditions flow conditions and mass sensor data are displayed In addition the main screen displays a status bar with the current time as well as different status messages e g the current mode the nephelometer is set to In some cases the fol lowing symbols can be observed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that Theal bell icon indicat no parameter changes can be made from gt G he he alarm en icon indicates the front panel that an alarm is active The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the servi
47. used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 15 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram on page 6 20 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 21 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 23 SHARP Measurement Interface Board Pin Connections on page 6 24 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTF DATA J1 1 Ground RS485 to Interface Board RS485 to Interface Board w nN 10 BASE T J2 Ethernet Output Ethernet Output Ethernet Input NC NC on ee WO N Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Reference Pin Label Designator co N Om Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Ethernet Input NC NC EXPANSIONBD J3 ba oOo N oon A Wo N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Expansion Board RS485 to Expansion Board INTERFACE 24V J4 N 24V Ground 1 0 J5 o o N own A OO N gt a oO gt x a a co co N o ol A ow N N N O Thermo Fisher Scientific Power Fail Relay N C Contact Digital Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Digital Ground TTL Input 5 TTL Input 7 TTL Input 8 TTL Input 10
48. 0 1 207 0 3 97 8 28 2011 12 15 6 19 7 1009 69 2 1 3 212 0 0 98 8 29 2011 6 1 0 9 15 0 14 5 18 4 1008 66 7 20 243 0 0 99 8 30 2011 8 6 1 5 17 3 13 6 18 4 1008 73 6 0 8 236 0 0 100 8 31 2011 14 2 2 9 20 7 14 8 21 4 1007 72 0 0 7 225 0 0 101 9 1 2011 17 9 4 3 23 8 16 4 23 4 1006 71 6 0 6 182 0 0 102 9 2 2011 14 9 22 14 5 21 2 29 4 1004 72 2 0 8 160 0 0 103 9 3 2011 23 24 5 30 9 1002 67 0 1 3 132 3 6 104 9 4 2011 8 1 1 0 12 3 20 2 27 4 1002 79 5 11 223 0 6 105 9 5 2011 4 9 0 4 8 3 16 6 21 4 1009 62 9 1 9 217 0 0 106 9 6 2011 5 4 Ae 32 2 17 4 20 6 1005 66 8 2 6 219 4 8 107 9 7 2011 5 9 1 3 21 4 14 9 18 1 1004 73 1 2 2 246 5 7 108 9 8 2011 1 0 14 7 16 2 1003 84 7 11 209 3 3 109 9 9 2011 6 9 1 0 13 9 19 0 21 6 1004 86 9 0 4 167 0 0 110 9 10 2011 ara 23 8 29 7 1001 73 0 1 5 155 0 0 111 9 11 2011 5 6 1 4 24 9 16 2 22 1 1003 86 0 0 7 165 16 2 112 9 12 2011 5 6 1 0 18 0 19 4 24 6 1004 71 1 1 7 204 0 0 113 9 13 2011 6 7 0 9 12 7 16 7 20 8 1006 67 3 1 6 219 0 0 114 9 14 2011 6 9 1 0 14 8 15 2 19 6 1011 65 1 1 5 224 0 0 115 9 15 2011 11 7 1 5 12 8 14 1 20 4 1013 75 3 0 6 207 0 0 116 9 16 2011 13 3 17 1 21 9 1006 72 6 1 4 145 0 0 117 9 17 2011 16 8 21 4 1001 70 6 1 0 207 3 6 118 9 18 2011 3 5 13 3 16 5 998 76 4 1 0 200 4 5 119 9 19 2011 8 0 13 6 18 1 1008 75 8 1 4 231 0 9 120 9 20 2011 11 15 6 18 5 1014 78 0 0 5 196 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_9
49. 1 000 2 000 3 000 5 000 10 000 g m Minimum Detection Limit lt 0 5 pg m 1 hour 2 o lt 0 2 ug m 24 hour 2 o Resolution 0 1 ug m3 not to be confused with precision Precision 2 0 g m3 lt 80 g m3 5 g m3 gt 80 g m3 24 hour Accuracy for Mass Measurement 5 using NIST traceable mass foil set Data Averaging and Output Real time Mass Conc Average 1 minute Long Term Averaging 60 to 3 600 sec and 24 hour Data Output Rate every 1 second Operating Range The temperature of the sampled air may vary between 30 and 50 C The 50307 units must be weather protected within the range of 4 C to 50 C An optional Complete Outdoor Enclosure provides complete weather protection Non condensing lt 95 RH inside 5030 Sample Flow Volumetric flow control system uses a calibrated subsonic precision orifice and the measured ambient temperature and pressure to maintain constant volumetric flow rates Nominal Flow Rate 16 67 L min Flow Precision 2 of measured value Flow Accuracy lt 5 of measured value Data Storage Internal data logging of user specified variables capacity of 190 000 records Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 9 Introduction Specifications 1 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Filter Media Sample Filter Glass fiber filter type width 40 mm length 17 m Whatman Inc Approximately 650 filter tape changes per roll Inlet Accessories European or U
50. 1 1006 52 2 0 9 167 0 0 47 7 23 2013 13 8 1 8 12 8 25 5 33 7 1004 62 0 0 6 159 0 0 48 7 24 2013 20 1 5 0 24 9 21 7 27 6 1006 78 7 0 7 213 3 6 49 7 25 2013 11 6 4 5 38 4 22 5 28 1 1006 81 7 0 7 145 15 1 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS system 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR heinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Precisely Right Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 208 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Appendix 2 Filter weighing procedure A German test sites Cologne and Bornheim A 1 Carrying out the weighing All weightings are done in an air conditioned weighing room Ambient conditions are 20 C 1 C and 50 5 relative humidity which conforms to the requirements of Standard EN 14907 The filters used in the field test are weighed manually In order to condition the filters includ ing control filters they are placed on sieves to avoid overlap The specifications for pre and post weighing are specified beforehand and conform to the Standard Before sampling pre weighing After sampling post weighing Conditioning 48 h 2h Conditioning 48 h 2h Filter weighing Filter weighing Re conditioning 24 h 2 h Re c
51. 18 2012 11 18 2012 11 19 2012 11 19 2012 11 20 2012 11 20 2012 11 21 2012 11 21 2012 11 22 2012 11 22 2012 11 23 2012 11 23 2012 11 24 2012 11 24 2012 11 25 2012 11 25 2012 11 26 2012 11 26 2012 11 27 2012 11 27 2012 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T V Rheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 178 of 424 Annex 2 Dependence of zero point on ambient temperature SHARP Page 1 of 2 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientifc Standards Zero filter Type Model 50301 SHARP Serial No SN1 SN2 KIME E AE e a C ug m ug m g m ug m ug m ug m 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland S Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 179 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 2 Dependence of zero point on ambient temperature NEPH Page 2 of 2 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientifc Standards Zero filter Type Model 50301 SHA
52. 2012 Figure 21 Course of PM25 concentrations reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot winter 70 a 60 E 50 gt S 40 a 9 a 30 a o 20 lt fo O 10 0 o a a a o a a o o a a E D D t t o A A X A A A X A A A X N N e D D o S S 3 S 3 3 3 3 3 N 15 al o ite ro 5 N Te a A o A ro N Figure 22 Course of PM2 5 concentrations reference at the test site Teddington summer 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland 9 Air Pollution Control i i ir Pollution Contro Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 59 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The following figures show the measuring cabinet at the field test sites Cologne parking lot Bornheim motorway parking lot and Teddington Figure 23 Figure 24 Field test site Bornheim motorway parking lot 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx es x D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland 9S Air Pollut Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 60 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP
53. 24 h may not exceed 1 of this averag ing time Testing was carried out in compliance with the minimum requirements stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The calculated mass is related to a defined and actively regulated sam pling volume thus determining the particulate mass concentration Not applicable to PMz5 sampling sys tems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report Not applicable to PMz5 sampling sys tems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report A statistical correlation between the reference measuring method and the device reading could be demonstrat ed No deviation of the measured signal from the nominal value gt 0 5 g m caused by interference of moisture in the sample could be observed for PM25 No negative influence on the measured values at varying relative humidity was detected during the field test Comparability of the candidates with the reference method according to Guide Demonstration of Equiva lence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods 4 is also given for days with a relative humidity gt 70 It is possible to form daily averages based on the three measurement cy cles using the described instrument configuration and a cycle duration of 8 hours 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx m i TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air qua
54. 3 Return to the Pres Vacuum Calibration choose Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span Calibrate the vacuum pressure span according to the following a Use an acceptable vacuum manometer If using a blue Druck manometer place blue manometer on bench b Turn on manometer and let manometer self calibrate Do not move manometer while self calibrating c Connect the side of the manometer to the Delta P A port on the rear panel d Open Delta P A toggle vales to open flow through the manometer e Cal Vac Pressure Span by entering the actual value from the reference manometer f Press to save value The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Analog Output Testing 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 11 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Press to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear P 8 panel terminal pins where the meter is
55. 3 SN1 defective 8 18 2012 6 9 SN1 defective 8 19 2012 7 8 SN1 defective 8 20 2012 9 1 SN1 defective 8 21 2012 6 5 SN1 defective 8 22 2012 5 7 SN1 defective 8 23 2012 4 5 SN1 defective 8 24 2012 3 5 SN1 defective 8 25 2012 3 9 SN1 defective 8 26 2012 5 4 SN1 defective 8 27 2012 3 2 SN1 defective 8 28 2012 6 4 SN1 defective 8 29 2012 4 1 SN1 defective 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland Luftreinhaltung i Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 191 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 10 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in g m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio SN 1 SN2 Remark Test site PM2 5 PM2 5 PM10 PM10 PM2 5 PM10 PM2 5 PM2 5 ug m ug m g m ug m ug m ug m 8 30 2012 SN 1 defective Teddington Summer 8 31 2012 SN1 defective 9 1 2012 SN1 defective 9 2 2012 SN1 defective 9 3 2012 X T SN1 defective 9 4 2012 t SN1 defective 9 5 2012 SN1 defective 9 6 2012 Stop PM10 Reference 9 7 2012 Inlet gt Zero filter 9 8 2012 Zero point 9 9 2012 Zero point 9
56. 32 e Proportional Valve Replacement on page 7 33 e Detector Assembly Replacement on page 7 34 e Flow RTD Replacement on page 7 36 e Transformer Replacement on page 7 37 e Radius Tube Replacement on page 7 38 e Ambient RH Temperature Replacement on page 7 39 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 41 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 42 e Removing the SHARP Optics Cover on page 7 44 e External Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 45 e SHARP RH Temp Sensor Replacement on page 7 46 e SHARP Interface Board Replacement on page 7 47 e Delrin Nut Replacement on page 7 49 e Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Replacement on page 7 51 e Case Cable Replacement on page 7 52 e External Zeroing Filter on page 7 53 e Service Locations on page 7 54 7 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing th
57. 4 3 1 14 4 0 9 3 9 1020 81 8 0 6 138 0 3 176 1 17 2012 33 0 3 9 11 8 0 6 4 7 1022 81 5 0 5 123 0 3 177 1 18 2012 19 2 4 7 24 7 3 1 ell 1018 84 3 1 5 126 6 6 178 1 19 2012 3 5 2 6 73 2 7 2 11 9 1006 84 8 4 1 253 12 8 179 1 20 2012 6 1 2 6 42 0 3 1 5 4 1008 85 5 3 1 239 5 1 180 1 21 2012 2 3 7 3 10 3 1000 81 9 5 3 261 6 9 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 199 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 7 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug m ug ms C C hPa m s 4 mm 181 1 22 2012 Bornheim Winter 5 2 0 8 14 5 6 4 9 3 1003 77 0 4 7 271 1 8 182 1 23 2012 7 4 1 3 17 6 4 2 Tea 1008 83 7 3 0 268 3 6 183 1 24 2012 2T 2 3 5 5 1014 87 4 0 9 188 0 0 184 1 25 2012 19 9 5 0 25 1 2 5 4 2 1012 81 0 3 9 126 0 0 185 1 26 20
58. 4 8 Combined Datasets 218 ug m3 51 0 947 1 090 0 036 1 159 1 101 21 88 100 0 All Data 217 0 962 1 055 0 014 0 066 0 241 18 34 27 2 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx g a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 158 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Bornheim Winter a Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer e Teddington Summer iseecscenad lt 18 ug m 3 Line 2 18 pg m 3 Line PM 5030i Sharp yg m All Data Line 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 48 Reference vs candidate SN 1 amp SN 2 measured component PMps all test sites 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 159 of 424 PM 5030i Sharp pg m 100 90 80 70 4 60 5 a SN1 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM 5
59. 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response describe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word
60. 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 4 Evaluation All instrument functions listed in the manual are available and can be activated The current system status is monitored continuously and problems are indicated by a series of different warning messages An external check of the zero point using a zero filter is possible at any time A check of the radiometric measurement using the mass transfer standard foil set can also be performed anytime It is not possible to produce a reproducible signal for the sensitivity of the nephelometer us ing external test standards However the nephelometer is regularly flushed with zero air dur ing operation auto zero function as part of every filter change thus determining and docu menting the position of the zero point on a regular basis Information on the current and pre vious NEPH backgrounds can be retrieved from the instrument at all times Since the nephe lometer is continuously calibrated with a very stable radiometric measurement a separate examination of the stability of the nephelometer s signal under operating conditions can be omitted 6 5 Assessment All system functions listed in the manual are available can be activated and function well The current system status is continuously monitored and displayed by a series of status messages The results of the external zero checks performed with a zero filter during the field tests as well as the results of the regular mass coefficien
61. 6 0 8 7 10 9 1015 82 3 1 2 161 0 3 223 3 4 2012 30 8 9 7 31 4 8 6 11 5 1008 84 6 2 6 129 10 2 224 3 5 2012 5 4 3 6 67 6 5 6 7 8 1010 70 7 4 6 162 0 0 225 3 6 2012 14 0 3 8 27 3 4 8 10 3 1018 72 5 1 6 173 0 0 226 3 7 2012 15 0 5 4 36 4 5 2 7 8 1011 76 5 3 8 218 9 8 227 7 17 2012 Teddington Summer 4 3 3 69 0 19 2 25 2 1001 76 1 0 3 213 0 5 228 7 18 2012 4 0 2 0 50 6 16 4 19 6 991 83 8 0 4 212 1 3 229 7 19 2012 4 6 1 6 34 3 16 4 21 2 994 TF 0 2 270 0 0 230 7 20 2012 5 0 0 8 14 9 16 2 20 0 1001 69 7 0 7 221 0 3 231 7 21 2012 6 0 1 3 22 4 16 9 22 8 1007 64 9 0 3 189 0 0 232 7 22 2012 6 9 1 5 21 0 18 6 23 8 1007 61 9 0 6 203 0 0 234 7 23 2012 8 6 2 0 22 7 21 4 29 4 1002 57 0 0 4 197 0 0 234 7 24 2012 11 4 2 0 17 8 22 8 30 8 997 56 3 0 3 213 0 0 235 7 25 2012 18 1 29 16 1 24 2 32 3 998 47 1 1 0 117 0 0 236 7 26 2012 21 2 4 6 21 8 21 8 28 3 996 62 0 Aci 125 0 0 237 7 27 2012 12 0 5 4 44 7 19 9 25 1 992 60 4 0 9 256 0 0 238 7 28 2012 1 8 17 1 23 8 992 55 5 0 3 236 0 0 239 7 29 2012 1 3 13 6 19 9 995 78 7 0 2 198 61 240 7 30 2012 49 ia 23 9 16 3 22 0 997 66 3 0 3 195 4 3 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separa
62. 6 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug ms Lg m3 C C hPa m s q mm 151 10 21 2011 Bornheim Summer 17 8 4 2 23 6 5 2 11 4 1019 79 3 41 154 0 0 152 10 22 2011 5 4 6 8 11 9 1013 69 3 3 9 128 0 0 153 10 23 2011 23 1 6 1 26 3 7 4 13 6 1007 71 6 2 3 138 0 0 154 10 24 2011 15 4 4 0 25 7 9 8 12 4 999 67 2 3 8 132 0 0 155 10 25 2011 11 6 2 0 17 0 10 9 13 0 997 68 8 1 9 132 0 0 156 10 26 2011 6 3 1 6 24 5 9 4 15 7 1006 74 9 0 9 171 0 0 157 10 27 2011 18 7 3 5 18 9 10 1 13 4 1008 80 4 27 126 0 0 158 10 28 2011 17 9 3 2 18 0 14 0 20 1 1016 75 8 0 7 149 0 0 159 10 29 2011 3 1 13 5 17 2 1015 79 8 1 0 132 0 9 160 10 30 2011 11 9 2 6 22 1 13 5 18 2 1014 86 7 0 4 170 0 0 161 10 31 2011 4 4 11 9 Ta 1009 87 0 1 0 152 0 3 162 11 1 2011 22 4 4 8 21 4 12 2 15 6 1007 83 2 2 0 134 1 8 163 11 2 2011 17 2 5 3 30 5 12 5 14 7 1002 80 8 29 124 0 3 164 11 3 2011 10 0 3 2 32 2 13 7 17 3 995 69 7 3 8 140 0 0 165 11 4 2011 14 0 2 2 15 4 166 11 5 2011 1 6 167 11 6 2011 55 0 6 4 11 6 168 11 7 2011 34 4 4 8 13 9 P 169 11 8 2014 43 7 56 128 Outage of weather station 170 11 9 2011 23 7 5 4 22 8 171 11 10 2011 14 1 4 5 32 1 172 11 11 2011 27 4 4 5 16 3 173 11 12 2011 6 7 LZ 9 4 1024 81 6 4 1 135 0 0 174 11 13 2011 21 5 6 0 28 0 5 4 10 1 1023 83 7 2 4 131 0 0 175 1 16 2012 Bornheim Winter 21
63. 62 0 30 The graphical representation of the flow rates at the test site used as example Cologne win ter nominal 16 67 l min shows that all values determined during sampling deviate less than 5 from the respective nominal value The deviation of the 24 h averages for the total flow rate of 16 67 l min is as well significantly smaller than the specified 3 of the nominal val ue All determined daily averages present deviations less than 3 from the nominal value all instantaneous values deviate less than 5 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 31 and Table 32 show the determined flow parameters Figure 39 and Figure 40 illus trate the flow measurements for both candidates SN 1 and SN 2 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 140 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 31 Parameters for flow measurement 24 h average SN 1 field No 24h values Dev from nominal Std Dev l min 16 67 000 002 17 20 16 56 Table 32 Parameters for flow measurement 24 h average SN 2 field No 24h values Dev from nominal Std Dev l min
64. 7 19 2013 16 3 14 8 7 20 2013 17 3 16 0 7 21 2013 18 0 17 7 7 22 2013 23 2 22 0 7 23 2013 25 4 24 5 7 24 2013 31 5 30 3 7 25 2013 21 3 20 3 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 206 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 8 Ambient conditions at the additional test site Bornheim Summer 2013 Page 1 of 2 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation pg m pg m C C hPa m s 4 mm 1 6 7 2013 Bornheim 16 6 21 7 29 1 1010 55 5 1 0 Bii 0 0 2 6 8 2013 21 4 26 8 1005 62 3 21 243 0 0 3 6 9 2013 13 8 15 6 19 2 1001 78 7 1 8 273 4 5 4 6 10 2013 15 7 14 4 18 1 1005 75 9 1 2 253 0 6 5 6 11 2013 12 6 3 2 25 4 18 8 23 8 1008 61 5 0 6 198 0 0 6 6 12 2013 6 8 1 3 19 5 21 1 23 7 1008 67 1 1 0 181 0 0 7 6 13 2013 5 5 0 3 4 7 17 0 27 6 1007 77 9 1 3 209 22 5 8 6 14 2013 5 3 1 1 21 4 16 1 21 2 1009 65 4 0 6 181 0 0 9 6 15 2013 5 2 0 4 6 9 17 2 22 6 1005 63 1 1 4 209 0 0 10 6 16 2013 7 5 0 6 8 6 17 7 23 7 1007 63 9 0 7 226 0 0
65. 8 6 4 312 10 10 2012 13 8 13 9 12 8 12 6 313 10 11 2012 6 3 6 4 5 6 Te 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 193 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 1 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation pg m pg m C C hPa m s g mm f 3 8 2011 Cologne Winter 31 4 6 4 20 5 7 9 14 4 1013 54 0 2 3 147 0 0 2 3 9 2011 18 9 5 2 27 7 7 1 10 6 1010 75 8 3 5 232 0 9 3 3 10 2011 9 2 10 1 1008 68 9 5 3 231 0 0 4 3 11 2011 16 4 3 1 19 0 8 1 11 4 1008 69 5 3 8 197 0 3 5 3 12 2011 3 5 12 1 16 4 998 61 6 3 3 147 0 3 6 3 13 2011 13 2 2 0 15 2 tie 14 1 1001 77 3 2 0 156 1 5 7 3 14 2011 19 1 9 8 13 8 1010 81 2 0 3 114 0 0 8 3 15 2011 37 6 7 2 19 2 12 3 19 6 1006 66 2 22 96 0 0 9 3 16 2011 56 4 9 3 16 6 9 5 16 9 1000 71 9 2 5 126 0 0 10 3 17 2011 50 1 8 8 17 6 5 7 7 2 1009 86 9 4 7 267 0 0 11 3 18 2011 28 2 10 2 36 3 6 0 7 6 1018 89 1 ist 135 11 1 12 3 19 2011 5 8 5 0 12 1 1027 59 5 1 2 123 0 0 13 3 20
66. A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration Auto Detector Calibration The Auto Detector Calibration screen allows the user to optimize the detector performance This should be done at least once per year and as often as once per quarter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Auto This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes until completed Thereafter a high voltage HV beta reference threshold and alpha threshold will be assigned a new valve 4 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Nephelometer Calibration Nephelometer RH Nephelometer Temperature Calibration Calibration Procedure The Nephelometer Calibration submenu is used to view and set the nephelometer calibration The nephelometer calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration aa BUES Pm Tit BAPE at Lid DN EEE TE Sanad Bone The Nephelometer RH screen allows the user to view and calibrate the nephelometer relative humidity Note Calibration of the nephelometer RH must be done with the heater in the OFF position A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibra
67. A PC was connected locally via Ethernet to the AMS and the transfer of data including sys tem status was tested Furthermore it is possible to monitor and operate the instrument via serial interface It is also easy to monitor and operate the AMS remotely with an appropriate router or mo dem 6 4 Evaluation The measuring system enables an extensive telemetric control and operation in a variety of ways Ethernet RS232 RS485 6 5 Assessment The measuring systems can be extensively monitored and operated from an external PC via modem or router Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 93 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 6 Switch over Switch over between measurement and functional check and or calibration shall be possible telemetrically by computer control or manual intervention 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The AMS can be monitored and partly operated by the user directly on the instrument or via telemetric remote control Some functions e g performing a
68. B of 4 RSS is determined analogue to the calculation in module 5 4 10 With respect to b The value of the slope b may be used as a term to correct all input values y according to the following equation Yi Y icorr g b The resulting values of Yi cor may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression Y corr C dx and Ue el Voss aie u x F c d 1 x F x u b n 2 with u b uncertainty of the original slope b the value of which has been used to obtain Yi corr Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogo nal regression are described in detail in annex B of 4 RSS is determined analogue to the calculation in module 5 4 10 With respect to c The values of the slope b and of the intercept a may be used as correction terms to correct all input values y according to the following equation _yiza Vicon b The resulting values of Yi cor may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression Y corr C dx 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 167 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F
69. BKG until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt PM Bkg ERED CH perm PPP L Ea ln BA i PM Coefficient The PM Coefficient screen allows the user to manually adjust the PM coefficient The PM concentration based on the SET COEF TO is displayed to facilitate setting The PM concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET COEF until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt PM Coef Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Calibration Factors Menu SHARP Background SHARP Coefficient Nephelometer Background Values 3 16 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The SHARP Background screen allows the user to manually adjust the SHARP Intercept The SHARP concentration based on the SET BKG TO is displayed to facilitate the setting The SHARP concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET BKG until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt SHARP Bkg The SHARP Coefficient screen allows the user to manually adjust the SHARP coefficient The SHARP concentration based on the SET COEF TO is displayed to facilitate setting The SHARP concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET COEF until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt SHARP Coef The N
70. Cleaning on page 5 5 e Pump Rebuilding on page 5 6 e Leak Test on page 5 6 e Filter Tape Replacement on page 5 7 e Greasing the Cam on page 5 8 e External Pump Exhaust Filter on page 5 8 e Cleaning the SHARP Optics Assembly on page 5 10 Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement Parts A Cleaning the Outside Case A Cleaning the Inlets A U S EPA PM Inlet 5 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts and the associated replacement procedures WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the labels on the case Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside
71. EEE of 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board DHAT Py Tame p piiopi a Lb ib i Detector Board Voltages The Detector Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Detector Board ERED CHA Pi Tam oH miiohel BEEP umt Bone PME TY Saad Haat ake ME Scala Pi EE EE Nephelometer Board The Nehpelometer Board screen read only is used to display the voltage Voltages readings on the nephelometer board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Nephelometer Board 3 60 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu RH Temperature The RH Temperature screen read only displays the current relative humidity and temperature readings The board temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt RH Temperature Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum screen read only displays the current pressure readings The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer The vacuum is the amount of vacuum under the filter tape The flow pressure
72. Ground PURGE 3 DC J25 24V 2 Spare1_Sol VD1 J26 AIN_VD 1 2 Ground VD2 J27 AIN_VD 2 2 Ground BOARD TEMP J28 Board_Therm 2 Ground SPARE FLOW J29 24V 2 Aout_Spare_Flow 3 Ground PURGE 4 DC J30 1 24V 2 Spare2_Sol PRESS BD J31 1 15V Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 17 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator z9 5 Oo aoa N on A OO N Signal Description AIN_30PSIA AIN_FLOW_1 AIN_VAC_2 AIN_FLOW_2 AIN_VAC_1 5V 15V Ground PRESS TEMP J32 w N Press_RID Press_RID Ground CNTR WHEEL J33 mo N OQO wo A WO N 5V Ground Ground Ground VOA3 5V NC NC BETA 1 J34 o oO A WO N Ground RS485 RS485 Ground 5V Ground BETA 2 J35 o oO A WO N Ground RS485 RS485 Ground 5V Ground LOAD MOTOR J36 24V Load_Motor_On SP PHOTO J37 5V Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin on FP WO N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Ground Ground 5V VO_SP CAM WHEEL J38 YN oOo om FP WO N 5V Ground Ground NC Dig_Slit 5V NC HWELL 1 J39 FP WoO N AIN_RTDP 5V AIN_RHP_Hum Ground SAMPLE 2 TEMP J40 wo N Sample2A_RTD Sample2B_RTD Ground SAMPLE 1 TEMP wo N Sample1A_R
73. In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Analog Input Voltages The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs Pull ups are provided on all of the inputs so if nothing they will read 1 if an input is brought to ground it will read 0 In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Digital Inputs Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Diagnostics Menu Relay States Test Analog Outputs Set Analog Outputs 3 64 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual EH pikari Ce a E S a E The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output Pi Taal tH ithe Haat abe EE Scala Pi EE EE The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Tes
74. Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Figure 3 5 Common Flags Figure 3 6 Detector A Flags The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to select the parameter none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected record field The selected item is shown Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Volumetric Conditions by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Analog Inputs ip priori PIL ERE i Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Commit Content meh ET eT ai CHES Pi EH Chi Sneek Enone ETET Sed h i i EHO pmp pri Eo Eiee HH Pihenni i Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging
75. Instrument Controls Menu Temperature Threshold The Temperature Threshold screen is used to change the temperature threshold value e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Temp Threshold Pr irog CHEER Bai PERT pihe frin i i Filter Tape Control The Filter Tape Control menu allows the user to manually move or set the next time period for tape control e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control Manual The Manual screen allows the user to move or stop the filter tape and open or close the measurement bench e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH vided i aa E SO a EA Mass Limit The Mass Limit screen allows the user to set the mass limit The default is 1 500 pg or 1 5 mg and is specified as part of any U S EPA and TUV approvals However the limit can be increased as much as 5 000 pg for non regulatory monitoring e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Mass Limit DH vided POPLAR NextTime The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time 24 hour format for the next filter tape change e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Next Time RRS E CHT mito Wi rnd E PURE
76. J1 Pin FP WoO N Signal Description GNDA 5V Temp RH DET SRC J2 on FP WwW N ADC1 IRED PHD A PHD K NC DETECTOR J3 GNDA Det Out 5V Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Service Locations Locations Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 4 5V DATA RS485 J4 1 Ground 2 RS485 3 RS485 VALVE DRIVE 1 J7 24V DC 2 Drive 1 VALVE DRIVE 2 J8 24V DC 2 Drive 2 24V IN J9 24V DC 2 Ground 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 25 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 50307 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced or is an expendable item not covered under warranty Expendable items are indicated with an asterisk in the Model 5030i Replacement Parts table For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode section in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making
77. Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Manual Alpha Efficiency The Alpha Efficiency Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the Coefficient alpha efficiency value 3 94 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Note This value is set in the factory and should not be adjusted A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Alpha Eff Coefficient aa ee et Taic Detector Calibration The Detector Calibration submenu is used to view and set the detector calibration The detector calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician on a defined service interval and at least once per year or if the detector is replaced A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration ili Auto Detector Calibration The Auto Detector Calibration screen allows the user to conduct a detector optimization routine that will establish the optimal plateau for detector performance This process takes approximately 30 minutes and will set a high voltage and thresholds for alpha and beta reference counts e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Auto Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 95 Operation Service Menu Manual
78. Oe ee 3 105 Unlock Unser ments iinne scr cece eds EREE i 3 105 Chapter 4 Calibration aaaea sacks cc ct teagan cnet aadaki naonana adnada nanginin 4 1 Frequency of Calibration esssssssessssiseseseseersrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrstseseseseseseseses 4 1 Equipment Required s s sssesssseisesesesesrsesrsesrsrsrsrstsrstststststsestsesesesesereses 4 1 Pre CalibratioN enisi sansa ie ioia RA Erge Ba AEEA NSSE 4 2 Calibration Procedure s jecsi detent dead 4 2 RH Temperature Calibration iis taba nadia eich dt ecg lua ee 4 3 Ambient T emperat re 23 cate ceases sees e R 4 3 Ambient Relative Um Gt yeas et cre enone vaG attest aiutccaeaentecee 4 3 Flow Temp tatirecorireintnen hed eke ode natal nes bal eetact as 4 4 Pressure Vacuum Calibration iacci2iscvecsseit a iesdiaciiaeetitinetiiniecndie 4 4 Barometer Pressure ali ratio marie vos del ccechetet ater tem edvecd Meade Seapets 4 4 Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zeb 5 2 eiesccadatasceeesasececanaseeensentaciedeseaad 4 5 Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Spats d ioe hie etesae ns onuaeoseds 4 5 Calibrate Flow Pressure S paiva Gio6 eee sec tee dane eee seed dseeeees 4 6 Flow Calibration sienien sea iaa a dae 4 7 Auto Flow Calibtati n osioon kot i E Aa a as 4 7 Mass Calibratio Nesser A E 4 7 Mass Coefficient ance Gs cet a EEE E acacia 4 9 Auto Mass MCOCTICICN i ataverdisestone Soest mses iaudedstacncesteangene eek 4 9 Detector Calibration einn tea Matsa ites tas cara teen tu kt Ge 4 12 Auto Detector Calibrate ties scented sa
79. PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F cepts of October 2001 and further specified in VDI 4203 Part 3 Testing of automated measuring systems Test procedures for point related ambient air measuring systems for gaseous and particulate air pollutants of August 2004 Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 and VDI 4203 Part 3 were republished after an extensive revision with latest update September 2010 Unfortunately after this revision uncertainties and con tradictions remain regarding the concrete minimum requirements on the one hand and the general relevance of the test points on the other hand when testing particulate ambient air measuring devices The following test points require clarification 6 1 5 3 2 Repeatability standard deviation at zero point no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 3 Repeatability standard deviation at reference point not relevant for particulate devices 6 1 5 3 4 Linearity lack of fit not relevant for particulate devices 6 1 5 3 7 Sensitivity coefficient of surrounding temperature no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 8 Sensitivity coefficient of supply voltage no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 11 Standard deviation from paired measurement no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 13 Short term drift not relevant for particulate device
80. Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Ambient RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Sample RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Ambient Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Board Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow Vol User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Beta User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Beta Raw User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Alpha Raw User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Mass 200 5 000 Beta Zero 0 65 000 Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value External Alarms 0 7 000 Neph Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph RH User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph IRED User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Neph Ref 350 2000 Beta Ref 0 65 000 Mass Comp 0 100 Choose Signal to Output The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output signal choices Choices are grouped into three categories Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to select the output signal that will be assigned to each analog channel The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 5 for a list of items for each signal g
81. Reference yg m Figure 49 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PMps all test sites PM 5030i Sharp yg m 100 90 4 80 4 30 4 20 4 70 4 60 4 50 4 40 J A a SN2 a We i V a f a F 7 J s a ay T 0 r r r r r r r r 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 50 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PMos all test sites 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Precisely Right Page 160 of 424 A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 100 7 90 a SN1 Cologne Winter Pa Pa 80 4 7 70 4 2 f B 60 Sf 3 50 4 7 40 A a 30 4 Vaa 20 a afl 10 5 a K a E E E E E ee 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 51 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Cologne winter 100 j V 90 J SN2 Cologne Winter a ae 80 Pa 70 4 i 2 v 2 60 a Fa ba A 8 50 7 40 A 30 ri R 20 on vA 10 af a i 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m
82. Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 214 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F B UK test site Teddington B 1 Implementation of Weighing Protocols NPL National Physical Laboratory were subcontracted to weigh filters manually for the field study In line with EN14907 filters were kept in the weighing room for less than 28 days the glove box used for weighing was maintained at 20 1 C and 50 5 and filters were weighed twice before and after sampling Table 41 summarises the conditioning and weigh ing timescales utilised Table 41 Conditioning and weighing timescales Pre Sampling Post Sampling Condition minimum of 48 hours Condition 48 hours Weigh Filters Weigh Filters Condition 24 hours Condition 24 hours Weigh Filters Weigh Filters At the start of each weighing session the balance was exercised to remove mechanical stiff ness and then calibrated At the start and end of each batch of filters a 50 and 200 mg check weight were weighed In line with the recommendations of the UK PM Equivalence Report 8 filters were weighed relative to a 100 mg check weight and not a tare filter as the latter was shown to lose mass over time Four filters were weighed between check weights as the balance drift over time had been shown to be small 740
83. SN 1 and 217 SN 2 valid paired values The parameters of the calibration function y m x b were determined by orthogonal regression The analysis function is the reversal of the cali bration function It reads x 1 m y b m The slope m of the regression line characterises the sensitivity of the measuring system the ordinate intercept b characterises the zero point 6 4 Evaluation This results in the following parameters Table 26 Parameters of the calibration and analysis function measured component PM25 System No Calibration function Analysis function SO E System 1 1 087 0 408 0 920 0 375 SN 1 System 2 1 055 0 066 0 948 0 063 SN 2 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 133 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment A statistical correlation between the reference measuring method and the device reading could be demonstrated Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results See module 5 4 10 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability te
84. SN 1 and SN 2 The candidates were set up as follows Component threshold for heater regulation SN 1 PM25 58 SN 2 PM25 50 The following test program was performed e comparison campaign with a minmum of 40 valid paired values reference vs candi date system e determination of the uncertainty between candidate systems Ups according to Guide e determination of the expanded uncertainty of the candidate systems according to Guide e application of the correction factors terms determined in chapter 6 1 5 4 10 Cal culation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments e recalculation of equivalence of the 4 data sets from the existing suitability test and the additional data set Bornheim Summer 2013 with different thresholds for the heater regulation according to the approach from point 8 2 Suitability testing der CEN TS 16450 9 The additional campaign was performed between 07 June 2013 and 25 July 2013 The am bient conditions during the campaign were as follows 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 65 of 424 Table 8 Ambient conditions at the additional site Bornheim
85. Settings gt NTP Svr egl ep prr fant Pii fini i 1 0 Configuration The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration O EH OE Bel PIL Eo Miket Output Relay Settings The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected 3 44 Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed WH hid Instrument State The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types
86. Settings gt Serial Settings gt Data Bits DH Guided PLP The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None default Even or Odd In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Parity DH minded Piet The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Stop Bits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Selection Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID number The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 50302 has a default inst
87. Summer 2013 shown as daily mean values Bornheim motorway parking lot summer 2013 No of paired values 44 reference Ratio PMz25 PM1o Range 39 1 75 1 Average 59 9 Ratio Volatiles PM25 Range 4 7 38 4 Average 17 4 Air temperature C Range 13 2 27 6 Average 19 8 Air pressure hPa Range 1001 1020 Average 1010 Rel humidity Range 52 2 86 1 Average 67 8 Wind velocity m s Range 0 2 3 5 Average 1 2 Precipitation mm d Range 0 0 34 6 Average 32 All values are to be found in Appendix 7 PM measuring values and 8 ambient conditions In total 45 paired values were determined A significant outlier according to Grubbs is the paired value for the reference PM25 of 18 July 2013 Ref1 11 3yg m Ref2 9 0 g m These values were discarded from the data pool Therefore 44 paired values are available for evaluation The evaluation of the comparison measurements according to the Guide 4 leads to the fol lowing result 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Y 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 66 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 9 Results of the equivalence t
88. TE Aad fuese PEO Fed bo bi Feed Eo beet FD ETE DH mini i fimi nE g a a DHAN Popop Rmi mii Bot PE Period The Period screen allows the user to set the period The next filter tape change would be scheduled after the number of hours the period is set for The official tape change for TUV and U S EPA for PM2 5 and PM is set for 8 hours 3 22 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Period Counter The Counter screen allows the user to record the current filter tape count and reset the tape count to zero e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Counter Poh fen Mm Tore H d hi Tape Zero Ratio The Tape Zero Ratio screen allows the user to set the occurrence of nephelometer zeroing after X filter changes For PM2 X 42 and for PMio X 14 based on a 2 week zeroing cycle A conservative ratio of 1 1 will zero the nephelometer with every filter tape change e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Tape Zero Ratio Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Volumetric Conditions Volumetric The Volumetric Conditions menu allows the user to turn Conditions temperature pressure compensation on and off and to set the standard pressure and temperature values in vario
89. Table 21 Dependence of the zero point NEPH on surrounding temperature deviation in ug m average of three measurements Temperature Deviation TNE SNEINERH a gt CC Oo mod The results of the three single measurements are presented in annexes 2 and 3 of the ap pendix 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 111 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 8 Sensitivity coefficient of supply voltage The sensitivity coefficient of supply voltage shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 A value c at 70 to 80 of the up per limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note This item cannot be evaluated according to the current versions of Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 and VDI 4203 Part 3 September 2010 when testing particulate meas uring systems due to the fact that a minimum requirement has not been defined By resolu tion of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 reference is made to the following requirement in the previous version of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 June 2002 The change in the measured values
90. The following example reports that the ncal is functional Send alarm ncal status Receive alarm ncal status ok alarm neph led cur min alarm neph led cur max These commands report the current nephelometer LED alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the nephelometer LED alarm minimum value is 50 mA Send alarm neph led cur min Receive alarm neph led cur min 50 0 mA set alarm neph led cur min value set alarm neph led cur max value These commands set the nephelometer LED alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing nephelometer LED alarm limits in mA The following example sets the nephelometer LED alarm maximum value to 75 0 mA Send set alarm neph led cur min 75 Receive set alarm neph led cur min 75 ok alarm neph rh min alarm neph rh max These commands report the current nephelometer relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the nephelometer relative humidity alarm minimum value is 5 0 Send alarm neph rh min Receive alarm neph rh min 5 0 set alarm neph rh min value set alarm neph rh max value These commands set the nephelometer relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing nephelometer relative humidity alarm limits in percent The following example sets the nephelometer relative humidity alarm maximum val
91. Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Contents AVE OCU CNG EN OND esaisscced a sasssctencSatddecsnndnnsanndnentaotaninmondunte bebe dunmdnassntanauisauananiaatidy 1 1 P inciple Ol Operation a blonde essa ERENS 1 3 SPECICA LIONS to ethene vacate eea cated ra hus aieiaa eae nie tease 1 8 Installation eiis raisini asuadbvbaidatncasuedicdieussuassuaaeaicsassincanas 2 1 P ckaging and Transport neirinne RR t 2 1 PIFRE en ive aed wthaa aaa EA E EN 2 2 Unpacking and Inspection ssssssseeesssseieeeeeeetsestersssesrsrsrsrsisesesesesesesesrses 2 2 Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures 00 cceseseeseeseeeeeeseeeeneeee 2 3 Acceptance Testei a a i a 2 4 One Point Temperature Verification ae c ccc taeandgestanclancenace 2 7 One Point RH Sensor Verification ss essesesseseseeeesesesseseseseesesesseses 2 7 One Point Barometric Pressure Verification s sssesesesessesesreeeseses 2 8 One Point Volumetric Flow Rate Verification s ssssssssssesseseseseeseses 2 8 Leak Check Procedure ists vac cata ae castes E N a 2 9 Nephelometer Source Verification e ssesesesesesessssesesreeesesseseresesese 2 9 Nephelometer eTOCs belie al al ca ie ea ate Coa 2 9 Sepan an a a tes atissencenacsales ana beds tustestesassslens 2 10 Inlet Systemi er e E E E T 2 10 Heater iv tiencaientt dassedansanueal aayia uawlscdiwuah odes tube ictalad aystn sven aled dd pasetabuncste 2 11 Sample Tube Extension Lengths 1 02 cccstesccsceti
92. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her Own expense A iv Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual WEEE Symbol WEEE Symbol The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE and the equipment that has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 amp Where to Get Help Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual v About This Manual Where to Get Help vi Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific
93. This command reports whether pressure compensation is for actual or standard conditions The following example shows the pressure compensation is standard Send pres comp Receive pres comp std set pres comp selection selection act std Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration These commands turn the pressure compensation to either actual or standard conditions The following example turns the pressure compensation to actual Send set pres comp act Receive set pres comp act ok pres std This command reports the standard pressure The following example reports that the standard pressure is 760 mmHg Send pres std Receive pres std 760 mmHg set pres std value This command sets the standard pressure to value where value is a floating point number representation of standard pressure between 0 to 760 mmHg The following example sets the standard pressure to 730 mmHg Send set pres std 730 Receive set pres std 730 ok range This command reports the current PM range If the mode is incorrect the instrument responds with can t wrong settings The following example reports that the PM range is set to 5 mg m according to Table B 5 Send range Receive range 4 5 000E 00 mg m3 set range selection This command selects the PM ranges according to Table B 5 The following example sets the PM range to 10 mg m Send set range 5 Rec
94. This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of your offset value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Calibration Procedure Flow Temperature Assuming the instrument cover has been removed the heater has been turned off and removed from the instrument and the instrument has been sampling room temperature air for 1 hour this calibration can now proceed Using a NIST traceable thermometer as a reference collocated next to the small sample tube inlet on top of the instrument measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 50302 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of your offset value Pressure Vacuum There are three pressure sensors that can be calibrated however the Calibration primary sensor to be calibrated is the barometric pressure sensor Both the vacuum sensor and pressure flow sensors are re zeroed automatically with every filter tape change Barometer Pressure eran
95. a a R 8 5 EEE AN SOLOMON waa son snauenp annant i a a a a 8 5 Pump Intake T Si aul ut ann e a a ease NSE 8 5 FirmWat tiasutssiiqctetut yaeatedeeagtoditiagedadsladdatatGhettideidddasst sadatedsbaddotakdhyanlartig 8 5 Instrument Control sncssaissstteninwsvatnichilesndsieneiededastienvasicebdanntees 8 5 Monitoring Signals menaient iii 8 6 Output Comm nication sinni aiar 8 6 Electr nics arien TETE E E E E E 8 6 Motherboard einir fsada a e a a a a a 8 6 Nephelometer Interface Board ssssssssssssesessssseseeesessrrrsterrreserrssesese 8 7 Nephelometer interface board connectors ssssssssssssseseseeeseesesesessses 8 7 Measurement Interface Board s ssssssssesesesesesesesersrsrsrsrersrersesesesesesessse 8 7 Measurement Interface Board Connectors essesseseseseeeeseseeeressses 8 8 Flow Sensor OVS te aad scar aa aa oh Gas Saco R eek r cade neat eee 8 8 Pressure Sensor SSCHIOLY Secrets in us cs hal ace Sasa nat eaGicaeaevyar ee 8 8 Detector Amplifier Assemiblys fe cect Wixteanscesset ete area recente 8 8 Digital Output Board js2ccecieee desi eeiitieeeoiiewuetiacdaginlincucn 8 8 I O Expansion Board Optional dssst1ic nsacetitiacidsctitiendcontes 8 9 Front Panel Connector Board oca 2jccheetietioe eel a teceed ects nataceae ated 8 9 VO Components en siete cisstiasd e a a ivoheatederice 8 9 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xv Contents xvi Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Appendix A Appendix B Model 50307 S
96. accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A
97. adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 8 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 12 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 14 e Fan Filter Replacement on page 7 14 e Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement on page 7 15 e Detector Amplifier Board Calibration on page 7 17 e External Pump Replacement on page 7 17 e Pressure Board Replacement on page 7 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Pressure Board Calibration on page 7 20 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 21 e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 24 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 25 e Themistor Replacement on page 7 26 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 27 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 29 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 30 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 31 e Photo Interrupt Board Replacement on page 7
98. and _ RSS US s Yicor n 2 with u b uncertainty of the original slope b the value of which has been used to obtain Yicorr and with u a uncertainty of the original intercept a the value of which has been used to obtain yi corr Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogo nal regression are described in detail in annex B of 4 RSS is determined analogue to the calculation in module 5 4 10 The values for Uc scor are used for the calculation of the combined relative uncertainty of the candidate systems after correction according to the following equation u x c d 1 x F x2u b u a us scor Yi W omoor Vi a ta For the corrected dataset uncertainty We cmcorr IS calculated at the daily limit value by taking yi as the concentration at the limit value The expanded relative uncertainty Wemcor is Calculated according to the following equation Wewcorr k W cmcorr In practice k 2 for large number of available experimental results The highest resulting uncertainty Wemcorr is compared and assessed with the requirements on data quality of ambient air measurements according to EU Standard 7 Two results are possible 1 Wom lt Wago Candidate method is accepted as equivalent to the standard method 2 Wom gt Wago Candidate method is not accepted as equivalent to the standard method The specified expanded relative uncertainty Waqo for p
99. be cycled after any of these parameters have been changed for the change to take effect A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Volumetric Conditions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings i 7 J ae ee Ties EEE i Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP carte Smee Ti k T hebe a i ERED fi EPOPEE Eunet Bone PME TY Saad Haat ade EE mi eae Pi EE EE IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Addr 3 42 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Netmask The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SET
100. by a space Send det status Receive det status 1 9657 9600 4623 diag volt det This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the detector board The voltage is positive 5 Send diag volt det Receive diag volt det 4 9 diag volt iob This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 24 10 4 90 3 20 3 20 diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 24 10 14 90 4 90 3 20 3 20 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is Positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 and positive 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 24 98 14 80 14 90 4 96 3 20 diag volt neph This command reports the current voltage readings of the nephelometer interface board The following example reports the nephelometer interface board values Send diag volt neph Re
101. by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt View Logged Data 3 26 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions WH rid E eo iF a morr mrii mu Le Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2009 10 00 is entered then the first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2009 10 01 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Volumetric Conditions The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records gt EPOPEE Emt Bone BUEN Sad i hT to PUREE SE i Erase Log The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Er
102. can be omitted The potential dependence of the nephelometer s signal on surrounding temperature is thus examined sole ly at the zero point 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 108 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The devices were exposed to the following surrounding temperature sequence in the climatic chamber 20 C 5 C 20 40 C 20 After an equilibration time of approx 24 h per temperature step the recording of measured values at zero point 3 x 24 h per temperature step and at reference point 3 x per tempera ture step started 6 4 Evaluation Zero point The values measured at the concentration of the respective 24 h single measurements were read out and evaluated The absolute deviation in g m per temperature step was examined in relation to the default value at 20 C Reference value Bo 2 g m3 Reference point The percentage change of the determined measured values for the mass coefficient was ex amined at each temperature step in relation to the default value at 20 C It should be noted that concentration values could not be simulated by checking the mass coefficient
103. case A The inlet assemblies can include a TSP inlet a U S EPA compatible PMio inlet or a Digital PMio or PM2s5 inlet Cleaning schedules and routine maintenance of assembly components should be in accordance with a good quality assurance plan In general it is recommended that the inlet assemblies be cleaned on a quarterly interval with mild soap solution a thorough rinsing and dried with a lint free cloth If any impaction surfaces require impactor grease it should be applied prior to reassembly Furthermore a general inspection and replacement as necessary of O rings should be done Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A The water collector bottle located on the PMi inlet should be inspected at least every five sampling days Figure 5 1 Remove any accumulated water clean the interior of the bottle inspect the seals and replace the bottle in the holder Thermo Fisher Scientific European PMio PM25 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inlet Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Inlets Top Plate with f NCT Deflector Cone Screen Spacer P fi Lower Plate with crew Rain Deflector Acceleration Assembly Ht
104. commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 6 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces An example translation table would be Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B fes T T or N B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Examples C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the
105. component location Table 7 1 Model 5030 Replacement Parts Part Number Description 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 110570 00 Processor Board new Port and cramfs required 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel Display 106926 00 Transformer Step Down 220 240 VAC optional 104290 00 Measurement Interface Board 105869 00 Detector Assembly LND4335 105938 00 Photo Interrupt Board Assembly 10661 1 00 Rear Flow RTD Assembly 106536 00 RH Temperature Assembly 106535 00 Heater Tube Assembly Three Feet 106037 00 Load Motor Assembly 106032 00 Tape Motor Assembly 106470 00 Proportional Valve Assembly 106946 00 Pressure Board Assembly w tubing assembly 425454008 Detector Amp Assembly 106923 00 Pressure Valves 106540 00 Extension tubes w fitting 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24 VDC with base plate and screws 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Thermistor with connector 100907 00 Fan 24 VDC 8630 Filter Guard Assembly with foam 109612 00 Fuse 250 VAC 10 0 Amp SlowBlow for 110 VAC and 115 VAC models 109613 00 Fuse 250 VAC 5 0 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240 VAC models Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Replacement Parts List Part Number Description 10 001403 External Pump Ass
106. eE EEEE REER E E 134 6 1 5 4 6 Averaging CMO vcrccrcacds dea coactentiecus since coreedueaesaiaiacuneeeseeieawancapaddacaiecenerateneszenien 137 6 1 5 4 7 Constancy of sample volumetric flOW cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaees 138 6 1 5 4 8 Tightness of the measuring SYSTOM eeeeeeeceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenaaeeeaaaes 141 6 1 Methodology of the equivalence check modules 5 4 9 5 4 11 eeeeeeeeeeees 143 6 1 5 4 9 Determination of uncertainty between systems under teSt Upg ccceeeeeeeeees 144 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments 0008 151 6 1 5 4 11 Application of correction factors ANd terMS cccccceceeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeteeeenaaees 165 6 1 5 5 Requirements on multiple component measuring systems ceeeeeees 170 7 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PRACTICAL USE cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeeeesees 171 S MIE Ue cade appaaatveennnas expan E waaaadrqaantareanatsaevenneaan 173 95 APPENDIX Sacaatseppsratvcensiass iacancencnian E mean caemunasiasygatsat maaaterqaaniananatsaavenneian 174 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 8 of 424 Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23
107. following example clears srecs Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 28 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on
108. from paired measurement no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 13 Short term drift not relevant for particulate devices 6 1 5 3 18 Overall uncertainty not relevant for particulate devices For this reason an official request to the competent German body was made to define a co ordinated procedure for dealing with inconsistencies in the Standard 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 100 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The following procedure was suggested Test points 5 3 2 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 are evaluated as before basing on the min imum requirements stated in VDI 4202 Part 1 of 2002 i e using the reference values Bo B and B3 The performance of the test points 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 13 and 5 3 18 is omitted as they are not relevant for particulate measuring devices The competent German body agreed with the proposed procedure by decisions of 27 June 2011 and 07 October 2011 6 5 Assessment The test is based on the minimum requirements of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 Test points 5 3 2 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 are evaluated
109. gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Board Temp gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Alarms Menu Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the Alarms pressure alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms Barometric Pressure The Barometric Pressure screen displays the current pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 400 to 800 mmHg If the barometric pressure reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Baro Pres Min and Max Barometric The Minimum Barometric Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the Pressure Limits minimum barometric pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum barometric pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Baro Pres gt Min or Max 3 76 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Vacuum The Vacuum screen displays the current vacuum reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 mmHg to 250 mmHg If the vacuum reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm
110. have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms have occurred If no alarms are detected the number zero is displayed Items displayed are determined by the options installed To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press If the readings go beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms ip priri Piet Instrument Alarms The Instrument Alarms submenu allows the user to view a set of alarms for different boards The filter tape change heater power and bench items motherboard interface board and I O expansion board are read only The motherboard status interface board status and I O expansion board status if installed indicate that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument
111. heating system The ambient particulate is then drawn down a vertically mounted heated sample tube The heat applied to the sampe is adjustable to either a fixed temperature or a RH threshold at the filter spot The purpose of heating the sample is to reduce particle bound water and to decrease the relative humidity RH of the sample stream This is done to reduce positive artifact measurement that can potentially occur as a result of condensation on the filter tape or conditions of elevated humidity The heater is controlled by the CPU and the power applied is proportional to the conditions Downstream of the heated tube is the nephelometer assembly The particulate travels through the insulated nephelometer in a laminar pathway and is introduced to the radial tube upstream of the beta attenuation head The nephelometer assembly contains an 880 nanometer pulsed light source a reference detector for illumination output control a hybrid silicon photodetector temperature sensor relative humidity sensor programmable PCB and communications cable The nephelometer assembly has six ranges that are automatically selected to provide the most precise reading possible During scheduled auto zeroing Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation events a rear panel mounted zeroing solenoid is activated and HEPA filtered air is delivered to the nehpelometer whereby each range is zeroed The results
112. how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the lrecs or srecs The following example reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send data treatment lrec Receive data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the lrecs or srecs The following example sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok erec erxy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec format format command These commands return a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The following example shows a typical response Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging The format is defined within the command in the case of erxy by the current settings of the format and erec format commands
113. is possible to form daily averages based on the three measurement cycles using the de scribed instrument configuration and a cycle duration of 8 hours The time required for changing the filter tape amounts to a maximum of 0 21 thus lying well below the permissible 1 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 138 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 7 Constancy of sample volumetric flow The sample volumetric flow averaged over the sampling time shall be constant within 3 of the rated value All instantaneous values of the sample volumetric flow shall be within a range of 5 of the rated value during sampling 6 2 Equipment A flow meter was used for testing this requirement as indicated in Section 4 6 3 Performance of test The sample volumetric flow was calibrated before testing at the first field test site checked with a dry gas meter or a mass flow meter before testing at the other field test sites and if necessary readjusted The constancy of the sample volumetric flow is monitored inter
114. its cause Trou bleshooting was also delayed due to vacation of the staff and the associated communication problems For this reason the measuring system could only be brought back to normal oper ation on 6 September 2012 The cause of the failure was a faulty pressure sensor The long outage period cannot only be attributed to the measuring system itself since the identification and troubleshooting of such a problem by the staff is usually performed within a week Therefore this outage was taken up in the evaluation with a duration of 8 days SN 2 SN 2 presented a malfunction of the nephelometer at the test site Bornheim summer The system had to be repaired for which the values measured from 28 July 2011 to 4 August 2011 had to be discarded On 9 August 2011 a failure of the filter tape was observed The cause was not identified Errors in the stabilisation of the SHARP signal were observed from 11 September 2012 to 13 September 2012 at the test site Teddington summer Again the cause could not be identi fied No further malfunctions of the instruments were observed The customary maintenance works not including zero filter operation e g maintenance of the sampling inlet and check of flow rate leak tightness generally do not take more than approx 1 h per day For this reason the pertaining daily averages were not discarded 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland 0 A
115. m Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send alarm conc inst neph min Receive alarm conc inst neph min 0 000E 00 pg m3 set alarm conc inst neph min value set alarm conc inst neph max value These commands set the 24 hour instant nephelometer concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the instant nephelometer concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 pg m Send set alarm conc inst neph max 10000 Receive set alarm conc inst neph max 10000 ok alarm conc inst pm min alarm conc inst pm max These commands report the current 24 hour instant PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the instant PM concentration minimum is 100 pg m Send alarm conc inst pm min Receive alarm conc inst pm min 1 000E 02 pg m3 set alarm conc inst pm min value set alarm conc inst pm max value These commands set the 24 hour instant PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the instant PM concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 pg m Send se
116. matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled The sensitivity coefficient of the sample gas pressure at refer ence point shall not exceed the specifications of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The sensitivity coefficient of the sample gas temperature at ref erence point shall not exceed the specifications of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The sensitivity coefficient of the surrounding temperature at ze ro and reference point shall not exceed the specifications of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For PM Zero point value for ATu of 15K between 5 C and 20 C or 20 K between 20 C and 40 C shall not exceed Bo The measurement value in the range of B shall not exceed 5 for ATu of 15 K between 5 C and 20 C or for 20 K between 20 C and 40 C The sensitivity coefficient of the electric voltage at reference point shall not exceed the specifications made in Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For PM Change in measured value at By maximum Bo within the volt age interval 230 15 20 V The change in the measured value caused by interfering components in the sample gas shall not exceed the require ments of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 at zero and reference point 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Not applicable Not applicable The maximum dependence on sur yes
117. matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 5 Sensitivity coefficient of sample gas pressure The sensitivity coefficient of sample gas pressure at reference point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 106 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 6 Sensitivity coefficient of sample gas temperature The sensitivity coefficient of sample gas temperature at reference point shall not ex ceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note This test is not relevant for particula
118. measured component PM 3 all test sites values 2 18 g m8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 150 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Model 5030i SHARP SN 1 SN 2 All test sites lt 18 g m Raw data 130 Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 47 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PM 3 all test sites values lt 18 g m 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 151 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments For the test of PM25 measuring systems the equivalency with the reference met
119. meter under applica tion of the adapter proved to be ap propriate parameters for monitoring the instrument s tightness The labor atory tests resulted in a maximum leakage lt 1 of the nominal flow rate of 16 67 l min for both candi dates The tightness check must only be per formed with the tightness check adapter and the described procedure It can otherwise damage the instru ment The uncertainty between the candi dates Ups is with a maximum of 1 68 g m for PM25 below the required value of 2 5 g m8 The determined uncertainties WCM without application of correction fac tors lay for all observed datasets be low the defined expanded relative un certainty Wdgo of 25 for fine dust TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 27 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled 5 4 11 Application of correction factors and terms Requirements on multiple component measuring sys tems If the maximum expanded un certainty of the systems under test exceeds the data quality objectives according to the Eu ropean Directive on ambient air quality 7 for the test of PMz5 measuring systems the appli cation of correction factors and te
120. number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 67 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Alarm Information Translation Table Selection Table Button Designator B 68 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number can precede the precision This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a
121. numbers SN 1 and SN 2 The test started in the year 2009 with the software version V00 05 41 114 The software was steadily enhanced and optimised during the course of testing At the beginning of the field test in January 2011 software version V01 00 01 197 was im plemented This version was used during the whole field test The software was updated to version V01 00 03 225 after conclusion of the regular field test and before starting the remaining laboratory tests This software version was as well used for the additional campaign Bornheim Summer 2013 In the meantime the software version was updated another time due to a discontinuation of a processor board to version V02 00 00 232 The following software modifications were implemented Table 4 Overview of software versions during suitability testing Version Description of change Status during suitability test V00 05 41 114 Initial version Installed during la boratory test part 1 V01 00 00 163 1 Integration of support for Model 5030i Not installed 2 Improvement of algorithms for controlling RH and TEMP 3 Addition of Carriage return to ESM protocol 4 Replacement of term Zero with Offset 5 Adjustment of digital filter for Mass and PM to 60 min 6 Elimination of sample temperature from user interface 7 Raise of limit for Temp offset values to 10 C 8 Implementation of mass determination with out flow in servi
122. of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Pre Spread Sp Post Spread Sp s and Blank Spread Ssiank were calculated using the following equations Spre RM anpi RM ang E A 4 S Post T RM End _ RM End2 E A 5 CM sna CM pend CM anger CM anfi S blank m 2 2 As with the UK PM Equivalence Report 8 it was not possible to weigh all filters within the 15 day timeframe suggested in EN14907 However as filters were removed immediately from the reference samplers and placed in the refrigerator it was not necessary to determine if Tambien exceeded 23 C It is felt that as 15 days was impractical for a relatively small scale field study it is less likely to be attainable if this methodology were adopted by a National or Regional network and as such the meth odology employed herein is representative of how the reference samplers would be operated in practice A 2 Analysis of Protocols Employed 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Genau Richtig Page 217 of 424 The distributions of pre and post weight for all EMFAB filters w
123. off the heater tube adapter 8 Slide off delrin nut upward off the heater tube adapter 9 Replace the delrin nut by following the previous steps in reverse z _ lt Union Nut Heater Tube Adapter lt Ferrite Bead e Dern Nut Figure 7 29 Replacing the Delrin Nut 7 50 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the case cable Figure 7 30 Equipment Required Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack 3 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 4 Disconnect the electrical connector labeled SHARP 1 5 Unfasten the four screws 6 Pull connect up and out and install electrical connector by following the previous steps in reverse Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Case Cable Replacement SHARP 1 Screws 4 Figu
124. offset This command reports the current ambient RH offset in percent The following example reports that the ambient RH offset is 0 6 Send amb rh offset Receive amb rh offset 0 6 set amb rh offset value This command sets the ambient RH offset to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient RH offset in percent The following example sets the ambient RH offset to 7 Send set amb rh offset 7 Receive set amb rh offset 7 ok amb temp offset This command reports the current ambient temperature offset in degrees C The following example reports that the ambient temperature offset is 5 aC Send amb temp offset Receive amb temp offset 5 0 degC set amb temp offset value This command sets the ambient temperature offset to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient temperature offset in degrees C The following example sets the ambient temperature offset to 3 C Send set amb temp offset 3 Receive set amb temp offset 3 ok baro mass coef This command reports the current barometric mass coefficient The following example reports that the barometric mass coefficient is 0 000540 Send baro mass coef Receive baro mass coef 0 000540 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 36 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set baro mass coef value This command sets the barometric mass coefficient to user defined values to value where va
125. quality measuring sys tem Model 50301 SHARP for suspended particles Table 3 Technical data for Model 5030i SHARP manufacturer s specifications Dimensions Weight Model 50301 SHARP Measuring system 425 x 584 x 219 mm 19 kg without pump Sampling tube Approx 0 9 m long isolated heated tube 1 8 m extension tube Sampling inlet Depends on manufacturer during suitability testing Digitel DPM2 5 01 00 16 Power requirements Power input Analyser 100 240 V 50 60 Hz Pump 115 V 50 60 Hz Approximate maximum of 880 W Ambient conditions Temperature 5 to 40 C during suitability testing Humidity Non condensing Sample flow rate Inlet 16 67 I min 1 m3 h Nephelometer Source IR LED 6 mW 880 nm Detector Hybrid silicone amplifier Radiometry Source 146 lt 3 7 MBq lt 100 uCi Detector Proportional radiation detector Temporal resolution SHARP 1 min at data output rate of 1 s Parameter Filter change Filter change time cycle 0h 100 h gt Default 8 h 3 changes per day Filter change particle mass 0 9999 ug gt Default 1500 ug Parameter Sample heater Max heating temperature 30 C during suitability testing Nominal relative humidity 50 58 during suitability testing Data storage capacity internal Max 190 000 datasets gt 650 d at storage in tervals of 5 min
126. re calibration Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance External Pump Exhaust Filter 1 Turn the Heater OFF From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Control Use t until the value reads OFF and press 2 Disconnect RH temperature connector 3 From the SHARP MIB Board J1 remove the five socket heads from the top end cap and lift off 4 Remove sealing gasket note may be stuck to bottomside of top end plate 5 Carefully vacuum out optic chamber 6 Re assemble in reverse order note careful placement of the sealing gasket Figure 5 6 Replacing the External Pump Exhaust Filter Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 9 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the SHARP Optics Assembly Cleaning the SHARP Optics Assembly A 5 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the SHARPoptics assembly On an annual basis the SHARP optics assembly should be removed and cleaned Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Adjustable wrench Hex wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amoun
127. resolution of 11 bits e 0 20mA e 4 20mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200 VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form
128. rounding temperature in the range 5 C to 40 C was 0 2 g m at zero No deviation gt 2 6 of the default value at 20 C could be observed at reference point No deviations gt 1 4 in relation to the default value at 230 V caused by voltage changes could be detected for PMes Not applicable i TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 23 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled 5 3 10 Averaging effect For gaseous components the Not applicable measuring system shall allow the formation of hourly averag es The averaging effect shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 5 3 11 Standard devia The standard deviation from The reproducibility for PM2 5 was 10 tion from paired parallel determinations shall be for the complete dataset of the field measurement done with two identical meas test uring devices during field test It shall not exceed the specifi cations stated in Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For PM RD 10 related to B4 5 3 12 Long term drift The long term drift at zero point The maximum deviation at zero point and reference point s
129. s s 41x f SF f SF f f f f SF lx 1x t D L fftttttff A A flags pm baro vac pflow ambrh srh ambtemp stemp fvol dflg aflg lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the number of Irecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for lrecs and the maximum number of Irecs that can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks lrec per srec per Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 32 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual These commands report the lrecs and srecs logging period The following example shows that the srec logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec per 5 min set lrec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the lrecs and srecs logging period to value in minutes The following example sets the lrec logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space a
130. selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input Ifa is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line 1 n 1 This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this l
131. shows the user interface with the current concentration values 0 NEFT SMPL 12 to RANGERRBAUGE DLAGSBALARM Figure 32 Display of the measured SHARP concentration 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 77 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 2 Easy maintenance Necessary maintenance for the measuring systems should be possible without larger effort if possible from outside 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test Necessary regular maintenance works were carried out according to the instructions of the manual 6 4 Evaluation The following maintenance works must be performed by the user 1 Check of system status The system status can be monitored and controlled directly on the system itself or online 2 In general the sampling inlet must be cleaned according to the manufacturer s in structions while taking into account the local suspended particle concentrations dur ing suitability test every 4 weeks 3 Inspection of filter tape supply one filter tape is enough for approx 650 filter tape changes per roll approx 215 days at cycles of 8 hours S
132. status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include Thermo Fisher Scientific Nephelometer Interface Board Nephelometer interface board connectors Measurement Interface Board Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Electronics External connectors include e External Accessory e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors include e Function Key Panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board e I O Expansion Board e Digital Output Board e AC Distribution The nephelometer interface board serves as the circuitry for the nephelometer measurement an internal valve control and on board processing of zero and particle concentration by photometry Connectors located on the nephelometer interface board include e RS485 e 24 VDC Supply e LED Source Current e Reference Detector e Scattering Detector e 1 RH Sensor The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description Electronics Measu
133. the results of the zero and span drift test described in point 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift were taken into account for the determination of the maintenance interval 6 4 Evaluation No drifts beyond the permissible limits were detected during the entire field test period Therefore the maintenance interval is determined by the specified maintenance procedures see module 4 1 2 During operation the maintenance works can be limited to checks of contamination plausi bility and status error messages 6 5 Assessment The maintenance interval is defined by the necessary maintenance procedures and has been set to 1 month Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results The necessary maintenance works can be found in module 4 1 2 of this report and in chapter 5 of the instruction manual 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 95 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 8 Availability The availability of the measuring system shall be determined during the field test and shall be at least 95 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The start and end t
134. the specifica tions of the guide PMbs 30 g m8 Reference is made to test point 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments of this report Evaluation period 6 5 Assessment It is possible to assess the measuring system in the range of the relevant limit values Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Please refer to test point6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the in struments of this report 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 89 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 2 Measuring range The upper limit of the measuring range shall be greater or equal to the upper limit of the certification range 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test It was tested whether the upper limit of the measuring range of the measuring system is greater or equal to the upper limit of the certification range 6 4 Evaluation As a standard a measuring range of 0 10 000 g m is adjusted on the measuring system As appropriate default setting of the analogue output for European conditions a measur
135. the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst PM Min and Max Instant PM The Minimum Instant PM Concentration alarm limit screen is used to Concentration Limits 3 82 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual change the minimum instant PM concentration alarm limit The Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu minimum and maximum instant PM concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst PM gt Min or Max Cp bebe Instant SHARP The Instant SHARP screen displays the current instant SHARP concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 10 to 10000 g m or 01 to 10 mg m If the instant SHARP concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst SHARP Min and Max Instant The Minimum Instant SHARP Concentration alarm limit screen is used to SHARP Concentration change the minimum instant SHARP concentration alarm limit The Limits minimum and maximum instant SHARP concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst SHARP gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual
136. threshold or temp threshold The following example reports that the heater is RH threshold Send ht control Receive ht control RH set ht control selection selection off rh temp Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 47 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 48 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual This command sets the heater to off RH threshold or temp threshold The following example sets the heater to temp threshold Send set ht control temp Receive set ht control temp ok int time This command reports the current integration time of the calculated mass and concentration The following example reports the integration time is 15 minutes Send int time Receive int time 15 min set int time value This command sets the integration time to value where value can be 15 20 30 40 45 or 60 minutes The following example sets the integration time to 20 minutes Send set int time 20 Receive set int time 20 ok mass limit This command reports the current filter mass limit The following example reports that the mass limit is 1 500 mg Send mass limit Receive mass limit 1500 set mass limit value This command sets the filter mass limit to value where value is a floating point number representation of mass limit between 0 5 to 5 0 mg or 500 to 5 000 pg The following example sets the mass limit to 1 0 mg m Send set mass limit 1 0 Receive set mass limit 1 0 ok pres comp
137. to the RH sensor Furthermore try to avoid RH comparisons lt 30 RH and gt 80 RH a Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures If the RH sensors are slightly out of tolerance 5 RH the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a RH sensor calibration For more information about the RH sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter It is recommended that the NIST traceable hygrometer should also compare well with the RH measurement used within a gravimetric laboratory that is part of a compliance program One Point Barometric Record the Model 5030 barometric pressure sensor reading This value is Pressure Verification in wnits of mmHg If necessary using the pressure unit conversion Table 2 1 to convert your NIST traceable measurement to units of mmHg for an appropriate comparison The Model 5030 barometric sensor should compare within 10 0 mmHg tolerance of your NIST traceable barometer If the Model 50302 sensor performance is within this tolerance the acceptance test has passed If the sensor is slightly out of tolerance 12 mmHg the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a sensor calibration For more information about the barometric pressure sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter One Point Vol
138. using the controlled variable rH rel ambient humidity of the sample gt calculated from the rel humidity of ambient air ambient temperature and sample temperature and the filter temperature sensor The heating condi tions can be adjusted according to the requirements of each measurement network The parameters were adjusted as follows during suitability testing Rel air humidity threshold 50 Filter temperature sensor max 30 C This means that the heater turns on as soon as the relative humidity rH rises above 50 However the filter temperature does not exceed 30 C The relative humidity threshold value of 50 was specified by the manufacturer since it represents the filter conditioning value of the gravimetric reference method None of the slopes or offsets determined from the comparison with the reference method were significantly visible during the comparison campaigns at the test sites Cologne winter Bornheim summer and Bornheim winter All expanded measurement uncertainties calcu lated according to the Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Meth ods 4 lay below the maximum permissible value of 25 without application of correction factors After concluding the measurements in Germany the final comparison campaign started in summer of 2012 at the test site Teddington During this campaign an underestima tion of the suspended particulate content measured by the candidates was obs
139. visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Calibration The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 99 Operation Service Menu ip pror PIL Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale Cu ied Piket iini i Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog inpu
140. zero occur e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Bkg gt Restore Prev Values Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Instrument Controls Menu BETES E Saeed Beane Nephelometer Coefficient Instrument Controls Menu 3 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual a RMP E SP e 4ribbo ob OEH pikari A a E a E ERED hy Pa Tate ip kobe The Nephelometer Coefficient screen allows the user to manually adjust the Nephelometer coefficient The Nephelometer concentration based on the SET COEF TO is displayed to facilitate setting The Nephelometer concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET COEF until the value is saved e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Coef DH Guided fot PEL PEPE i The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be selected to control various instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu prek prnpr Poh dm PP i PPP PLES Piel bab i WH nid Set Flow Pump The Set Flow Pump menu allows the user to manually adjust the flow values and to change the operating state of the pump to ON or OFF e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump WH mh
141. 0 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 11 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 40 Flow of candidate SN 2 field 2 0 2 2 ceeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseaaaaeeeeeeeees 140 Figure 41 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMos all test SITES ccc cccecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 147 Figure 42 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PM25 test site Cologne winter ceeeeeeeeeees 147 Figure 43 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMos test site Bornheim SUMMe ccccceeeeeeees 148 Figure 44 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMos test site Bornheim winter cccccccceeeeees 148 Figure 45 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMbs test site Teddington summer eeee 149 Figure 46 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMs all test sites v
142. 0 10 1 10 Beta Cnts Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 J0 Neph Brd Alarm 0 0 0 J0 1 0 0 0 Detector Board Status Alarm 0 10 0 l1 0 0 0 0 Motherboard Status Alarm 0 0 T 0 0 0 00 Flow Alarm 0 J1 0 J0 0 10 0 J0 Nephelometer Reference Voltage 1 0 0 10 0 0 0 10 Alarm Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix E ESM Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the ESM Protocol commands from the prior FH62 platform that can be used to remotely control a Model 50303 instrument using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger ESM protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or over Ethernet ESM functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9884 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet ESM Commands fable F through Table E 3 lists the ESM commands supported for the Supported Model 50303 Table E 1 Read Commands for 50307 Command Description C3 PM conc always always jig m3 C2 Neph conc g m C SHARP conc pg m H3 Avg PM conc always yg m3 H2 Avg Neph conc yg m3 HT Avg SHARP conc ug ms JB temperature sampling head ambient temp JD temperature inside of the flow meter orifice flow temp JF different pressure of the air flow measuring module in Pa JG low pressure suction chamber JH barometer in hPa Jl air flow sampling head volumetric flow JJ norm air flow 273K 1013hPa JR relative humidity value
143. 0 4 26 2011 17 3 1 9 11 0 16 7 23 4 1011 51 5 1 8 166 2 1 51 4 27 2011 7 5 10 8 12 5 1010 90 4 0 7 213 8 9 52 4 28 2011 17 0 5 4 31 5 14 2 20 5 1005 77 6 0 7 176 0 3 53 4 29 2011 19 2 2 8 14 7 ieee 24 9 1002 56 8 EF 112 3 0 54 4 30 2011 13 1 2 5 19 0 16 9 24 2 1002 47 4 17 141 0 0 55 5 1 2011 6 8 2 3 32 9 14 8 22 4 1002 44 5 1 6 111 0 0 56 5 2 2011 9 3 21 23 0 11 0 17 8 1004 53 3 2 0 116 0 0 57 5 3 2011 9 2 22 24 4 10 0 17 2 1011 49 4 1 0 164 0 0 58 5 4 2011 11 4 29 25 2 9 7 16 2 1016 61 5 1 3 168 0 0 59 5 5 2011 3 8 14 1 19 8 1015 46 9 2 2 119 0 0 60 5 6 2011 13 6 2 8 20 3 18 6 24 8 1012 41 1 2 5 110 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 195 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 3 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation m5 ym3 A C C hPal A m s mm 61 5 7 2011 Colog
144. 00 pg m The suitability test was carried out in accordance with the current standards for suitability tests while taking into account the latest developments The test was performed in consideration of the following standards e Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Performance criteria for performance tests of automated ambient air measuring systems Point related measurement methods for gaseous and particulate air pollutants September 2010 or June 2002 1 e Standard VDI 4203 Part 3 Testing of automated measuring systems Test proce dures for point related ambient air measuring systems for gaseous and particulate air pollutants September 2010 or August 2004 2 e Standard EN 14907 Ambient air quality Standard gravimetric measurement meth od for the determination of the PM25 mass fraction of suspended particulate matter German version EN 14907 2005 3 e Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods English version of January 2010 4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 29 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 3 Description of the AMS tested 3 1 Measuring principle T
145. 01 Operation Service Menu Display Pixel Test The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly The display pixel test screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Restore Factory The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and Defaults configuration values to factory defaults The restore user defaults screen is 3 102 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Restore User Defaults Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the
146. 06 4 7 87 8 18 2011 8 8 2 8 31 5 22 5 31 3 1004 76 6 1 2 174 20 9 88 8 19 2011 6 4 1 8 21 16 8 21 2 1011 80 0 1 5 235 3 3 89 8 20 2011 1 7 20 7 28 1 1011 66 6 0 8 157 0 0 90 8 21 2011 10 3 1 2 11 9 23 2 31 4 1007 74 8 1 0 184 0 3 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx ss TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUV Rheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 196 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 4 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug m3 ug m3 C C hPa m s ul mm 91 8 22 2011 Bornheim Summer 10 9 3 2 29 2 20 4 24 4 1009 76 5 1 2 253 0 0 92 8 23 2011 19 1 2 9 15 4 22 6 27 8 1005 78 4 0 9 206 0 0 93 8 24 2011 GA 1 8 25 3 20 1 27 2 1007 76 6 0 7 192 0 6 94 8 25 2011 11 8 3 1 26 0 20 8 27 6 1003 83 4 1 0 176 21 95 8 26 2011 5 2 1 7 32 1 19 4 30 2 999 83 7 1 5 195 29 1 96 8 27 2011 0 7 15 3 20 0 1007 77
147. 1 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 52 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Level Contrast Level 5 25 6 30 7 35 8 40 9 45 10 50 11 55 12 60 13 65 14 70 15 75 16 80 17 85 18 90 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date The following example reports the date as April 1 2009 Send date Receive date 04 01 09 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to May 1 2009 Send set date 05 01 09 Receive set date 05 01 09 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Send set default params Receive set default params ok det This command reports the status of the detector board sharp beta map none The following example reports that the detector is beta Send det Receive det beta pump This command reports the current status of pump as on or off The following example reports that the pump is set to off Send pump Receive pump off set pump onoff onoff on off This command sets the pump on or off The following example sets the pump to on Send set pump on Receive set pump on ok sa
148. 1 22 4 21 2 185 1 26 2012 22 7 22 3 29 3 27 6 79 0 24 3 24 3 186 1 27 2012 17 0 16 0 24 1 24 3 68 2 16 0 16 4 187 1 28 2012 18 1 19 2 188 1 29 2012 64 0 62 4 69 2 69 8 90 9 69 8 71 5 189 1 30 2012 61 2 60 2 71 2 71 6 85 0 66 5 67 4 190 1 31 2012 36 5 36 6 44 2 42 8 84 0 38 3 38 4 191 2 1 2012 25 3 25 1 31 6 31 4 80 0 26 0 27 6 192 2 2 2012 20 1 20 2 25 6 25 3 79 2 23 1 21 8 193 2 3 2012 29 0 28 9 37 6 36 7 77 9 27 9 28 3 194 2 4 2012 34 1 34 8 195 2 5 2012 24 1 25 6 31 3 30 1 81 1 26 9 27 8 196 2 6 2012 31 9 32 4 41 3 40 4 78 7 38 2 38 3 197 2 7 2012 25 2 25 7 37 6 35 5 69 7 28 8 28 6 198 2 8 2012 33 4 34 4 43 6 42 7 78 6 37 7 40 1 199 2 9 2012 30 1 32 6 38 7 37 7 82 0 33 2 34 6 200 2 10 2012 Inlet gt Zero point 201 2 11 2012 Zero point 202 2 12 2012 Zero point 203 2 13 2012 39 6 36 0 41 9 41 0 91 1 37 2 37 4 204 2 14 2012 10 3 9 8 16 6 15 7 62 3 11 4 11 2 205 2 15 2012 TA 6 7 14 7 15 0 46 6 8 5 8 4 206 2 16 2012 15 6 14 2 20 8 21 9 69 7 17 1 15 9 207 2 17 2012 9 7 9 1 11 3 11 9 80 8 10 3 8 6 208 2 18 2012 3 4 3 6 209 2 19 2012 9 9 10 4 210 2 20 2012 10 3 10 6 16 6 17 6 61 0 9 9 9 9 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Pre
149. 10 2012 Audits 9 11 2012 SN2 stabilisation problems SHARP 9 12 2012 SN2 stabilisation problems SHARP 9 13 2012 2 SN2 stabilisation problems SHARP 9 14 2012 9 15 2012 9 16 2012 9 17 2012 9 18 2012 9 19 2012 9 20 2012 9 21 2012 9 22 2012 9 23 2012 9 24 2012 9 25 2012 9 26 2012 9 27 2012 9 28 2012 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 192 of 424 Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 11 of 11 Manufacturer Type of instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030i SHARP PM2 5 Measured values in g m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 No Date Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio SN 1 SN2 Remark Test site PM10 PM10 PM2 5 PM10 PM2 5 PM2 5 m m gt g ms m 301 9 29 2012 8 3 8 2 8 4 6 8 Teddington Summer 302 9 30 2012 4 8 4 6 5 0 5 2 303 10 1 2012 4 0 3 9 3 9 4 2 304 10 2 2012 3 7 3 7 3 8 4 2 305 10 3 2012 3 6 3 4 2 4 2 6 306 10 4 2012 3 5 3 5 2 8 4 2 307 10 5 2012 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 8 308 10 6 2012 141 5 11 2 12 3 13 3 309 10 7 2012 16 7 16 2 21 1 16 7 310 10 8 2012 15 4 15 4 17 4 17 5 311 10 9 2012 8 3 8 5 5
150. 116 9 16 2011 13 0 13 7 23 0 25 1 55 4 Inlet gt Zero filter 117 9 17 2011 Zero point 118 9 18 2011 3 2 3 9 7 0 7A 50 4 Zero point 119 9 19 2011 7 8 8 2 12 5 11 6 66 2 Zero filter gt Inlet 120 9 20 2011 3 7 6 9 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 186 of 424 Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 5 of 11 Manufacturer Type of instrument Serial No Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50301 SHARP SN1 SN2 PM2 5 Measured values in g m ACT No Date Ref 1 Ref 2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio SN 1 SN 2 Remark Test site PM2 5 PM2 5 PM10 PM10 PM2 5 PM10 PM2 5 PM2 5 m m3 m3 m3 m3 m 121 9 21 2011 12 4 12 3 6 5 Bornheim Summer 122 9 22 2011 6 4 7 8 19 2 18 9 37 3 9 8 123 9 23 2011 12 2 13 4 26 1 26 2 49 1 16 5 124 9 24 2011 125 9 25 2011 15 7 14 5 21 3 21 7 70 0 126 9 26 2011 18 8 20 6 127 9 27 2011 38 3 39 8 128 9 28 2011 129 9 29 2011 17 1 16 0 130 9 30 2011 12 4 11 8 23 4 24 5 50 6 131 10 1 2011 132 10 2 2011 133 10 3 2011 13 5 14 8 134 10 4 2011 9 8 9 8 15 9 16 3 60 9 135 10 5 2011 4
151. 12 22 5 6 2 27 7 2 6 4 0 1010 78 6 4 1 127 0 6 186 1 27 2012 16 5 4 0 24 5 2 3 7 4 1016 85 6 1 1 124 0 0 187 1 28 2012 3 2 1 6 4 4 1021 81 0 0 9 166 0 3 188 1 29 2012 63 2 6 6 10 4 0 4 0 3 1020 81 2 1 4 238 0 0 189 1 30 2012 60 7 6 9 11 4 0 1 0 9 1017 75 8 1 5 110 0 0 190 1 31 2012 36 5 5 8 15 9 2 7 0 9 1018 62 8 2 0 116 0 0 191 2 1 2012 25 2 5 2 20 7 5 2 0 7 1023 53 6 22 144 0 0 192 2 2 2012 20 2 3 8 18 6 7 0 0 8 1026 50 2 1 5 186 0 0 193 2 3 2012 28 9 5 9 20 3 8 5 4 0 1031 69 0 1 0 252 0 0 194 2 4 2012 8 2 8 5 3 7 1031 69 8 1 0 182 0 0 195 2 5 2012 24 9 4 9 19 8 7 9 3 6 1027 57 9 tT 142 0 0 196 2 6 2012 32 2 4 8 15 0 8 9 3 6 1029 57 8 1 1 152 0 0 197 2 7 2012 25 5 4 3 16 8 7 6 4 3 1031 61 6 1 8 148 0 0 198 2 8 2012 33 9 5 4 15 8 5 7 0 0 1030 68 4 0 8 187 0 0 199 2 9 2012 31 3 6 7 21 4 5 4 2 2 1030 81 1 1 6 259 0 0 200 2 10 2012 5 7 0 3 1031 64 9 ti 116 0 6 201 2 11 2012 7 6 2 1 1028 67 2 tet 198 0 0 202 2 12 2012 4 2 1 5 1024 69 3 0 9 233 0 0 203 2 13 2012 37 8 8 7 23 1 0 4 1 9 1012 89 7 0 7 208 21 204 2 14 2012 10 1 3 1 5 0 1006 88 5 4 4 280 4 2 205 2 15 2012 6 9 3 5 5 3 1008 81 1 5 7 303 0 6 206 2 16 2012 14 9 4 2 5 3 1016 90 4 1 2 246 cam 207 2 17 2012 9 4 5 6 TA 1013 87 7 At 229 12 208 2 18 2012 1 9 6 5 9 4 1005 81 8 2 5 213 1 5 209 2 19 2012 0 4 1 5 48 1017 84 7 2 9 270 0 9 210 2 20 2012 10 5 2 3 21 5 1 0 5 1 1026 76 4 0 8 179 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined
152. 2 Compress the collar of the quick connect fitting and remove the tubing from fittings 3 Install filter assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Service Locations lt Push in to release Figure 7 32 Replacing the External Zeroing Filter Service Locations For additional assistance service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information or visit us on the web at www thermo com aqi 1 866 282 0430 Toll Free 1 508 520 0430 International 7 54 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows e Hardware on page 8 1 e Firmware on page 8 5 e Electronics on page 8 6 e I O Components on page 8 9 Hardware Model 5030 hardware Figure 8 1 includes e Nehpelometer assembly e Primary measurement head e Detector amplifier e Cam photo interrupt board assembly e Counter wheel interrupt board assembly e Proportional valve e Cam motor e Tape motor e Pressure board e External solenoid e Pump intake T fitting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instr
153. 20002 10 11 12 2008 4 0 20002 0 17 12 2008 5 0 20003 10 18 12 2008 6 0 20002 10 07 01 2009 7 J 10 08 01 2009 8 0 14 01 2009 9 0 20000 10 15 01 2009 10 10 21 01 2009 11 0 22 01 2009 12 0 29 01 2009 13 0 30 01 2009 14 0 20000 10 04 02 2008 15 10 05 02 2009 16 0 11 02 2009 17 0 12 02 2009 18 0 20000 10 18 02 2009 19 0 20000 0 19 02 2009 20 0 20000 0 26 02 2009 21 0 20000 0 27 02 2009 22 0 19999 10 Marked in yellow average value Marked in green lowest value Marked in blue highest value 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR heinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Precisely Right Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 212 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Stability control filter Emfab 0 09280 0 09260 LESSER wwsator lt estos 0 09240 TMi 0 09220 A TM2 0 09200 TM3 0 09180 x Mean TM1 0 09160 a ee Oe ee agt 6 ee eee ee o Mean TM2 0 09140 e Mean TM3 0 09120 i dd 0 09100 0 5 10 15 20 25 No of weighing Figure 62 Stability of the control filters 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH H Luftreinhaltung A TUVRheinland sani E Genau Richtig Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality
154. 2011 20 4 5 5 27 1 5 3 13 2 1027 57 7 0 9 150 0 0 14 3 21 2011 22 3 5 2 23 3 6 9 16 1 1029 56 5 1 0 166 0 0 15 3 22 2011 41 6 10 7 25 7 9 4 17 2 1031 62 7 Hal 184 0 0 16 3 23 2011 20 4 7 6 37 1 10 7 18 6 1030 66 8 1 2 161 0 0 17 3 24 2011 19 4 7 1 36 7 10 9 18 6 1021 67 2 1 0 174 0 0 18 3 25 2011 27 5 9 4 34 0 11 8 18 0 1010 59 4 1 6 183 0 0 19 3 26 2011 5 0 7 7 11 6 1010 64 8 1 5 105 0 0 20 3 27 2011 24 7 6 6 26 5 9 3 16 3 1006 60 9 tt 196 0 0 21 3 28 2011 20 6 6 7 32 4 7 2 13 7 1009 60 2 1 9 172 0 0 22 3 29 2011 44 4 13 9 31 4 9 6 18 5 1007 62 1 V1 168 0 0 23 3 30 2011 15 6 6 9 44 6 12 6 15 9 1008 66 7 2 4 170 0 0 24 3 31 2011 5 5 2 5 44 8 13 8 15 6 1011 78 2 3 7 230 6 5 25 4 1 2011 8 1 3 3 40 7 13 9 18 8 1014 78 1 2 3 175 0 0 26 4 2 2011 4 3 17 6 24 3 1006 62 2 2 6 159 0 0 27 4 3 2011 14 2 4 8 34 0 10 9 15 8 1009 85 3 2 0 251 87 28 4 4 2011 8 9 3 3 37 3 10 0 15 0 1017 65 3 aT 214 0 0 29 4 5 2011 11 2 3 8 34 4 11 8 15 1 1020 71 9 21 173 0 9 30 4 6 2011 13 0 4 4 34 0 16 2 23 0 1019 73 9 1 8 196 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Page 194 of 424 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 212098
155. 24 hour averaging time e Inthe Main Menu choose 24HR Averages DH piker E E et EO Mike 24 Hour Average The 24 Hour Average Start Time screen allows the user to adjust the 24 Start Time hour averaging start time e Inthe Main Menu choose 24HR Averages gt Avg Time EH pikari Ce a E SO a EA Calibration Factors Calibration factors are determined during automatic and manual Menu calibration and are used to correct the concentration readings The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors as shown below The instrument can also be calibrated manually using this menu For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration The calibration factors for the SHARP BKG offset and SHARP COEF slope are set to 0 0 and 1 0 by default Should regional settings require an adjustment to these values that DO NOT compromise regulatory approvals for this instrument those values can be adjusted at this point e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors 3 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Menu RRS E CHS mito WH mpini E PURE TE Aad Bees PY Fad be bo Bedi beet T4 PM Background The PM Background screen allows the user to manually adjust the PM Intercept The PM concentration based on the SET BKG TO is displayed to facilitate the setting The PM concentration displayed in the Run portion of the screen is NOT affected by the SET
156. 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 32 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC Irec format srec format erec format These commands report the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for lrecs is ASCII with text according to Table B 3 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging set lrec format format set srec format format set erec format format These commands set the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according to Table B 3 The following example sets the lrec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Table B 3 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec layout srec layout erec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the lrec srec erec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout
157. 3 137 10 7 2011 3 4 0 5 14 1 9 9 13 4 1005 81 6 3 6 272 5 7 138 10 8 2011 0 8 8 7 11 4 1009 85 5 24 258 6 0 139 10 9 2011 6 2 1 9 30 6 12 2 16 3 1011 84 5 1 4 190 5 4 140 10 10 2011 5 0 0 7 14 3 17 7 21 3 1009 74 4 3 2 261 0 3 141 10 11 2011 1 6 0 8 50 2 16 3 18 0 1010 77 4 3 6 251 0 0 142 10 12 2011 2 5 0 0 0 7 12 5 15 8 1012 91 1 0 9 226 17 9 143 10 13 2011 4 2 0 5 11 8 9 9 15 8 1022 76 3 0 6 209 0 0 144 10 14 2011 7 2 1 7 23 1 8 7 15 9 1024 69 6 1 0 151 0 0 145 10 15 2011 2 0 7 8 14 8 1020 68 8 152 162 0 0 146 10 16 2011 12 4 2 3 18 4 8 5 14 8 1016 73 8 1 5 157 0 0 147 10 17 2011 19 4 4 9 25 2 10 5 16 6 1011 78 5 0 8 163 0 0 148 10 18 2011 5 5 2 2 39 9 9 2 15 0 1003 82 0 1 2 197 3 0 149 10 19 2011 45 0 6 13 6 8 1 14 0 1010 74 4 1 5 225 0 0 150 10 20 2011 9 4 1 9 20 7 5 6 10 6 1018 79 8 1 0 223 0 0 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Page 198 of 424 Precisely Right TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page
158. 3 2 gt a E e E gt O A f O 0 X aw Foilkit damaged observed on Nov 14 Figure 37 Drift of the measured value SN 1 measured component PM2 5 Span point drift PM2 5 SN 2 Dev from previous value ug m Figure 38 Drift of the measured value SN 2 measured component PM2 5 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 123 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 13 Short term drift The short term drift at zero point and reference point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 within 12 h for benzene 24 h in the laboratory test and within 24 h in the field test A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable
159. 3 Table 6 8 SHARP Measurement Interface Board Pin Connections 6 24 Table 7 1 Model 50307 Replacement Parts ccccccceceseceseesceteeseetenenees 7 5 Table 7 2 Model 50307 Cables cccccccccsseseesseseeseseesecsestesteseeseeeeesteseesees 7 7 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Component c cccccccseeceeeeneeeeees 7 8 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 23 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connectione 7 23 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration 0 0 0 0 ccc 8 12 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration 00 cece 8 12 Table 9 1 Cable WMS ccets xc ccteterettte cates aca has arate stelted thetic a 9 2 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables cccccceeeteeeeeee 9 3 Table 9 3 Mounting Options sec xcs8 sh ence eelaedel vosu sual lt nc weae ned 9 3 Table B 1 Error Response Messages c cccececcescesesesescetesesescetesesestetesesesees B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands ou cc ceccccececessesteseeseeeetesteeesteseeseesee B 3 Table B 3 Record Output Formats 0 cccccccccccscescscesestesesteseeteseeeseseseeeeees B 31 Table B 4 Stream Time Values oo cecceccccccscesssteseeseeseeseeesteseeseeseeseeneseeseens B 34 Table B 5 Standard Ranges cccccccccecscessseseseseeseseetesestesesteseseseseeees B 49 Table B 6 Contrast evel ssc sino dia iss ces caste ua bccacks cimdeasabctvant hia nade
160. 3 8 17 3 989 76 1 0 5 198 46 307 10 5 2012 3 3 1 6 47 8 11 0 16 7 992 87 0 0 4 226 3 6 308 10 6 2012 11 4 1 6 14 3 8 9 16 2 999 81 2 0 3 231 2 3 309 10 7 2012 16 4 4 4 26 9 11 9 14 4 1003 81 3 0 2 160 1 8 310 10 8 2012 15 4 47 30 2 11 5 12 9 996 94 6 0 5 138 2 3 311 10 9 2012 8 4 3 1 37 1 12 0 15 0 999 71 6 0 7 82 1 3 312 10 10 2012 13 8 3 3 24 1 12 4 16 0 994 68 2 0 7 98 1 3 313 10 11 2012 6 4 3 4 53 8 13 4 15 6 983 90 0 0 5 171 1 3 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 204 of 424 Annex 7 Measured values from additional test site Bornheim Summer 2013 related to actual conditions Page 1 of 2 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 5030i SHARP Measured values in pg m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Date Ref 1 Ref 2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio Remark Test site aa PM2 5 PM2 5 PM10
161. 3 83 Operation Alarms Menu Instant Nephelometer The Instant Nephelometer screen displays the current instant nephelometer concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 10 to 10000 ug m or 01 to 10 mg m If the instant nephelometer concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst Neph DH Guided PLP Min and Max Instant The Minimum Instant Nephelometer Concentration alarm limit screen is Nephelometer used to change the minimum instant nephelometer concentration alarm Concentration Limits limit The minimum and maximum instant nephelometer concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Inst Neph gt Min or Max 3 84 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Service Menu The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When the service mode is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument i
162. 3 96 Beta Ref boresho lexi sssaiaetssiaastvs Ni deceitiavesadiiart iG ntucnah dence tiaaieas 3 97 Alpha Threshold sistre ieietu aeiiae s 3 97 Nephelometer Calibration sssssseseseseesisisisisesrserrsrrrsrssessee 3 97 Nephelometer RE nran E a 3 98 Nephelometer Temperature ssssssssssessseseseseresrtesrtrrrrrrerererseseeres 3 98 Nephelometer Source Level sicisicssetivscessteeasaietinnatictasstondvetatevates 3 98 Analog Output Calibration 25sec les heielecctesecs ba ei cacteedens yccteoupeetaes 3 99 Analog Output Calibrate Zero cate cusnveciertlsaknuwolncatnes 3 99 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale ccc consntatu ca cccuacs earn 3 100 Analog Input Caran nstaue easaees tacstecassaa sesdegs tacanggenttonegunneaueads 3 100 Analog Input Calibrate Zero weiter iasera ti ated cieserl 3 101 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale ics sssicelecgec atti scvecsdeecseedastes 3 101 Display Pixel Test stcstiepeevs ita otiedeeddainiits deiiidetie 3 102 Restore User Detail ts ricci tideadacvast ei tocbcre aun narnd eA eectats bape oia 3 102 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Restore Factory Drala sctea tata setetisteccesnes sites st coeee teed cnctnecatataticte 3 102 Password Men s e aa AA ENRE 3 103 Ser Passwords ssir etisi eoir aaar a a 3 103 Lock Instrument iassa iskin neue nae 3 104 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation ceeeeeseeseeeereeee 3 104 Cisne Password i Ns cs teas a a tae NG te 3 104 Ucn coal Fe ook 10 cs cer een ae re Dirt ooo
163. 30 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 18 Overall uncertainty The expanded uncertainty of the measuring system shall be determined The value de termined shall not exceed the corresponding data quality objectives in the applicable EU Directives on air quality listed in Annex A Table A1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 Note By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 6 2 Equipment By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 6 3 Performance of test By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 6 4 Evaluation By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 6 5 Assessment By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results By resolution of the competent Germa
164. 300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung A TUVRheinland os ae Genau Richtig Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Page 215 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F The Check weight Mass CM of the filter was calculated for each weighing session using E A 1 below CM eshte Pana E A 1 Where Mcheck bet Mass of check weight weighed immediately prior to sample filter Meheck att Mass of check weight weighed immediately after sample filter The Relative Mass RM of the filter was calculated for each weighing session using E A 2 below RM pne CM E A 2 Where Miter Mass of sample filter Particulate Mass PM is calculated using the following equation in accordance with EN14907 E A 3 PM ea RM rnan ee RM 5 09 l 2 2 Where Beg1 denotes weighing session 1 prior to sampling Beg2 denotes weighing session 2 prior to sampling End1 denotes weighing session 1 after sampling End2 denotes weighing session 2 after sampling 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TU VRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH f Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 216 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator
165. 307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 61 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 62 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 12 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 12 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1 V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in oxffff din channel This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and the index number of the corresponding active state The following example reports input 1 to be assigned an index number 3 corresponding to action of PM mode with the active state being high Send din 1 Receive din 1 3 PM MODE high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 12 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index value
166. 36_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 197 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 5 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ugm ug m3 c C hPa m s 4 mm 121 9 21 2011 Bornheim Summer 1 0 16 9 20 5 1011 69 5 0 8 204 0 0 122 9 22 2011 hell tt 15 1 15 2 18 7 1011 72 2 1 2 231 0 0 123 9 23 2011 12 8 1 6 12 4 124 9 24 2011 1 4 125 9 25 2011 15 1 Bal Fal 126 9 26 2011 Outage of weather station 127 9 27 2011 3 1 128 9 28 2011 129 9 29 2011 16 6 1 7 10 0 130 9 30 2011 12 1 11 8 9 18 4 26 8 1017 68 3 12 155 0 0 131 10 1 2011 1 2 18 1 28 0 1018 70 6 0 5 176 0 0 132 10 2 2011 3 5 17 8 26 8 1016 75 4 0 3 213 0 0 134 10 3 2011 14 2 3 4 24 0 18 8 26 5 1013 65 9 0 8 168 0 0 134 10 4 2011 9 8 1 4 14 1 17 8 20 5 1013 72 4 1 6 214 0 0 135 10 5 2011 3 5 1 9 53 3 17 5 20 0 1011 70 8 1a 199 0 0 136 10 6 2011 4 8 1 1 23 0 13 2 19 3 1001 71 2 2 3 213 0
167. 4 2011 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific Air Quality Instruments 27 Forge Parkway Franklin MA 02038 1 508 520 0430 www thermo com aqi Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEERoHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 5030 Synchronized Hybrid Ambient Real time Particulate SHARP Monitor It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to
168. 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator PUMP J1 1 AC 2 Pump_AC 3 AC Ground 4 NC HEATER 2 J2 1 AC 2 Heater2_AC 3 AC Ground HEATER 1 J3 1 AC Heater1_AC 3 AC Ground WDT DISABLE J4 Input 2 Ground AUX PWR 120V J5 AC 2 AC PURGE 2 J6 AC Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 16 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Signal Description Purge2_AC PURGE 1 J7 AC Purge1_AC PUMP 1 J8 24V Pump1_On Off JTAG INTF J9 Oo a N on A OO N a a a a A w N TDO FLOW TEMP 2 Flow2A_RTD Flow2B_RTD Ground AUX HT 1 AUX HT 2 AC AuxHT_1_AC AC AuxHT_2_AC TT MOTOR AC TT Motor_AC PUMP 2 24V Pump2_On Off FLOW TEMP 1 Flow1A_RTD Flow1B_RTD Ground SHARP 1 24V Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 RS485 3 RS485 4 Ground PURGE 2 DC J18 1 24V 2 Purge2_DC PUMP FLOW 1 J19 1 24V 2 Aout_Pump1_Flow 3 Ground SHARP 2 J20 1 24V 2 RS485 3 RS485 4 Ground FAN J21 24V 2 Fan_Power PURGE 1 DC J22 24V 2 Purge1_DC PUMP FLOW 2 J23 24V 2 Aout_Pump2_Flow 3
169. 5 2 5 7 0 6 5 51 8 136 10 6 2011 5 5 4 1 10 8 10 4 45 6 137 10 7 2011 3 6 3 1 8 1 7 6 42 9 138 10 8 2011 139 10 9 2011 6 0 6 4 10 1 10 4 60 7 140 10 10 2011 4 7 5 2 11 9 12 5 40 9 141 10 11 2011 1 3 2 0 5 5 5 0 31 2 142 10 12 2011 1 9 3 2 5 3 5 0 49 3 143 10 13 2011 4 2 4 2 11 5 11 7 36 3 144 10 14 2011 5 9 8 5 14 8 14 0 50 2 145 10 15 2011 146 10 16 2011 11 1 13 7 17 0 16 7 73 7 147 10 17 2011 18 6 20 1 28 0 27 3 70 0 148 10 18 2011 4 3 6 7 11 6 11 5 47 7 149 10 19 2011 3 8 5 2 Outlier Ref PM10 150 10 20 2011 9 3 9 5 11 9 15 8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5 Manufacturer Type of instrument Serial No Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030i SHARP SN1 SN2 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 187 of 424 PM2 5 Measured values in pg m ACT Page 6 of 11 No Date Ref 1 PM2 5 m3 10 21 2011 10 22 2011 10 23 2011 10 24 2011 10 25 2011 10 26 2011 10 27 2011 10 28 2011 10 29 2011 10 30 2011 10 31 2011 11 1 2011 11 2 2011 11 3 2011 11 4 2011 11 5 2011 11
170. 5 8 S S Tubing 5 8 Union w Teflon Ferrule 3 Ft Universal Heater lt _ _ __ HEPA Filter 3 Way Valve Exhaust Figure 2 5 Model 5030 Vertical View 2 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup Sample Tube There is one standard length of heated sample tube at one meter Sample Extension Lengths tube extensions are used for added height Rack Mounting One limiting factor when siting the Model 5030 is placement within a Option standard 19 inch rack mounting Future planning should be made to reserve the topmost rack mounting position available due to the vertical positioning of the sample tube directly from the roof into the top of the Model 50302 In addition modification to the rack cabinet to accommodate the vertical tubing connection also needs to be considered prior to installation For more information see Chapter 9 Optional Equipment Review the following installation steps prior to field installation Monitor Installation Once all height requirements are established the following steps are usually taken to complete the installation 1 Remove cover to the 50307 base instrument and inspect for proper filter tape installation 2 Place 50302 unit in place of intended operation 3 Attach the insulated heater tube assembly to the 5 8 inch OD tube on top of the 50302 Figure 2 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 13 Installation
171. 53 Decimal Places iiaia ice doi la A EE S 3 54 Number of Table Points e sessessssesssssseeeerersesrsrssrsrsrerrrrsrsesrsresese 3 54 Table Points nnna lace aarti ee 3 55 NO OU ac IE a gal Bite el ie Da ay 3 55 NSE PANS seals ach cantatas datatenage tun EE 3 55 Screen Contr st saroien a a 3 56 Service Mod s rait iieis iss aan a ei i E esis 3 56 Date Tim tnise ane a aan 3 57 BENA E save des sagt te spenees te tontosi cate auuaete 3 57 Diagnostics Meine 6 52 ses a ocississs cess ated seen RGA 3 58 Programi Versions osetia osita Ka EE R outta taa nares P 3 58 Voles ee o ects RRA RE Tocca a e iS 3 59 Motherboard Voltages ssessesesesesesesesesesessesessesrsesesesesesesesseses 3 59 Interface Board Voltages ssssssessessssesssssssssesesesesreeeteerrereesrsrsrees 3 59 I O Board Voltages irrin a 3 60 Detector Board Voltages eini enaa n eee s 3 60 Nephelometer Board Voltages covsdessanectvssstesasetunsedeashersdessutvet ass 3 60 RH Temperatute norinni aiia eiiis 3 61 Press re Vactumunnun t iinosnen anaa aA E EE 3 61 FloWa anren an E a E E E E s 3 61 Detector Statuts ra e ir e cana e cared 3 62 Nephelome ter Statusi aieri asitin inesi js seca tangs ree ei assi 3 62 CR iessen costes age oes E EAA AV EEA IEN 3 62 Analog Input REARS see ies cscedssvavicds Gadera sense Msaddrauessuveee acedetsas 3 63 Analog Input Voltages c sc2isntitesaivarcstteareletiageantnaniala dates 3 63 Digital Inputs oiio oh took er lea Ka e er AE E cue nets 3 63 R
172. 6 2011 11 7 2011 11 8 2011 11 9 2011 11 10 2011 11 11 2011 11 12 2011 11 13 2011 1 16 2012 1 17 2012 1 18 2012 1 19 2012 1 20 2012 1 21 2012 32 7 19 5 3 5 6 2 Ref 2 PM2 5 33 2 18 9 3 5 5 9 44 3 28 9 4 1 8 6 SN1 SN2 Ratio PM2 5 PM10 Remark Inlet gt Zero filter Zero point Outlier Ref PM10 Zero point Zero filter gt Inlet Zero point Zero point Zero point Bornheim Summer Test site Bornheim Winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rh TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH einland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 188 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 7 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in pg m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio Test site PM2 5 PM2 5 PM2 5 PM10 m gt m gt A 181 1 22 2012 5 4 5 1 11 4 12 9 43 1 7 7 8 4 Bornheim Winter 182 1 23 2012 7 0 7 9 11 7 13 5 59 0 9 1 10 3 183 1 24 2012 20 9 21 5 17 3 16 8 184 1 25 2012 19 9 20 0 28 3 25 5 74
173. 60 E 50 eT o 40 cc o a 30 a o 20 c e oO 10 0 ba baa ia x ia jo jo fo o o o fo o jo N N N N N N N N N ise oO oO m Tt a a a re ire N D re N e gt Ko se m N N e oa N Figure 19 Course of PM25 concentrations reference at the test site Cologne parking lot ee E i winter 70 a 60 ES 50 S ary S 40 oc 19 a 30 ao 5 20 c fe O 10 0 e ere er e er e re e ere e r re r r r r ro fe fF SF SF SF r r r r D O O O Q O O O O QG O O O O O O N A NA NNN NAN NNN NN NN NON Bn oF oOo O O O Q0 Q0 Q Q O O0 O Q0 O0 Oo Qo Sr O O O O e One m m ee ao FE O Try O O A Q O A Q O MO O N SF re N A O O A AN O gt e A O gt e A 0 O Figure 20 Course of PM25 concentrations reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot summer 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 58 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Conc PM2 5 Ref in g m 16 01 2012 23 01 2012 30 01 2012 06 02 2012 13 02 2012 20 02 2012 27 02 2012 05 03
174. 72 h post weighing Dust corrected dust mass of the filter This shows that the method becomes independent from weighing room conditions due to the corrective calculation Influence due to the water content of the filter mass between virgin and loaded filter can be controlled and do not change the dust content of sampled filters Hence point 9 3 2 5 of EN 14907 is fulfilled The example of the standard weight between November 2008 and February 2009 shows that the permissible difference of max 20 ug from the previous measurement is not exceeded Stability of standard weight between Nov 08 and Feb 09 0 20010 fo 0 20005 2 oo 0 0 Standard weight 0 20000 CRAG 3 Mean standard weight 0 19995 0 19990 0 5 10 15 20 25 No of weighing Figure 61 Stability of standard weight 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung A TUVRheinland Genau Richtig Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 39 Stability of standard weight Difference to Weighing Standard the previous Date No weight weighing g Hg 12 11 2008 1 0 20002 13 11 2008 2 0 20001 10 10 12 2008 3 0
175. 75 0 205 0 667 0 900 0 975 086 0 534 0 676 110 0 530 0 466 0 407 157 0 847 1 120 0 035 0 611 0 342 23 38 4 5 52 0 952 1 111 0 034 1 326 1 050 22 93 100 0 209 0 967 1 087 0 014 0 408 0 240 20 28 28 2 Limit Value of 30 pg m 3 117 4 0 656 Orthogonal Regression Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM 217 ug m3 Individual Datasets Combined Datasets The check of the five criteria from chapter 6 1 Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Teddington Summer lt 18 ug m3 218 ug m3 All Data 104 0 031 0 840 0 778 22 60 56 1 058 0 027 0 394 0 592 18 90 53 5 0 030 1 099 0 427 14 77 15 7 0 051 0 207 0 433 11 83 ules 5 4 9 5 4 11 resulted as follows More than 20 of the data are greater than 17 g m8 The in between uncertainty of the candidates is smaller than 2 5 g m8 The in between uncertainty of the reference is smaller than 2 0 g m8 Criterion 1 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx KEY Criterion 1 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 Criterion 4 Criterion 5 L L C Other Methodology of the equivalence check mod TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pr
176. 8 12 2 235 7 25 2012 17 8 18 5 26 5 26 6 68 4 18 3 19 5 236 7 26 2012 21 0 21 4 18 2 19 4 Outlier Ref PM10 237 7 27 2012 12 3 11 8 20 0 20 3 59 7 14 7 13 7 238 7 28 2012 5 6 4 6 239 7 29 2012 4 3 3 3 240 7 30 2012 5 0 4 8 10 0 9 8 49 2 4 3 4 5 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx ss TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 190 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 9 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in g m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Ratio Test site PM2 5 PM10 7 31 2012 10 9 Teddington Summer 8 1 2012 8 2 2012 8 3 2012 4 7 4 3 Outlier Ref PM2 5 8 4 2012 8 5 2012 8 6 2012 8 7 2012 g 8 8 2012 11 2 SN1 malfunction 8 9 2012 12 2 SN1 defective 8 10 2012 13 9 SN1 defective 8 11 2012 12 8 SN1 defective 8 12 2012 5 6 SN1 defective 8 13 2012 5 2 SN1 defective 8 14 2012 6 8 SN1 defective 8 15 2012 10 3 SN1 defective 8 16 2012 7 4 SN1 defective 8 17 2012 5
177. 8 3 993 55 8 0 8 180 0 0 259 8 18 2012 6 9 2 4 34 5 24 2 32 2 995 67 6 0 2 214 0 0 260 8 19 2012 6 4 2 3 35 7 2LF 30 8 997 68 7 0 4 208 0 0 261 8 20 2012 7 4 2 8 37 4 19 7 27 8 1001 77 3 0 2 215 0 0 262 8 21 2012 3 0 TE 23 3 998 76 0 0 1 207 0 3 263 8 22 2012 20 17 6 23 9 998 69 3 0 2 210 0 0 264 8 23 2012 2 3 17 4 22 7 992 69 0 0 2 190 0 0 265 8 24 2012 2 6 17 1 20 6 983 81 7 0 8 174 2 8 266 8 25 2012 1 9 16 7 22 5 987 81 9 0 5 243 27 9 267 8 26 2012 1 5 16 9 23 3 999 69 4 0 4 206 0 0 268 8 27 2012 21 18 3 21 4 992 74 9 0 8 195 0 8 269 8 28 2012 2 0 18 0 23 7 995 74 2 0 5 190 0 3 270 8 29 2012 1 5 15 0 20 6 993 85 2 0 6 184 4 1 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Page 202 of 424 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 10 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug m
178. 80 9 0 5 190 10 2 297 9 25 2012 2 6 14 43 7 12 6 16 2 971 80 1 0 7 158 41 298 9 26 2012 5 7 0 8 14 7 12 4 16 2 980 88 7 0 6 222 2 5 299 9 27 2012 4 6 1 3 27 2 12 6 18 8 993 77 0 0 4 227 0 0 300 9 28 2012 3 4 1 4 41 1 12 3 18 3 997 84 5 0 4 193 1 5 volatile PM compounds determined with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 203 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 11 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ugm ugm C C hPa m s 4 mm 301 9 29 2012 Teddington Summer 8 3 Lf 20 7 10 4 17 5 1003 75 1 0 4 233 0 0 302 9 30 2012 47 2 2 47 4 14 9 17 9 997 79 1 0 7 186 2 5 303 10 1 2012 3 9 20 50 8 13 0 17 0 993 92 0 0 2 194 4 8 304 10 2 2012 3 7 2 5 66 7 13 8 18 3 989 84 5 0 7 186 2 8 305 10 3 2012 3 5 1 5 44 5 10 5 15 0 988 81 8 0 2 232 0 5 306 10 4 2012 3 5 1 8 51 2 1
179. 847 1 043 0 033 0 520 0 320 12 76 4 5 Combined Datasets 1 039 218 ug m3 0 952 0 032 1 195 0 983 17 53 100 0 All Data 209 0 967 1 017 0 013 0 367 0 224 13 22 28 2 Orthogonal Regression Dataset Slope b Up Bornheim Winter 1 033 0 029 0 763 Cologne Winter 0 990 0 025 0 386 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 885 0 028 Teddington Summer 0 947 0 048 Intercept a Ug Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Wem 217 ug m3 0 729 0 554 1 052 0 400 0 234 0 406 lt 18 ug m3 166 0 817 0 983 0 033 0 176 0 323 12 08 4 8 Combined Datasets 218 ug m3 0 947 1 019 0 033 1 033 1 032 18 45 100 0 All Data 217 0 962 0 987 0 013 0 079 0 226 13 68 27 2 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 170 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 5 Requirements on multiple component measuring systems Multiple component measuring systems shall comply with the requirements set for each component also in the case of simultaneous operation of all measuring channels 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not
180. 85 F 6 5 Assessment No deviations gt 1 4 in relation to the default value at 230 V caused by voltage changes could be detected for PM25 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 22 shows a summary of the test results Table 22 Dependence of the measured values on mains voltage deviation in Mains voltage Deviation Cv f v f u u The single values are presented in annex 4 of the appendix 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 113 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 9 Cross sensitivity The change in the measured value caused by interfering components in the sample gas shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Sep tember 2010 at zero and reference point Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Instead minimum requirement 5 4 5 is valid The results of this test can be found in module 5 4 5 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of
181. 85 F TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 2 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug ms ug m3 C C hPa m s 4 mm 31 4 7 2011 Cologne Winter 13 4 5 5 40 7 13 8 21 6 1019 67 2 3 0 245 0 0 32 4 8 2011 19 4 12 9 18 2 1018 64 7 2 9 255 0 0 34 4 9 2011 11 3 18 9 1018 59 8 1 3 183 0 0 34 4 10 2011 11 4 14 0 23 1 1016 60 2 1 1 191 0 0 35 4 11 2011 15 1 16 0 25 0 1012 58 8 3 9 244 27 36 4 12 2011 8 6 2 9 33 9 7 7 12 4 1018 66 7 4 1 257 0 9 37 4 13 2011 12 3 3 2 26 2 10 1 14 3 1013 57 1 2 0 203 0 0 38 4 14 2011 19 5 4 4 22 4 8 0 14 2 1013 65 4 0 6 159 0 0 39 4 15 2011 12 4 3 1 24 7 10 4 17 0 1014 53 6 1 2 169 0 0 40 4 16 2011 2 2 11 9 16 9 1017 51 7 0 9 166 0 0 4 4 17 2011 2 5 11 4 19 2 1017 53 7 1 2 139 0 0 42 4 18 2011 17 1 3 0 17 8 14 3 21 2 1011 48 6 1 9 149 0 0 43 4 19 2011 17 7 2 8 15 8 15 5 25 5 1009 52 4 1 2 146 0 0 44 4 20 2011 20 4 2 9 14 2 16 6 25 7 1008 51 3 ti 154 0 0 45 4 21 2011 3 0 17 8 26 3 1006 54 1 0 7 180 0 0 46 4 22 2011 2 6 20 0 27 8 1003 51 8 1 3 146 8 3 47 4 23 2011 2 5 18 0 28 9 1005 58 0 0 7 152 0 0 48 4 24 2011 2 3 18 1 28 0 1011 51 7 1 0 172 0 0 49 4 25 2011 20 2 2 4 12 0 16 8 26 0 1013 50 3 Ta 153 0 0 5
182. 885 F Reference Detector Board SHARP Board Assy Source Board SHARP Board Bracket Assy Scatter Detector Board Optical Bench Optical Bench Inlet Figure 2 Hardware components Model 50301 SHARP Optics module Primary Measurement Head Assy Tape Radius Guide Detector Amp Bottom Filter Tape Supply Reel Radius Spindle Tape Wheel Assy SHARP Connection Bracket Assy Inlet External Solenoid Counter Wheel Photo Tube a Ay Interrupt Board Assy Cam Photo Interrupt SHARP Connection D Board Bracket Assy 7 Pressure Board Proportional Valve w fitting Assy Front Pane gt p 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Front Panel Board Motor w Photo Measurement Interface Interrupt Coupler Assy Power Supply Board Motherboard Optional Transformer Figure 3 Hardware components Model 50301 SHARP Beta module 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 34 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Picture of hardware components Model 50301 SHARP Beta module TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt
183. A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Thermo Fisher Scientific Digital Inputs Serial Ports RS 232 Connection Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Filter tape change e Turn pump off e Turn pump on e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in firmware Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC serial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in the firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e MODBUS Slave e Gesytec Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data e ESM The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the se
184. APE CNTRL 108 PUMP CNTRL ON OFF 109 TEMP COMP ON OFF 110 PRES COMP ON OFF 111 HEATER ON OFF 112 HTR RH TEMP CNTRL 113 EXT ALARM 1 114 EXT ALARM 2 115 EXT ALARM 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Gesytec commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Gesytec protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Gesytec commands listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 5030 Gesytec Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 e Instrument Address on page D 2 e Abbreviations Used on page D 2 e Basic Command Structure on page D 2 e Block Checksum on page D 3 e Gesytec Commands on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support Gesytec protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 N
185. ARP Instruction Manual 3 89 Operation Service Menu under the filter tape from the positive AP port on the rear panel of the instrument and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span Calibrate Flow Pressure The Flow Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow Span sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent manometer capable of 30 mmHg AP to measure the differential pressure across the orifice using the positive and negative AP ports on the rear panel and enter the value on this screen before calibrating A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span DH vided Piet Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values Note Be sure to close the toggle switch after calibration is complete A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Set Defaults 3 90 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Flow Calibration The Flow Calibration submenu is used to view and set the flow calibration flow point The flow calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Not
186. Alarms 3 66 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu PRES CH Pi Tit Wi mid PS PHP ELSES Py AG Lf bi Filter Tape Counter The Filter Tape Counter screen displays the current filter tape counter value and sets the maximum alarm limit If the filter tape counter reading goes beyond the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms gt Filter Tape Counter Max Filter Tape Counter The Maximum Filter Tape Counter screen is used to change the maximum filter tape counter alarm limit 480 90 usage 10 remaining e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms gt Filter Tape Counter gt Max CHEE Eel Bast ae POE Sek come EE fee PEE EE Detector Alarms The Detector Alarms submenu allows the user to view a set of alarms for detector boards Board status indicates that the power supplies are working and connections are successful There are no setting screens for this alarm e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Alpha The Alpha Alarms screen allows the user to view the minimum and Alarms maximum alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 100 If the alpha count reading goes beyo
187. Align the radius tube adapter with the open port on the bottom of the optics assembly as per Figure 10 9 and gently push down and then screw down the two tabs using the captive hardware Figure 10 9 Optics Installation 3 Connect the cable assembly from the rear panel of the Optical assembly and secure it to the optics connector that was installed in Step 3 of this procedure and as shown in Figure 10 10 Figure 10 10 Connecting the Optics to the Optics Connector Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 9 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly Upg rade of the Usethe following procedure for upgrade of the heater tube assembly Heater Tube Assembly 1 The heater assembly needs to be revised for the 5030 SHARP to include a ferrite bead and a small faraday cage The four steps shown below in Figure 10 11 and Figure 10 12 should be used to modify the heater assembly Note The sample downtube should be slightly loose at the roof line to allow vertical play while working on this assembly If the tubing height has changed and needs to be cut back please cut and clean the tubing before attaching to the optical assembly A Collar i Figure 10 11 Upgrading 5030 Heater Assembly 10 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Model Label Change Figure 10 12 Connecting Heater to Optics Assem
188. Baffle Plate Safety Snap Locks Tube d 16 14 Figure 5 2 European PM Inlet PM size selective inlet 1 m3 h for 50302 Beta Same construction as the EN reference inlet but with 1 m3 h With special surface protection using an aluminium EMATAL surface With special water separator and easy exchangeable impactor baffle plate Standard tube connection d 16 mm for connecting a continuous monitor Easy converting to PM25 using the PM25 nozzle plate 8 nozzles Easy converting to PM using the PM nozzle plate 8 nozzles Cyclone Ifa Sharp Cut Cyclone SCC or a BGI Very Sharp Cut Cyclone is being Maintenance used for PM2s sampling Figure 5 3 once every 2 3 weeks the dust pot should be unscrewed emptied and cleaned with a lint free cloth Once every three months the entire SCC assembly should be inspected and cleaned O rings checked for distortion cracks fraying or other problems Replace O rings as necessary 5 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Heater and Sample Tube Weather Proofing Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning Figure 5 3 PM25 Sharp Cut Cyclone On at least an annual basis more frequently in heavily polluted environments the sample tube that attaches to the inlet and to the Model 5030 Beta module should be removed and cleaned The use of a bottle brush and string will all
189. C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF bytes The following c code will expand the incoming data void inte 05 KF unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i lt 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with Windows it needs to be saved as a 4 bit per pixel gray scale image Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data that is the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen These commands are meant for backward compatibility with the C series Screen information is instead reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an iSeries instrument Screen information not available conc unit This command reports th
190. Configuration Protocol DHCP as on or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The following example shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables on and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to on the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and the gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to on Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address is changed you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as the current address A Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 8 Send format Receive format 00 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 57 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 58 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 8 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send s
191. D qua uog jNeJaq 0 Jesey HY HdAN UaJUOD yPwwog dwe1 HdaN jua Uuod Jo9 eg snjejs JajowWojayday 607 esesg Joy 8g eyeq peb607 mai 40D 89g OAY VOUS 1999S gg sBuijes Buibbojejyeq eudiy INSS Id ssey aunyesodua SN e S 10 99 0q suonpuog IAJaWIN OA SMO 4 oey o1azede MO 4 Jajuno winnoe ponad amawoeg aul eyeg HBS winnoe ainssaid OWI 1X8N dwa peog ywq SSe due moj4 odes dwa ajdwes youag dwe juaiquiy enuey HY jdwes 10 u09 deL 4 l 4 sonjeA Add 910 S H Hy wW qwuy pjoysary dwa sonjeA sainyesad we 1 HY ployseuuL HY ueds pueog Jajawojaydeny dwaj 189 pueog 10 99 0q HY ajduies peog O I HO Aapis pueog eoRja ul 101 u09 apow yd N pueoqueujoyy 49 83 H 18S Byg yd N s uey wojsng 13S s eyoA duind Mo 4 18S 4209 dYYHS ous Bay uey dyVHS SUOISIdA WeIBOlg apo u w nse N PJA dyVHS dHVHS Bay suun 23u09 sonsoubeig S 0UOD JUSUINASU S10 0ey uOneIqieD s bei ny IHbe SUIT UONeIbajU abuey nua uey su 195 UNY uaa 1S9 yo uael0S dn 18mog Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware 3 5 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 5030 This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo IEN TI vies Run Screens The Run screens display the SHARP concentration ambient cond
192. DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 5030 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 11 e Alarms on page B 14 e Diagnostics on page B 23 e Datalogging on page B 27 e Calibration on page B 34 e Keys Display
193. Detector Calibration Beta Ref Alpha Counts High Voltage 3 96 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual tO Mihei i The Mass Coefficient submenu allows the user to perform a mass foil calibration using a zero null and span foil set In the Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual tO Mihei i The Beta Ref Alpha Counts screen allows the user to view the real time alpha and beta counts In the Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Beta Ref Alpha Counts OPE a EEE of The High Voltage screen allows the user to view and set the high voltage value In the Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt High Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Beta Ref Threshold The Beta Ref Threshold screen allows the user to view and set the detector operating voltage manually e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Beta Ref Threshold Alpha Threshold The Alpha Threshold screen allows the user to view and set the alpha threshold manually e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Manual gt Alpha Threshold CRHTE ENE DN EEE TE Sanad Bone fet tLe bt Nephelometer The Nephelometer Calibration submenu is used to view and set the Calibration nepbelometer calibration The nephelometer calibration screen is visible
194. EEE i Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Decimal Places Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Table Points 3 54 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Table Points The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Point 1 10 ERED CH MP Tit WH nied PS PHP ESE Pi AG ane Volts The Volts
195. FF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard and filter from the fan by unsnapping it 3 If the fan is not being replaced install the new filter and snap it back into place and skip the remaining steps 4 Disconnect the fan power cable from the fan Do not lose the four nuts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement 5 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 6 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse BLE INSERTED THIS WAY EXTERIOR SIDE OF REAR PANEL STICKER AIRFLOW REFER TO FOR POSITIONING OF FAN Mounting Screws 4 Filter PARS P yy i J je p IN P Z i EDY Fan Guard ZY Keps Nuts 4 Figure 7 6 Replacing the Fan Detector Amplifier Use the following procedure to replace the detector preamplifier assembly Assembly Figure 7 7 Replacement Equipment Required Detector amplifier assembly Philips screwdriver Adjustable wrench WARNING The detector pre amp assembly has a power backup built in DO NOT OPEN caution handeling Backup power will dissipate after 8 A hours A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 15
196. Figure 4 1 Differential Pressure and Vacuum Calibration Ports 0 4 6 Figure 5 1 U S EPA PM o INI6t es os so ee ot ots ee es 5 3 Figure 5 2 European PM ig Inlet ccccecesesceceseseseetesesesestesesesesteeseseees 5 4 Figure 5 3 PMzs5 Sharp Cut Cyclone o oo cceccccccccscssesceseseeseeceseseseeseeteseeeeseaess 5 5 Figure 5 4 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan 5 6 Figure 5 5 Replacing the Filter Tape oo ccc cceescscecesesestetesesesteteteteseseees 5 8 Figure 5 6 Replacing the External Pump Exhaust Filter cece 5 9 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 9 Figure 6 3 Board Level Connection Diagram SHARP ccccccceeeeeeeee 6 10 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap occas 7 4 Figure 7 2 Model 50307 Component Layout cece cesceteseeteeteeeees 7 9 Figure 7 3 SHARP Optics Component Layout ccccccccccececeteseeteeeeeeee 7 10 Figure 7 4 Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly ccccccceecseeeeeeeee 7 11 Figure 7 5 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Rane cx sci crs e et wot Spm etre Set Selatan E ten cae 7 12 Figure 7 6 Replacing the Fan oo ccc ccccecesesesceesesescetesesestetesesesteeseseaes 7 15 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xix Figures xx Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 7 7 Replacing th
197. Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions a ed nF es Patio pH mith et mi i mii Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control Settings and configuration e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Eppuri pri pr ares Pe Tit op mote ee Pii E E EN PUE TE ueek Bone ETET Sei Boat i Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings ER pr CH perm Bet EPP aif ly in CH bo bet Bs EEE TE Sanat Bone EY Fane Bast ae 5 i iNi i Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud rate is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt Baud Rate Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Volumetric Conditions Data Bits Parity Stop Bits 3 36 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual DH Guided PLP The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication
198. GmbH Air Pollution Control A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 35 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F HEATER HEPA L NEPHELOMETER Y _ DETECTOR j men TAPE Prea B SOURCE Gr o tea ORIFICE PUMP dt ap EXHUAST t SY L PROPORTIONAL T VALVE AA VACUUM e PUMP J 4 MAKE UP AIR Figure 5 Diagram Set up of Model 5030i SHARP 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 36 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The nephelometer assembly is downstream the heated tube The fine dust follows a laminar path by the isolated nephelometer and reaches then the radial tube above the radiometric assembly The nephelometer consists of a photometer based on light scattering with a pulsed near IR LED operating at a central wavelength of 880 nm The level of scattering is determined in a measured volume of 1 cm in forward direction at an angular range of 60 80 The design o
199. Ground TTL Input 13 TTL Input 15 Digital Ground Analog Voltage 1 Analog Voltage 3 Analog Ground Analog Voltage 5 Analog Ground Analog Ground Power Fail Relay COM Power Fail Relay N O Contact Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 22 Digital Ground 23 TTL Input 3 24 TTL Input 4 25 TTL Input 6 26 Digital Ground 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Digital Ground 33 Analog Voltage 2 34 Analog Voltage 4 35 Analog Ground 36 Analog Voltage 6 37 Analog Ground VOLTAGE TEST J6 1 5V 2 3 3V 15V 15V SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 2 3 3V 24V IN J10 24V 2 Ground RESET PROC J12 Reset Proc 2 Ground DIGITAL 1 0 J14 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 SPI Reset 8 SPI Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 9 SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock RS485 to Rear Panel RS485 to Rear Panel 5V 5V 5V EXT RS485 J15 Ground Ground Ground NC NC 24 24 24 24 24 24 MONITOR J17 1 24V Power Monitor 2 Ground FRONT PANEL J18 1 Ground BD co loo N o Sz p ow N oO a a a a ol gt w N Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground
200. HARP Instruction Manual A alog Vo lt ge OUt puts cas n sesucas istered cdeanesarsives nineden idn 8 9 Analog Current Outputs Optional oo cee eeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 8 10 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional 2 0 istei ceapeted cesses tenadetnnsencten 8 10 Digital Relay Outputs 2 013 suiecussacterdecusteeesenstieusdeanveusduatdewetsteetlne 8 10 Digital Inputs inate ot heath nae eat Seta AER 8 11 Seral TORS ss SiS ae i es aS Ee eee a RRR 8 11 RS 252 Comme ction sssaaa ei iaeiiai a a i a 8 11 RS 485 Connection ensesine iseer a ER inise 8 12 Ethernet Connection e ssseseessesesesesrsrersssrsesesrsrsrsesrsesetrerrrseerersreee 8 12 External Accessory Connector ssssssssssssseesesetetesrtetetetererererersrereres 8 12 Optional Equipment siin 9 1 Inlet Ass m blies niar kn nodet a a i Ei 9 1 Sampling Tube Extensions sssssssseseseseseseseseresrsesrseseststsestsseseseses 9 1 I O Expansion Board Assembly essseeseeeeeseseessssrsrsesrrerrrrrerereess 9 1 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly s sssessesesseseseeeesesesseseseseesesessesesesee 9 1 Terminal Block and Cable Kits s s sssessessssesessseesesessesesesesseseseeeesesessese 9 2 Caples arcas A ta an Sc A E E eal ia tace td teat 9 2 IMaunting Opti ns ia ius contisnctieiedncieedhtas iA E 9 3 Roof Flange Assembly s sssssessssesesesesisesesesesesrsrsrsrsrsrsrsrststststseseseseseses 9 8 Model 5014 to 50307 Upgrade Procedures ssesessssseseseeeeeees 10 1 Instrume
201. ING If disconnected turn off AC power to the base before re connecting Nephelometer Alarms Neph Sample Bad zero Re zero Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Alarm Message Possible Cause Action Settings Verify settings Nephelometer Alarms Bad zero Re zero Neph Cal No flow Verify values Nephelometer Alarms Neph Temp Nephelometer Alarms Neph RH Disconnected cable Error in calibrating Defective sensor Verify cable connections Re calibrate Replace board Nephelometer Alarms LED Current Current settings too low Disconnected cable from base Disconnected cable from SHARP optics board Set LED current to 65 m Verify cable connection Verify cable connection Nephelometer Alarms Ref Det Volt Current settings too low Disconnected cable from base Disconnected cable from SHARP optics board Set LED current to 65 mA Verify cable connection Verify cable connection RH Temperature Alarms Ambient RH Disconnect cable external on rear panel Disconnect cable internal Verify cable connection Verify cable connection RH Temperature Alarms Sample RH RH Temperature Alarms Ambient Temp Disconnected heater Disconnect cable external on rear panel Disconnect cable internal Verify cable connecti
202. IOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE oy LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack top position Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack top Mounted in an EIA style rack includes mounting slides and front position panel EIA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots have non standard EIA locations Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Mounting Options z 16 75 REF 1 56 ra 13 75 Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting 9 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options 1 48 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 2 61 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Therm
203. It was therefore not possible to examine the range of B4 6 5 Assessment The maximum dependence on surrounding temperature in the range 5 C to 40 C was 0 2 g m at zero No deviation gt 2 6 of the default value at 20 C could be observed at reference point Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVR heinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 109 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 19 Dependence of the zero point SHARP on surrounding temperature deviation in g m average of three measurements Temperature Deviation e l e f ooe g e Table 20 Dependence of sensitivity mass coefficient on surrounding temperature devia tion in average of three measurements Temperature Deviation 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx m TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 110 of 424
204. LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal 10 LD5 LCD Signal 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal o a N O o A O N Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltage 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V RS232 RS485 A P1 A 1 NC 2 Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN 3 Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT 4 NC 5 Ground 6 NC 7 Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT 8 Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN 9 NC RS232 RS485 B P1 B 1 NC 2 Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN 3 Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT 4 NC Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 5 Ground 6 NC 7 Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT 8 Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN 9 NC AC IN PJ1 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground AC 24VPWR PJ2 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground AC INTF BD PJ3 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground Table 6
205. LO MOLY snyeg sogowopydoy uopeuqeg mo Bopeuy dwe adweg Py Beg 1007 OUS Uden dwe wanuy 409 88 dwa Uden Hy adwes sg Hy Uday Hy warquay ewy uopwequeg ydoy swej onzeodwo Hy ssev penueyy WA 0 py snyng 1090300 oy weung G37 Smola UOREIgED 104900 Hi Uden Mold WeDIpedD 3 eudi dwa uden wnroe UODg 00D SSR IO Udon agowaeg uaap owg HALS L N wnnoepyunssoid upeo 9 UNNIBA STyeIS peog dwe peog WPO puey suuepy ydeon dwe moli VOREIGHED sseni eee dua1 adwes mney eydy dua pumiguy oy Sres peog Hy ores uopeqieg mold swuwejy 1033000 Hy pugu NOY OBA SES dX3 ON seimwedwes Hy 801 OB SNBIS SORRY PJBOR JHOWOIEUGEN UOUE WNNoEA salg SRS PROMOLBOW peog 309800 pomssed YOUN ae Moli 4ouag weog ON PIOMSSEY CACWOY dwe adweg euep ede 204 pseog GOR Ley piomesey o Buey o dwe pagu JHUNOD ede Jai PsBOMeLBOYY uau MUZSU 4907 He ugua suuejy puau rnugsuj seBeyon PIOMSSed eS VOREIGHED dWIUHY Perooeg suuejy SUOIRIOA wE Bod omewa wines Tay ooh Ta euozewjy ou iewg ouo epo eo1es 4seuog uous Or jouumy J JURUNI 9b PUUEYJ IPA SyeueyD jueuna Iy SRUUBUD BRIA TY 53u00 pano Boreu oe suges mdu yey Ot s6ugps ePy indino Byuog OF DUROS di dOL Bguog meg buueang WUBUOD YNE OF ESOL wawog nwwog wawy paas 60 oses3 Beg pebio ma DSW VOINS Pees sSumes Bu bloj ES d anyewa SUORIPUCD OLZEWIN OA pew laguog ode soyid poesy dwa prousevul HY dw H 40 t03u09 40708 0S duind imo 40S epon Wewansmey Wao Weunnsu seSuey Ws IPS
206. Link Protocol Commands Commands B 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Command Description Page no or srec Reports number of srecs stored in memory B 32 pm Reports the measured PM concentration B 13 pm 24avg Reports the 24 hour average PM concentration B 13 power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote B 59 pres comp Reports sets pressure compensation to actual or standard B 48 pres std Reports sets the standard pressure B 49 program no Reports analyzer program number B 60 pump Reports sets pump on or off B 53 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 44 range Reports sets current PM range B 49 relay Sets relay logic status for the designated relay s B 65 relay stat Reports relay logic status for all relay s B 65 reset tape counter Resets the tape count to zero B 26 rh th Reports sets the current relative humidity threshold for the B 50 detector ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 44 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 44 sample rh Reports the sample relative humidity B 26 save Stores parameters in FLASH B 53 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 53 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 45 Use iscreen instead sharp Reports the 1 minute running average SHARP monitor B 14 concentration sharp24avg Reads the last calculated 24 hour average SHARP monitor B 14 concentration sp fi
207. MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to 0x7F hex This address is only used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP a MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 3 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x03 Read Input Registers 0x04 F
208. Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Hardware Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set temp std value This command sets the standard temperature to value where value is a floating point number representation of standard temperature between 0 to 25 C The following example sets the standard temperature to 15 C Send set temp std Receive set temp std 15 ok temp th This command reports the heater temperature threshold for the sample The following example reports that the temperature threshold is 30 C Send temp th Receive temp th 30 degC set temp th value This command sets the heater temperature threshold for the sample to value where value is a floating point number representation of temperature threshold between 0 to 70 C The following example sets the temperature threshold to 35 C Send set temp th 35 Receive set temp th 35 ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 55 according to Table B 6 Send contrast Receive contrast 11 55 set contrast evel This command sets the screen s evel of contrast according to Table B 6 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 10 Receive set contrast 10 ok Table B 6 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 1 5 2 10 3 15 4 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 5
209. Minimum requirement fulfilled yes The following Table 35 shows an overview of the results of the equivalence check for the candidate Model 5030i SHARP for PM2 5 In case that a criterion is fulfilled or not the text is represented in green or red Furthermore the five criteria from chapter 6 1 Methodology of the equivalence check modules 5 4 9 5 4 11 are taken into account the related cells are highlighted in colour 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 154 of 424 Table 35 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Overview equivalence test of Model 5030i SHARP for PM25 PM2 5 5030i Sharp All Data lt 18 ug m3 218 ug m3 SN1 Dataset Individual Datasets Combined Datasets 29 1 2 17 ug m3 WCM Slope b ub Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Teddington Summer lt 18 yg m3 218 yg m3 All Data Dataset Orthogonal Regression Betw een Instrument Uncertainties Intercept a ua Reference Candidate 148 0 865 1 066 0 032 0 040 0 317 51 0 959 1 090 0 032 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 pg m3 Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM 2 17 ug m3 0
210. Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Command Description Page erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 31 filter period Reports sets the number of hours to be added to filter next B 46 time for the filter tape change filter time Reports sets the next date and time of the filter tape change B 47 flags Reports current active measurement status flags in HEX B 12 flow Reports the current sample flow B 25 flow pres Reports the current flow pressure B 25 flow pres span Reports sets the flow pressure span B 39 flow pres offset Reports the flow pressure offset B 39 flow span Reports sets the current flow span B 39 flow target Reports sets the current flow B 47 flow temp Reports the current flow temperature B 25 flow temp offset Reports sets offset for flow temperature B 39 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 57 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 44 high volt Reports sets the current high voltage for the detector B 40 host name Reports sets host name string B 58 ht control Reports sets the current status of the heater B 47 instr name Reports instrument name B 58 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 58 int time Reports sets mass and concentration integration time B 48 io bd Reports sets the presense of the I O expansion board B 25 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 44 layout ack Reports disables stale l
211. N E ATE R S 3 20 RH Threshold 2i ctrctinvedndliianwinwaiiatudy nR 3 20 Temperature Threshold otic sevetiastooddest Wut ictotetehnieindade 3 21 Filter Tape Contro lden ienn cote exalt de secaldansenl ria a cal atk cat eats 3 21 Manual asa US ogee aea tae eat eae eae Sata ah ak Gals ae olde 3 21 Mass Limitinin fs Galea heen a a A A aS 3 22 Nert TIME ni a a AE 3 22 Periodont kroi iee n E R E Ea AE EEES 3 22 COUNTER eleni at a a E T a 3 23 Tape Zero Rati neasasi jini aai a iiie 3 23 Volumetric Conditions s ssseseseessesesesesesrsesrsssrsrsrststsrstststsesesesesesesesese 3 24 Temperature Compensation ssiticeciesoass ised casgedials iicnctstosncesd ets 3 24 Standard Temperature esa cis ny asset enceshesediedaigeeceandt ve esudsbadead bane 3 24 Pressure Compensation is vasicis destscsevetssstdiasssieutessdedadawivtasiuansse 3 25 Staridard Press techies ioe cient joacahe codes teaeend cA eats a cokecaest 3 25 viii Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Datalopging SettiNgSs seiss eesriie sk aaea e aai 3 25 SANE A EETA E E E T T 3 26 View bogged Dataset ei ea a i ea 3 26 Number of Recordsen a a ta 3 27 Dat eae BARN EA A ARE EEE E AE EEA EEEE E 3 27 Erase Logone aens a A er AA NaS E e as 3 28 Select Content sssesesereseessseessisssrresreresetssrtsseressesssereseessressreesees 3 28 Choose Field Dataran a ae AA AEEA 3 29 Eo a ETAT E E E ee E 3 29 Other Measurements ss sessessseeereeeserssrssreserees
212. No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The measuring system is operated using the front panel pushbuttons and LCD display A change of the parameters or the adjustment of sensors is only possible by pressing several key sequences The measuring system can also be password protected If a password protection is activated lock icon it is still possible to see data parameters and settings on the front panel user in terface It is however not possible to perform any changes As an outside installation of the measuring device is not possible additional protection is giv en by installation at locations to which unauthorised people have no access e g locked measuring cabinet 6 4 Evaluation Unintended and unauthorised adjustment of instrument parameters can be avoided by pass word protection Even without password protection the adjustment of sensors and change of the parameters can only be done by pressing several key sequences Moreover additional protection against unauthorised intervention is given by installing the system in a locked measuring cabinet 6 5 Assessment The AMS is protected against unauthorised and unintended adjustment In addition the AMS shall be locked up in a measuring cabinet Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUV Rheinland Air Pol
213. O 4 1S9 jaxiq Aejdsig wnnoe Q JauUeYd Indu S ld eg uoneaqieg nduj Bojeuy sunejy WwNNILA ANSSAd g JauueyD jueuND due pueog 9 JauueYUD abelo dw moj4 uoneiqued Ino Bojeuy dwe adwes 19497 DHS Uden dw jusiquiy dwe udey HY ejdwes Hy Yuden HY Juaiquiy uoneiqieg yd y swuejy eunjesedwas HY enuen HOA 18d 34 ony queuing G37 UOHeIGIeD 10 99 9q HY uden qualoiyja0d 43 eydy dwie 1 yd N leo uden 14909 oeg jdwe yd N 4U919144909 WNN A snes peog ua1914909 jeway L sunejy yden uoneiqieg SSe gag jenuey eudiy ony snes peog uoneiques Mmoja swuejy 10 99 9q MO 4 98A sn e S dX O I ssalg eg snes ep u uoneiqieg wnnseA Sad Snes pseoqieyjow piomssegd 490 UN dwa moj youeg piomssed sAoway dwe ejdwes eBueyg ede 1314 piomssed Huey dw juaiquy Jayunog ade JayI4 juawinsjsu 4907 Hy aiqwy swuejy uaWINJ sU PAOMSSed 19S uoHeiqied diN3L HY piomsseq CEEI pa 29 q sunejy sunely 9 JeuueyD ebeyoA TIV s ndyno Boyeuy so Ok L nding s e s ej y 91 1 Indu syndy jeubiq 8 4 ul Boyeuy soabeyo indy Bojeuy 8 NI sBulpeay indu Bojeuy u49 10 99 9q JOY queuing qa uoz wIL wu L 3eq yo u0 apo ad1A1eg SB1 UOD UBBlDS 9 4 jauueyg Juang 9 4 jauueyo abeyoA S QUUBYD JUELIND II sj uueyo LA Iv Byuog ndino Boyeuy JJ s6umes indy jey 61q OL L sBues Aejay indino 6yuo9 O I sbulnes dl d L Byuog eyeq Bulweays oo0 O1q4 uolTeoUNWWOD al uawnysu sBulnes ees sBuijes uonesunwwo9 Bul6Gojeyeq ainByuo
214. P Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Motherboard Replacement Motherboard Replacement A 7 30 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 Pop the digital output board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 13 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 5 Using the nut driver remove the six standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 14 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement
215. PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 4 Evaluation An evaluation of the drift at zero point and of the measured value in 24 h is not possible The zero point drift was evaluated on the basis of the results of the external zero point measurements performed on a regular basis For this the values were compared with the measured values of the previous test and with the measured values of the first test The reference point drift was evaluated on the basis of the results of the mass coefficient de termination Here again the values were compared with the measured values of the previ ous test and with the measured values of the first test The large deviation found for SN 1 during the span foil measurements carried out from 12 May 2011 to 19 July 2011 was caused by a damaged filter foil set This was only detected on 14 November 2011 after another unusually large deviation was found The test was then re peated with a new set of filter foils and the system passed showing no abnormalities The deviations determined by comparison with the previous values see yellow marking in Table 25 are therefore not attributable to the measuring system It should be noted that concentration values could not be simulated by checking the mass coefficient It was therefore not possible to examine the range of B4 6 5 Assessment T
216. PM10 PM2 5 PM10 g ms g m3 1 6 7 2013 56 6 Bornheim 2 6 8 2013 3 6 9 2013 66 9 4 6 10 2013 59 1 5 6 11 2013 60 7 6 6 12 2013 47 4 7 6 13 2013 42 1 8 6 14 2013 49 3 6 15 2013 50 0 6 16 2013 44 8 6 17 2013 60 3 6 18 2013 60 9 6 19 2013 66 5 6 20 2013 62 1 6 21 2013 62 2 6 22 2013 63 8 6 23 2013 59 8 6 24 2013 61 8 6 25 2013 50 4 6 26 2013 63 5 6 27 2013 69 2 6 28 2013 60 4 6 29 2013 6 30 2013 7 1 2013 7 2 2013 7 3 2013 7 4 2013 7 5 2013 7 6 2013 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 205 of 424 Annex 7 Measured values from additional test site Bornheim Summer 2013 related to actual conditions Page 2 of 2 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 5030i SHARP Measured values in pg m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio Remark Test site PM10 PM10 PM2 5 PM10 Lg m Lg m 7 7 2013 14 9 14 4 Bornheim 7 8 2013 16 3 16 1 7 9 2013 24 9 22 6 7 10 2013 19 1 17 5 7 11 2013 26 6 24 9 7 12 2013 Outlier Reference PM10 7 13 2013 20 4 20 7 7 14 2013 22 2 21 5 7 15 2013 26 2 25 6 7 16 2013 30 2 28 9 7 17 2013 18 7 18 0 7 18 2013 17 0 17 3 Outlier reference PM2 5
217. Pin Descriptions Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Label Designator MOTHER BD J1 Oo a N on A OQO N Signal Description 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output SPI Board Select SPI Clock DIGITAL J2 1 OUTPUTS oOo a N oo A WW N X oO a N N n a N co loo N lop ol p w N N oO Thermo Fisher Scientific Relay 1 Contact a Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a Relay 9 Contact a Relay 10 Contact a NC Solenoid Drive Output 1 Solenoid Drive Output 2 Solenoid Drive Output 3 Solenoid Drive Output 4 Solenoid Drive Output 5 Solenoid Drive Output 6 Solenoid Drive Output 7 Solenoid Drive Output 8 Relay 1 Contact b Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 23 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 24 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 Signal Description Relay 2 Contact b Relay 3 Contact b Relay 4 Contact b Relay 5 Contact b Relay 6 Contact b Relay 7 Contact b Relay 8 Contact b Relay 9 Contact b Relay 10 Contact b 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V Table 6 8 SHARP Measurement Interface Board Pin Connections Connector Label TEMP RH Reference Designator
218. Power Supply 24 V Output 115 VAC Supply to Measurement Interface Board RS 485 Data AC Power Switch to Motherboard DC Power Supply Status Monitor Motherboard to Front Panel Board DC Power Supply AC Input Main AC from Receptacle Assembly AC to Power Switch oO Oo oOo lele Se SaS Nea a S 5 Se Sa eS Se eS SS 2 g B 2 Fan Power Assembly 106028 00 RH Temperature Connector Assembly 106030 00 Heater Cable to Heater Assembly 106029 00 Pump Cable to Pump Plug Assembly 106844 00 Rear Solenoid Cable Assembly 106027 00 Pressure to Interrupt Board Cable Assembly 105952 00 106189 00 Cam Photo Interrupt Cable Assembly Counter Wheel Photo Interrupt Cable Assembly 106400 00 External RH Temperature Cable Assembly 108156 00 SHARP to Measurement Interface Board Cable Assembly 108170 00 Thermo Fisher Scientific SHARP Case Cable Assembly Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components External Device able 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an iSeries Connection instrument Components Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102562 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37
219. Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 145 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Furthermore the evaluation of the following datasets is done for e Each test site and comparison individually e 1 dataset with measured values lt 18 g m for PM25 Basis averages of reference measurement The uncertainty between the candidates Ups is calculated from the differences of all 24 hour results of the simultaneously operated candidate systems according to the following equa tion yr Yio i 1 2n results of the parallel measurements of individual 24 h values i No of 24 h values 2 d Ubs a with Vit and yi 2 n 6 5 Assessment The uncertainty between the candidates Ups is with a maximum of 1 68 g m for PM25 below the required value of 2 5 g m8 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx y T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 146 of 424 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 34 shows the values calcu
220. RH Termperature Alarms gt Sample RH Wi rbd Min and Max Sample RH The Minimum Sample RH alarm limit screen is used to change the Limits minimum ambient RH alarm limit The minimum and maximum sample RH screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Sample RH gt Min or Max u ompi bed PERRO Pihet PRET Ambient Temperature The Ambient Temperature screen displays the current ambient temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 30 C to 60 C If the ambient temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Alarms Menu alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Ambient Temp gum Ty EUO iad fat Min and Max Ambient The Minimum Ambient Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change Temperature Limits the minimum ambient temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum ambient temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Ambient Temp gt Min or Max Flow Temperature The Flow Temperature screen displays the current ambient temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable
221. RP Serial No SN 1 NEPH SN 2 NEPH SN 1 NEPH ne pce value ea value pases value Ta mee m aes Ta ae 0 0 a ug m ug m g m ua md ug m rm mf 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T V Rheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 180 of 424 Annex 3 Dependence of measured value on ambient temperature Page 1 of 1 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific Standards Reference foils Type Model 50301 SHARP Serial No SN1 SN2 ky ni e 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH 7 AX TOvrheinland Luftreinhaltung 3 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 181 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 4 Dependence of measured value on mains voltage Page 1 of 1 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific Standards Reference foils Type Model 50301 SHARP Serial No SN1 SN2 O Mains voltage Dee value Dee value value V a ae 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Preci
222. RP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Vacuum Mass Coefficient The Vacuum Mass coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the vacuum coefficient using manual calibration mode Factory set e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Vacuum Coefficient BOHMEE gue fr Barometer Mass The Barometer Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the Coefficient barometer coefficient using manual calibration mode Factory set e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Baro Coefficient WH mid Mass Coefficient The Mass Coefficient submenu allows the user to view and set the mass coefficient using manual or auto mode Factory set e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 93 Operation Service Menu Auto Mass Coefficient The Auto Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to conduct a mass foil calibration Note After pressing a series of screens will walk you through the mass foil calibration procedure For details see Auto Mass Coefficient on page 4 9 A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Auto Manual Mass Coefficient The Manual Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to adjust the mass coefficient used in beta attenuation e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt
223. Report No 936 21209885 F 5 Reference measuring methods In accordance with the specifications of EN 14907 the following instruments were used dur ing the field test 1 Reference equipment for PM2 5 Low Volume Sampler LVS3 Manufacturer Ingenieurb ro Sven Leckel LeberstraBe 63 Berlin Germany Date of manufacture 2007 PM25 Sampling inlet Two PM2 5 reference instruments were operated simultaneously during the test each with a controlled volume flow of 2 3 m h The accuracy of the volume flow control is lt 1 of the nominal volume flow under real operating conditions The sampling air for the LVS3 is sucked in through the sampling inlet by a rotary vane vacu um pump The sampling air volume flow is measured between the filter and the vacuum pump with a measuring orifice The suctioned air streams then out of the pump passing through a separator for abrasion of the rotary vane towards the air outlet The electronic measuring equipment of the LVS3 displays the inlet sampling air volume in standard or operating m as soon as the sampling is complete To determine the PM25 concentration the laboratory performed a gravimetric determination of the amount of suspended particulate matter on the respective filters The obtained result was then divided by the respective volume of sampling air in operating m8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Ri
224. Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 153 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Point 9 5 4 The combined uncertainty of the candidates w cy is calculated for each dataset by combining the contributions from 9 5 3 1 and 9 5 3 2 according to the following equation 2 u i Weom Yi vam For each dataset the uncertainty Wem is calculated at the level of y 30 g m for PM2s Point 9 5 5 The expanded relative uncertainty of the results of the candidates is calculated for each dataset by multiplication of Wom with a coverage factor k according to the following equation Wom K Wow In practice k 2 for large n Point 9 6 The highest resulting uncertainty Wcy is compared and assessed with the re quirements on data quality of ambient air measurements according to EU Standard 7 Two results are possible 1 Wom S Waqo Candidate method is accepted as equivalent to the standard method 2 Wom gt Wago Candidate method is not accepted as equivalent to the standard method The specified expanded relative uncertainty Wago for particulate matter is 25 7 6 5 Assessment The determined uncertainties Wcm without application of correction factors lay for all ob served datasets below the defined expanded relative uncertainty Waqo of 25 for fine dust
225. S EPA PM10 Inlets European or U S EPA PM2 5 Inlet Configurations PM2 5 VSSC PM1 0 SCC Tripod Data Output and Input iPort software to view and change system operation from PC Outputs Selectable Voltage RS232 RS485 TCP IP 10 Status Relays and Power Fail Indication standard 0 20 or 4 20 mA Isolated Current Output optional Inputs 16 Digital Inputs standard Eight 0 to 10 VDC Analog Inputs optional 8 User Defined Analog Outputs 0 1 or 0 5 VDC Protocols C Link MODBUS Geystitech Bayern Hessen ESM Protocol streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet 2 User Defined Contact Closure Alarm Circuits 4 Averaged Analog Inputs 0 5 VDC with user defined conversion to engineering units Data Storage Maximum of 190 000 Concentration records with date time and flags Up to 32 types of logged data parameters increased parameters reduces number of records Power Requirements Model 50307 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz to be specified upon order Pump 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 4 25 A Maximum Power 805 Watts 115V 880 Watts 220 240V Physical Dimensions W 16 75 42 5 cm x D 23 58 4 cm x H 8 62 21 9 cm Weight 40 Ibs 19 kg Optional Accessories 6 foot extension tubes Tripod Outdoor Ambient Shelter with HVAC Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 2 Installation The fo
226. SCII Responses sssesseeeseseieieeererersrersesreres B 66 Format Specifier for Binary Responses eeeeeeeererrseseeee B 66 Format Specifier for Erec Layout eeeeeeeerserrssrseee B 67 Tte ae a a a e a aa B 67 Value SNE aereis erei eee TSE EA OE cut beast TESS ina B 67 Value Sourc aa a a a A atta tia as oat B 67 Alarm Informations issernida aan ia Aa ai B 68 Tratislati n Table nne ds tterd lenn nnan RN RREAN i B 68 Selection lable ssssaisiiienceeccas dena Mandl A A NN B 68 Bitton Designat t rerrundnannnno nn eaaa ania B 68 Examples jicccc scutes n a AEE EE B 69 Appendix C MODBUS Protocols sisia ae aaas C 1 Serial Communication Parameters ssssssccsssssssssssssssesssssnesenss C 1 TCP Communication Parairetersa ic2sasnscencttiaaaia tesadhietwautevebeael tts C 2 Application Data Unit Definition viasacitinecciud niewdeienaineih C 2 Slive Addres Sannen a cee qusirond ond aaar aa C 2 MBAP Head k annn sann naa TNN S C 2 F nction Codema a E A E E S C 3 MVR AL cesta aida sare iad Ae dea es ues he Casta dase cee sada A Ee C 3 PRETO G NCG Kecareiteeterk ls A AS foal C 3 PU CGH OOS E TEE T E A E T TEE C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs cceceesseeseeeeseeseeeeseeseneeaees C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Siig l oil az 5 es ars sear tes stared uaitbe cussccedduetiated C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported wars 3 eer ee cise teeta eas C 8 Appendix D Gesytec Bay
227. SHARP MIB s p BETA 2 DETECTOR PJ17 Fy Pin LI PJ20 WJ39 4 Pin MJ33 TJCOUNTER WHEEL 138 gt s CICAM WHEEL W31 bo PRESSURE BOARD MI28 5 BOARD TEMP THERM PJ3 m IEATER 1_120 VAC a N 2 FIN P S jo ir a ee PURGE 2120 VAC PA r L a TT MOTOR 120 VAC PUS at AUX POWER 120 VAC Zh PJ45 ais J21 FAN Pi 2 Pin aditi AUXHT 2 rin PJ12 sa Bin JAUXHT 2 PJ PUMP 2 Pin PJ14 PUMP 2 2 Pin eee JZ IO 2 Pir PJ30 M 2 Pir PJ36 C A TIF ER MOD Py a Pin x J44 PJ43 5 Q PI IRCE 4 C 2 Pin a J18 x 4VD AC R a MJ42 5 JTEST RTD i SREY MJ41 5 SAMPLE 1 TEMP a In yar J40 JSAMPLE 2 TEMP MJ19 ph PUMP 3 Pn MJ23 IPUMP FLOW 2 S e pin eae A 3 P S J10 44 TEMP 2 L o CISPARE FLO 3 Pin a N I rae J L_ zp O 1 V SoD 2 2 Pin EAT gt a Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin Descriptions 6 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 6 3 Board Level Connection Diagram SHARP The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table 6 7 can be
228. SM Commands Supported Command Description E pump on F filter change Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual E 3
229. Send mass coef Receive mass coef 7100 0 set mass coef value This command sets the mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the mass coefficient to 7000 Send set mass coef 7000 Receive set mass coef 7000 ok thermal mass coef This command reports the current thermal mass coefficient The following example reports that the thermal mass coefficient is 19 000000 Send thermal mass coef Receive thermal mass coef 19 000000 set thermal mass coef value This command sets the thermal mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the thermal mass coefficient to 20 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Send set thermal mass coef 20 5 Receive set thermal mass coef 20 5 ok vac mass coef This command reports the current vacuum mass coefficient The following example reports that the vacuum mass coefficient is 2 0 Send vac mass coef Receive vac mass coef 2 000000 set vac mass coef value This command sets the vacuum mass coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the vacuum mass coefficient to 3 1 Send set vac mass coef 3 1 Receive set vac mass coef 3 1 ok neph cal bkg Th
230. Servicing Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement 2 Remove the SHARP optics cover assembly and the measurement case assembly as described earlier 3 Disconnect the cable from the detector amplifier assembly connector on the measurement interface board and disconnect the SHV connector from the detector amplifier 4 Remove the one screw holding the detector amplifier mounting bracket and slide out the detector amplifier assembly Unhook SHV connector Unfasten screw and slide detector amplifier out Slide Out Unhook connector from Interface Board Figure 7 7 Replacing the Detector Amplifier Assembly 5 Install the new detector amplifier assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the detector amplifier board Refer to the Detector Amplifier Board Calibration procedure that follows 7 16 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Detector Amplifier Board Calibration External Pump Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing Detector Amplifier Board Calibration Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 7 Calibrate the instrument Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual Calibrate the detector amplifier after replacing the detector amplifier board Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A 1 Let
231. Settings na reesen asea raa E aE EEEE 3 41 Us DHCP sec aceasta a a a a a ON i 3 42 PAd A L A E TE 3 42 PSG aS AAE E EEE EE E E achcuen Met edan tela ee tae 3 43 D fa lt Gateway ioi a oist as EEr E E R aS 3 43 Host Name o A NTN 3 43 Network Time Protocol Server cccccccessccssssecesssecssssecesseeesseeeeeas 3 44 T O Configuratio enseing ern pe eee ney ort e ee cretrrr omen terest etre 3 44 Output Relay Settings inise ete teas aa tenet ses 3 44 L pie Stateside ae ae oiii 3 45 Tastriment State urena ea e eteei tase 3 45 eea EEEE E EAA E A E 3 46 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual ix Contents TNO ATA gps nn a a A NNR 3 46 Digital Input Settings sesesesssesesseseseeesessrsesrsrtttrsrerrererereesesrseees 3 46 EE e T E abestolge tchutel dents eadao de ndaitbaaes 3 47 TiSte tiene ACHON sassscesiaivendeustsasinmsSiesuascal veut entenienn ese 3 47 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel cee 3 48 Allow Over Under Ratices sac5iiii celiac ak Goede a dieccdee dae seas 3 48 Analog Output Configuration Select Action cesses 3 49 Select ATG norio nd secs score cme e a Aeee EEVEE EERSTE 3 49 Minimum and Maximum Value ssssssssseseseeeeseeeserrrrrrrererersrsesres 3 49 Choose Signal to Output s sssssssssssesssesssesesesesrsrersrsrerrerrrereesesrseses 3 51 Analog Input Configuration sesesesssesesesesesesesesesesrsrrrrrrerererersees 3 52 Descriptor n a a a a aN 3 53 LOE IEA E A TEE EE ET E EE 3
232. Setup _ Tubing Connector Fasten Screws 2 Fasten Captive To Rear Panel Hardware 2 50307 H1 Fasten Nut Figure 2 6 Heater Assembly 4 Attach a second tubing connector to the top of the heater tube 5 Carefully push additional 5 8 inch OD stainless steel tubing through the roof flange and then drop into the tubing union on top of the heater 6 Any exposed 5 8 inch OD stainless steel tubing should be insulated with additional pipe insulation inside the shelter 7 Sleeve any additional water tight capping over the tubing that now extends above the roof line 8 Sleeve the white Delrin plastic tripod adapter over the 5 8 inch OD tubing to an appropriate height to accommodate the tripod and 2 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup ambient T RH sensor assembly Tighten this adapter against the stainless steel tubing using the two setscrews 9 Sleeve the tripod over the tripod adapter to a proper height and tighten If using a tripod using the adjustable legs of the tripod plumb the inlet tube assembly 10 Attach the white ambient T RH sensor radiation shield assembly onto a portion of the exposed tripod adapter 11 Attach and tighten the 5 8 inch to 3 8 inch reducing T fitting to the 5 8 inch stainless steel tubing 12 Place the PMio or PM2 s inlet into the 5 8 inch stainless T fitting 13 Feed one end of the black 25 foot T RH cable t
233. TABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask aa ee a Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABLE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Gateway Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Volumetric Conditions Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP Server address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP
234. TD Sample1B_RTD Ground TEST RTD AC IN J42 J43 gt n w N SpareA_RTD SpareB_RTD Ground AC AC AC Ground 24V IN J44 a 24V Ground DATA Thermo Fisher Scientific J45 Ground RS485 RS485 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator MOTHERBOARD J1 1 Ground 2 Ground 3 LCLK LCD Signal 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 LLP LCD Signal 7 LFLM LCD Signal 8 LD4 LCD Signal 9 LDO LCD Signal 10 LD5 LCD Signal 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltagel 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 27 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 6 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator w BS 24V LDO_5V LCD Signal LD1_5V LCD Signal LD2_5V LCD Signal LD3_5V LCD Signal LCD_ONOFF_5V LCD Signal LFLM_5V LCD Signal NC LLP_5V LCD Signal LCLK_5V LCD Signal
235. TUV RHEINLAND ENERGIE UND UMWELT GMBH Dakks Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle D PL 11120 02 00 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM 5 TUV Report 936 21209885 F Cologne 20 September 2013 www umwelt tuv de teu service de tuv com The department of Environmental Protection of TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH is accredited for the following work areas Determination of air quality and emissions of air pollution and odour substances Inspection of correct installation function and calibration of continuously operating emission measuring instru ments including data evaluation and remote emission monitoring systems Combustion chamber measurements Performance testing of measuring systems for continuous monitoring of emissions and ambient air and of elec tronic data evaluation and remote emission monitoring systems Determination of stack height and air quality projections for hazardous and odour substances Determination of noise and vibration emissions and pollution determination of sound power levels and execu tion of sound measurements at wind energy plants according to EN ISO IEC 17025 The accreditation is valid up to 22 01 2018 DAkkS register number D PL 1 1120 02 00 Reproduction of extracts from this test report is subject to writt
236. Using a NIST traceable barometer measure the barometric pressure and Calibration convert as necessary in units of millimetres of mercury mmHg Use the SPAN feature from the barometric calibration submenu 4 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zero Calibrate Vacuum Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Span Calibration Calibration Procedure Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 mmHg The Calibrate Vacuum Flow Zero screen calibrates the vacuum flow sensor at zero value This is done automatically with every filter tape change However if for any reason this needs to be done proceed to the following screen below to execute a zeroing filter tape change The Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the vacuum sensor calibration span point To calibrate the vacuum sensor zero a digital manometer capable of measuring up to 100 mmHg and attach to the APA port on the rear panel Then push the toggle switch on the right inward to open see Figure 4 1 The manometer reading can now be used to calibrate the vacuum sensor Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Calibration Procedure Calibrate Flow Pressure Span 4 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual RH temp 7 O VACUUM y ame eon Oe Figure 4 1 Differential Pressure and Vacuum Calibrati
237. a cece tt dtesadd acatstore 7 18 Pressure Board Calibtatiany iiccdscssess sd iishussaddatdolvandentias dle disuedeeus 7 20 Analog O tput Testigo uisa ienne a a A RA RR 7 21 Analog Output Calibration s 2 4 4 c00vicl nde enneaseia 7 24 Analog Input Calibration s ssseseseeeseeeeesesesesssssssssssrsrsisisiseresesesesesrseses 7 25 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts sssessseseeeeeeesssse 7 25 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale wo cee eee 7 26 Themistor Re pA Ce eN ts cata and spies oie cede aceaia Jase tand ese b cevecdangt tunica 7 26 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement 0 0 eeseseeeereeeeeeees 7 27 Digital Output Board Replacement cesseseseseeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeneeee 7 29 Motherboard Replacement sivss2exis decstaccsadtei antec atest accteanes 7 30 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sceeeseseeeereeeeeeneesees 7 31 Photo Interrupt Board Replactinentic 42 6 2ees ean ees 7 32 Proportional Valve Replacement 0 6 00 ay aseeta aie eta 7 33 Detector Assembly Replacement 2as 202 20s 200 4a s2ad ty nea cieaiteaedeeeceeatess 7 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Flow RTO Rep acer tig senngsssnnisecni iadenin 7 36 Transformer Replacement s sssesesssesesssssssssssesssssrsessststseststerteesesesrsees 7 37 Radius Tube Replacement s s sssssesesesesessssssssssrsrsrsrsrsestseststsesesesesesessse 7 38 Ambient RH Temperature Replacement sssssseeeeeeeeererererrrerrrrrsese 7 39 Front Panel Board Repla
238. adapter and the de scribed procedure It can otherwise damage the instrument It is recommended to check the tightness of the measuring system on a quarterly basis ac cording to the described procedure 6 4 Evaluation The tightness was checked with the adapter as part of the laboratory test The criteria specified by the manufacturer upon which the tightness check is considered passed maximum difference of 0 42 l min 2 5 of the flow rate between the flow rates measured by the instrument and by the external flow meter under application of the adapter proved to be appropriate parameters for monitoring the instrument s tightness The labora tory tests resulted in a maximum leakage lt 1 of the nominal flow rate of 16 67 l min for both candidates The tightness check must only be performed with the tightness check adapter and the de scribed procedure It can otherwise damage the instrument 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR heinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH eintan Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 142 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment The criteria specified by the manufacturer upon which the tightness check is considered passed maximum difference of 0 42
239. age 31 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Both C and Cys values are averaged in the same way over a variable time span The aver aging period depends on the variation coefficient of the mass concentration determined by the nephelometer itself This coefficient is calculated using a mathematical algorithm in which both the current nephelometer concentration and the concentration measured by the nephelometer one second before are integrated The coefficient is calculated continuously and is averaged by a digital filter one minute time constant The resulting factor is then mul tiplied by the maximum time constant of 720 min In case of small and stable concentrations the averaging period time constant of the radiometric measurement is automatically ex tended to up to 12 h in order to increase the accuracy of mass concentration determination For highly variable and large concentrations the process is exactly the opposite i e the av eraging time is reduced to up to 20 min In practical use however the time constant is sel dom less than 4 hours The C Cre ratio of the equation above is the so called auto calibration factor which ap plies a real time calibration to the one minute average of the nephelometer signal Cy In or der to optimise this continuous mass calibration of the nephelometer signal software has been implemented in the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system
240. al Command Description Page alpha eff Reports sets the current value of alpha efficiency for the B 34 detector alpha th Reports sets the current value of alpha threshold for the B 34 detector amb rh Reports the ambient relative humidity B 23 amb rh offset Reports sets the current ambient relative humidity offset B 35 amb temp Reports the current ambient temperature B 23 amb temp offset Reports sets the current ambient temperature offset B 35 analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 61 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 61 analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel B 61 avg24 time Reports sets 24 hour averaging time to start averaging the B 11 concentration baro mass coef Reports sets the current barometric mass coefficient B 35 baro pres Reports the current barometric pressure B 24 baro span Reports sets the current barometric pressure span B 36 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 56 beta th Reports sets the current reference beta threshold for the B 36 detector bkg pm Reports sets current PM background B 36 bkg sharp Reports sets current SHARP background B 37 board temp Reports the current board temperature B 24 cal baro pres span Automatically calculates the span coefficient B 37 cal flow pres span Automatically sets the flow pressure span B 37 cal flow span Automatically sets the fl
241. alarm limits range from 5 to 60 C If the flow temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Flow Temp rip gies Piet 3 74 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Flow The Minimum Flow Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum flow temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Flow Temp gt Min or Max Board Temperature The Board Temperature screen displays the current board temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 60 C If the board temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Board Temp Wi mb Min and Max Board The Minimum Board Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum board temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum board temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms
242. allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below The display shows the current heater for the mode selected PM e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Volumetric Conditions Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Items displayed are determined by the options installed For Common Flags and Detector A Flags see Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 for data descriptions Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Other Measurements DH vided PLP i 3 30 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog
243. alues 2 18 UG MS eee 149 Figure 47 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PM all test sites values lt 18 UG M ee 150 Figure 48 Reference vs candidate SN 1 amp SN 2 measured component PM25 UNM VUES Se acca tet a cena eee nen tea chen acetoacetate a ne serene eemateeaenenanaaae 158 Figure 49 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PMps all test sites 159 Figure 50 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PMzps all test sites 159 Figure 51 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PMz2 5 Cologne WINIET saxtvecortserecacerstiveentoeterenedeinde anaE AAEE EOE aA EEA EKE EE anaes 160 Figure 52 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Cologne TL ac ccacte aus ostel cece aan anagsscdeacecengsadsduacdystecceceucesmessaceaaeasae 160 Figure 53 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM 5 Bornheim summer lt tc ierdee Sitidcam dese iiieieelisd tinea oe 161 Figure 54 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM 5 Bornheim SUIMIMEN sessirnar eee en neni A ERNE AEN RR 161 Figure 55 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM2s5 Bornheim winter a tceccukonecsatiertineieaniceoiccencea seam enoiereeiaxeumeisetetreiaiete 162 Figure 56 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PMz2 5 Bornheim winter eneeenneer cere errr ee eer ee re eee ee nee ee ee eee 162 Figure 57 Reference
244. and 3 measurement sites respectively 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 169 of 424 Table 38 shows the results of the evaluations of the equivalence check after the application of the correction factor for the slope on the complete dataset Table 38 rection Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 1 amp SN 2 after slope cor 29 1 217 ug m3 Twas ee PM2 5 5030i Sharp Orthogonal Regression Slope Corrected All Data 0 999 lt 18 ug m3 0 994 0 030 0 006 218 ug m3 1 020 0 030 0 803 Orthogonal Regression Dataset Slope b Up Bornheim Winter 1 006 0 025 0 175 Cologne Winter 1 017 0 028 0 481 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 1 037 0 031 0 469 Teddington Summer 1 043 0 047 0 590 Intercept a ua Betw een Instrument Uncertainties Slope b Up Intercept a Ug Reference Candidate 0 012 0 084 0 210 0 297 0 913 Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Wem 217 ug m3 0 624 0 633 0 437 0 381 lt 18 ug m3 157 0
245. and TUV Rhein land It comprises the testing of the latest series of suspended particle measuring systems by different manufacturers in the laboratory and at field test sites in the UK and in Germany The minimum requirements were fulfilled during suitability testing TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH therefore suggests publication as a suitability tested measuring system for continuous monitoring of suspended particulate matter PM25 in ambient air 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 18 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 1 2 Certification proposal Due to the positive results achieved the following recommendation is put forward for the no tification of the AMS as a suitability tested measuring system AMS designation Model 5030 SHARP with PM25pre separator for suspended particulate matter PM25 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific Franklin USA Field of application Continuous monitoring of suspended particulate matter of the PM25 fraction in ambient air stationary operation Measuring ranges during suitability test Component Certification range Unit PMo5 0 1000 g m Sof
246. and remove the cover 2 Loosen the two screws of the radius mounting block using a 9 16 inch hex driver 3 Remove radius tube SHARP adapter 4 Loosen the two mounting screws on the measurement head assembly Remove tube by slightly turning side to side while pulling 5 Verify the sealing o ring is in position before sliding the new radius tube assembly into the measurement head 6 Install the new radius tube assembly by following the previous steps in reverse k Radius Tube Adapter T I UI i o 6 fo a 4 Unfasten Screws 2 4 ti __ Insulation Pull Out Tube Unfasten Screws 2 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Radius Tube Ambient Use the following procedure to replace the ambient RH temperature RH Temperature 9 s m gt Y iss 7 22 Replacement Pent Required Ambient RH temperature assembly Adjustable wrench Pliers Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Ambient RH Temperature Replacement 7 40 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover
247. andard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For all other certification ranges the group averages of measured values about the cal ibration function shall not exceed 5 of the upper limit of the corresponding certifica tion range Note By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems For PM25 particulate measuring systems this test shall be performed according to minimum requirement 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertain ty of the instruments 6 2 Equipment See module 5 4 10 PMz5 6 3 Performance of test For PM25 particulate measuring systems this test shall be performed according to minimum requirement 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments 6 4 Evaluation See module 5 4 10 PMz25 6 5 Assessment For PM2 5 particulate measuring systems this test shall be performed according to minimum requirement 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results See module 5 4 10 PMz5 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 105 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate
248. anuary 2010 4 the following 5 criteria must be fulfilled to proof the equivalence 1 Of the full dataset at least 20 of the results obtained using the standard method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold specified in 2008 50 EC for annual limit values 28 g m for PM and currently 17 g m for PMo 5 2 The in between uncertainty of the candidate must be less than 2 5 yg m for all data and for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 ug m or 18 g m for PM and PM25 respectively The in between uncertainty of the reference method must be less than 2 0 g m8 4 The expanded uncertainty Wc is calculated at 50 ug m for PM and 30 g m8 for PMz2 5 for each individual candidate instrument against the average results of the refer ence method For each of the following permutations the expanded uncertainty must be less than 25 e Full dataset e Datasets representing PM concentrations greater than or equal to 30 g m for PMio or concentrations greater than or equal to 18 g m for PM25 provided that the subset contains 40 or more valid data pairs e Datasets for each individual test site 5 Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that the slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2 u b and the intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 a lt 2 u a If these preconditions are not met the candidate method may be ca
249. applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control 3 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 171 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 7 Recommendations for practical use Works in the maintenance interval 4 weeks The following procedures are required to be undertaken at regular intervals Regular visual inspection telemetric monitoring Check of system status Check of error messages Contamination check Check of the instrument functions according to the instructions of the manufacturer Maintenance of the sampling inlet according to the instructions of the manufacturer For the rest the manufacturer s directions and recommendations shall be followed 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Precisely Right Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 172 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended p
250. aring first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other measurement values read the status of the digital outputs of
251. articulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Further maintenance works The following works are necessary in addition to the regular works in the maintenance inter val Inspection of filter tape supply one filter tape is enough for approx 650 filter tape changes per roll approx 215 days at cycles of 8 hours Semi annual filter tape changes are expected to be sufficient under normal conditions no unscheduled filter changes due to significantly high dust concentrations The Filter Tape Counter func tion allows for monitoring the current number of filter tape changes as well as configur ing alarm thresholds which remind the user of upcoming changes An inspection of the sensors for ambient temperature and ambient pressure shall be carried out every three months according to the manufacturer s specifications A flow rate check must be performed every three months according to the manufac turer s specifications The system s leak tightness shall be inspected every three months according to the manufacturer s specifications The external pump exhaust filter shall be exchanged every six months As part of an annual basic maintenance the carbon vanes of the vacuum pump shall be exchanged and the SHARP optics module shall be cleaned once a year The cleaning of the SHARP optics module is ideally performed by an experienced service technician Furthermore it is recommended to carry out a yearly inspection and if re qu
252. articulate matter is 25 7 6 5 Assessment The candidate systems fulfil the requirements on data quality of ambient air quality meas urements during the test even without application of correction factors A correction of the slope leads nevertheless to a significant improvement of the expanded measuring uncertain ty of the full data comparison Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 168 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The evaluation of the full dataset for both candidates delivers nevertheless a significant slope see Table 35 The slope for the full dataset is 1 068 with an uncertainty of the slope of merely 0 013 The 2006 UK Equivalence Report 8 highlighted that this was a flaw in the mathematics re quired for equivalence as per the November 2005 version of The Guidance as it penalised instruments that were more accurate Appendix E Section 4 2 therein This same flaw is copied in the January 2010 version It is the opinion of TUV Rheinland and their UK partners that the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system for PM2 5 is indeed being penalised by the mathematics for being accurat
253. as Parameters of the calibration and analysis function measured component PMs s eisisssi enie r ee ed ect dees Deviation between reference measurement and candidate on days with a relative humidity gt 70 measured component PMos ccccceeeeeeeee Comparison candidate SN 1 with reference instrument rel humidity gt 70 all test sites measured component PMo65 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees Comparison candidate SN 2 with reference instrument rel humidity gt 70 all test sites measured component PMo5 0 csesseseseeeesesseseeees Results of flow rate GNOCKS iiscsvioinienicciveeitedinnisaneada tivsded anbelsdiaeidadeuetinedeaeabees 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 9 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 31 Parameters for flow measurement 24 h average SN 1 field 008 140 Table 32 Parameters for flow measurement 24 h average SN 2 field 006 140 Table 33 Results Of the tightness CHECK ccisiccissoiictdevtinvel sscl esi eictiasatniniedebeateeieees 142 Table 34 Uncertainty between systems under test Up for candidates SN 1 and SN 2 measured Component PMas
254. as before basing on the minimum requirements stated in VDI 4202 Part 1 of 2002 i e using the reference values Bo B and Bz The performance of the test points 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 13 and 5 3 18 is omitted as they are not relevant for particulate measuring devices Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 101 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 2 Repeatability standard deviation at zero point The repeatability standard deviation at zero point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 in the certification range according to Table 1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 In case of deviating certification ranges the repeatability standard deviation at zero point shall not exceed 2 of the upper limit of this certification range Note This item cannot be evaluated according to the current versions of Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 and VDI 4203 Part 3 September 2010 when testing particulate meas uring systems due to the fact that a minimum requirement has not been defined By resolu tion of the comp
255. ase Log Cae RG 0 PATCH gy mpi CREEL TTI g guppi EN EEE Eut Bone ETET Fad Bast abe POE Sek aet PPh EE E EAA a E i L E ELLS P Eba i EE EE Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content 3 28 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions ee Clie lac et i mF het i PS Choose Field Data The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 Wi hiv A a E PEPE Concentrations The Concentrations screen
256. asuring range of 0 10 000 g m is set by default It is possible to adjust other measuring ranges The upper limit of the measuring range of the measuring system is greater than the respective upper limit of the certification range Negative measured signals are dis played directly on the AMS and are transmitted correctly via the respec tive signal outputs of the measuring system All instrument parameters are pro tected against loss through buffering After the power supply has returned the measuring device goes back to failure free operational condition and resumes measurement However at least the first 12 h worth of data after voltage returns shall be discarded since the system needs an equilibra tion phase after restart until the BETA detector adjusts to ambient condi tions The measuring systems can be ex tensively monitored and operated from an external PC via modem or router In principle all necessary operations for performing a functional check can be monitored directly on the system or via telemetric remote control The maintenance interval is defined by the necessary maintenance proce dures and has been set to 1 month TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 21 of 424 Scientific
257. at reference value B caused by normal changes in the mains voltage in the interval 230 15 20 V shall not exceed Bo 6 2 Equipment Adjustable isolating transformer and span foil set for testing the reference point 6 3 Performance of test In order to test the dependence of the measured signals on supply voltage the voltage was reduced from 230 V to 210 V and then increased with an intermediate step of 230 V to 245 V The reference point test comprised a check of the mass coefficient in order to test the stabil ity of the sensitivity of both candidates SN 1 and SN 2 Since the AMS is not intended for mobile application a separate check of the dependence of the measured signals on the mains frequency was omitted 6 4 Evaluation The percentage change of the determined measured values for the mass coefficient was ex amined at each voltage step in relation to the default value at 230 V It should be noted that concentration values could not be simulated by checking the mass coefficient It was therefore not possible to examine the range of B4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 112 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 212098
258. ate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 185 of 424 Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 4 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in g m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 No Date SN 1 SN 2 Remark Test site PM2 5 PM2 5 m l m 91 8 22 2011 10 9 10 8 19 7 19 3 55 8 12 4 11 8 Bornheim Summer 92 8 23 2011 19 2 19 1 29 9 30 1 63 7 23 0 20 5 93 8 24 2011 8 7 7 4 16 9 16 7 41 9 6 2 5 7 94 8 25 2011 11 5 12 1 18 8 18 6 63 4 11 4 9 2 95 8 26 2011 4 9 5 5 10 7 10 7 48 8 5 1 4 4 96 8 27 2011 2 1 1 9 97 8 28 2011 Fi 7 6 2 9 3 4 98 8 29 2011 5 9 6 2 11 4 11 5 53 0 6 1 5 6 99 8 30 2011 9 1 8 1 17 1 16 6 51 1 9 3 8 0 100 8 31 2011 14 5 13 9 26 0 23 6 57 2 14 5 14 2 101 9 1 2011 17 7 18 2 27 5 26 1 66 9 14 3 15 1 102 9 2 2011 14 9 15 0 25 1 24 1 60 6 11 7 12 0 103 9 3 2011 14 1 14 3 104 9 4 2011 8 2 8 0 12 7 12 1 65 3 6 1 9 9 105 9 5 2011 4 8 5 0 9 2 9 1 53 8 3 4 2 8 106 9 6 2011 5 2 5 6 11 1 10 6 49 8 2 9 3 3 107 9 7 2011 6 1 5 8 12 5 13 2 46 1 5 5 6 0 108 9 8 2011 3 0 3 3 109 9 9 2011 6 8 7A 12 1 11 8 57 9 6 2 6 5 110 9 10 2011 7 6 8 1 111 9 11 2011 5 7 55 9 4 9 3 59 5 4 9 5 5 112 9 12 2011 5 2 6 1 11 6 11 6 48 5 3 6 4 5 113 9 13 2011 6 3 7 2 16 3 16 8 40 6 4 4 6 0 114 9 14 2011 6 7 7 2 15 3 15 6 44 9 4 8 7 4 115 9 15 2011 11 1 12 2 24 3 24 9 47 4 9 9 10 3
259. ature thermistor Figure 7 12 Equipment Required Thermistor assembly Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor assembly from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Snap the new thermistor into the AMB TEMP connector Thermistor Figure 7 12 Replacing the Thermistor 1 0 Expansion Board Use the following procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Optional Figure 7 13 Replacement Pment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figur
260. autions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Remove left side panel 2 From the main menu choose Instrument Controls gt Filter Tape Control gt Manual gt Bench s Press e 3 Loosen both reel nuts on tape spindler Remove used filter tape and empty tape spool from tape spindles 4 Insert new filter tape on left tape spindle and tighten reel nut 5 Insert new blank pick up spool on right tape spindle 6 Route tape according to Figure 5 5 7 Attach end of tape to blank tape spool on right tape spindle with 2 inch of tape 8 Turn blank tape spool until there is two complete wrappings of tape 9 Tighten right reel nut From Filter Tape Control gt Manual gt choose Tape and press to MOVE tape 10 From the main menu choose Alarms gt Instrument Alarms to verify that there are no filter tape alarms 11 Replace left side cover Model 50302 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 7 Preventive Maintenance Greasing the Cam Greasing the Cam External Pump Exhaust Filter A 5 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 5 5 Replacing the Filter Tape Use the following procedure to grease the cam Equipment Required Dow Corning Molykote G N 1 Apply metal assembly paste around the parameter of the cam It is recommended to replace the external pump exhaust filter every six months On an annual basis remove top plate of optics and vacuum out optic chamber per the following procedure or send it for service and
261. ay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed amp Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 65 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for ASCII Responses Format Specifier for Binary Responses B 66 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok The erec lrec and srec layouts contain the following e A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for parsing the fields from an ASCII erec response Parameters are separa
262. ayout layout changed indicator B 59 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 44 list din Lists current selection for digital inputs B 64 list dout Lists current selection for digital outputs B 64 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 29 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 29 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 29 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 29 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 64 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 64 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 64 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page list var log Reports a list of datalogging index numbers and variables B 64 Ir Reports the last Irec stored B 29 Irec Reports maximum number of Irecs B 29 Irec format Reports sets output format for Irecs ASCII or binary B 30 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 31 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of Irecs that can be stored B 31 Irec per Reports sets Irec logging period B 31 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for lrecs B 32 malloc srec Reports sets memory allocation for srecs B 32 mass Reports the presence of mass B 26 mass coef Reports sets the curr
263. be omitted A special adapter for connecting an external flow measuring instrument is mounted to the in let in order to check the leak tightness of the measuring system The leak test adapter pro duces a high vacuum in the system The leak tightness of the measuring system can be evaluated by comparing the flow rate measured by the system at high vacuum and the flow rate at the inlet external flow measuring instrument If the difference exceeds the manu facturer s specification of 420 ml min approx 2 5 of the nominal flow rate the system shall be tested for leaks 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 48 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 18 Leak test adapter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 3 contains a list of important technical data of the ambient air
264. be set to 1 500 ug Filter Tape Next Time this should have a start date Filter Tape Period should be set to 8 hours for PM2 s5and PMoo U S EPA applications may adjust this value as high as 24 hours for PMio only However 8 hours is recommended for consistent performance Volumetric Conditions should be set to ACT for both Temp and Press Lrecs and Srecs should be chosen for datalogging and all parameters should be selected in the order they appear from Concentrations to Other Measurements Default Lrecs are Thermo Fisher Scientific Data Content Shutdown Important Tips Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Data Content set to 60 minute logging with 30 memory and Srecs are 5 minute logging with 70 memory allocated If there are any changes be sure to Commit Content b From the Main Menu choose Service Under Service Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A m Check Calibrate Ambient Temperature Nephelometer Temperature and Flow Temperature Check Calibrate Nephelometer Ambient RH ne ii iii Check Calibrate Barometric Pressure Span iv Check Calibrate Flow Calibration v Perform a Beta Auto Detector Calibration 30 minutes Perform a Mass Foil Calibration factory calibrated me vi vii Mass Coefficients are set at the factory viii Perform a Nephe
265. between pump intake and the vacuum port on rear panel and include the push to connect T fitting with the 0 040 thru hole on the T side in this line b From the valve assembly that is now attached to the rear panel connect the threaded fitting to the pump exhaust Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 7 Model 5014i to 5030i Upgrade Procedures SHARP External Valve Installation c Connect the 3 8 tubing with inline HEPA filter to the available port Port 1 on the external valve assembly using the available push connect fitting Note This step can also be delayed until after the zero air delivery tube and T fitting are installed at the sample intake a d At the sample inlet attach the stainless steel T fitting to the sample downtube and tighten the swagelok fitting with Teflon ferrules do not overtighten these ferrules e Snake the green vacuum tubing downwards towards the rear valve assembly and attach to Port 1 of the valve If this is a field installation proper water sealants should be used to avoid any leakage into the instrument Figure 10 8 Plumbing Diagram 10 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50141 to 50301 Upgrade Procedures SHARP Optics Assembly Installation SHARP Optics Use the following procedure for SHARP external valve installation Assembly Installation 1 Remove the SHARP Optics Assembly port protection caps and plugs 2
266. bly Cover Model Label Use the following procedure for model label change Change 1 Remove the 50147 label and replace with the new 50302 SHARP Label on the front panel Front Panel in accordance with Figure 10 13 below FRONT FRAME LOWER FIXING HOLE LABEL REFERENCE 101614 00 JIG Figure 10 13 Front Panel Label Replacement Power On Upgrade is complete Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts Ifa period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall i
267. cal systems with the serial numbers System 1 SN 1 System 2 SN 2 The following performance criteria were tested in the field e Comparability of the candidates according to the Guide Demonstration of Equiva lence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods e Comparability of the candidates with the reference methods according to the Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods Calibratability analytical function Reproducibility Zero drift and sensitivity Dependence of the measured values on sample humidity Maintenance interval Availability Constancy of sample volumetric flow Overall uncertainty of the test candidates The following auxiliary devices were used during the field test e Measuring cabinet provided by T V Rheinland air conditioned to approx 20 C e Measuring cabinet for low volume samplers provided by DEFRA UK air conditioned to approx 20 C e Weather station WS 500 manufactured by ELV Elektronik AG for use in Germany and MK III Series manufactured by Rainwise US for use in the UK for the determi nation of meteorological characteristics such as air temperature air pressure air hu midity wind velocity wind direction and precipitation 2 reference samplers LVS3 for PM25 in accordance with point 5 1 gas meter dry 1 mass flow meter Model 4303 manufactured by TSI 1 mass flow meter type BIOS volumeter manufactured by BIOS for use in the UK 1 mass flow meter type T
268. ce mode The main menu for operating the measuring system can be reached by pressing Ca This button always leads to the previous sub menu The four keys directly below the LCD display are programmable soft keys by default the keys lead to the sub menus RANGE AVG DIAGS and ALARM The sub menu Range allows for setting the unit the concentration values are to be output in and adjusting standard as well as customised measuring ranges In the sub menu Integration Time it is possible to adjust the averaging period of the radio metric measurement within the range 15 60 min by default set to 20 min The sub menu 24 Hour Average allows the user to define the start time of the 24 hour av eraging period of the concentration measurement The Calibration Factors sub menu displays the calibration factors adjusted in the measuring system as well as those determined during manual and or automatic calibrations It is also possible to adjust them using this menu The Instrument Controls sub menu may be selected to control various instrument opera tional parameters It allows for parameterising the flow rate turning the pump on and off configuring the sample heater DHS adjusting filter tape control operations moving the tape manually adjusting a reliable mass limit gt during test 1500 ug setting a time and interval for the next filter tape change etc determining volumetric conditi
269. ce mode for improving the calibration of mass measurement 9 Implementation of the Infinite Mass Accumu lation Method 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 52 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F V01 00 01 197 1 Release of Model 5030i code Installed during field 2 Integration time variable for mass and con test centration determination range 15 60 min added 3 Necessary code adjustments for the amplifi er due to the change from batteries to ca pacitor for buffering high voltage supply for up to 2 h during power outages 4 Increase of filter tape movements per roll by approx 50 5 Change of filter tape after three failed at tempts no longer possible 6 Elimination of minor bugs V01 00 02 199 1 Calibration coefficient is frozen at c BETA Not installed lt 2 5 g m and or c NEPH lt 1 yg m in stead of c BETA lt 2 5 ug m and or c SHARP lt 1 g m 2 Flow temp replaced by sample temp in Bay ern Hessen protocol 3 Increase of accuracy of diag volts com mand V01 00 03 225 1 Modification of key variables and soft keys Installed during la for USB keypa
270. cecsceseeteeteteseeteeeeseeee 10 3 Figure 10 3 Filter Tape Installation PathWay 0 ccccccceceesceteeesteteseseees 10 4 Figure 10 4 Connecting Connection Bracket Wiring to Measurement Interface ate Fe 2 eRe eae RRS ne E EE E nae aM Pen E 10 5 Figure 10 5 Radius Tube Adapter Install 0 ceceesesceteesesteneseseees 10 6 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 10 6 Radius Tube Adapter Alignment Check ccc 10 6 Figure 10 7 Rear Valve Assembly Installation 0 ccccccececcscecesesesteteseseees 10 7 Figure 10 8 Plumbing Diagram 0 0 cecccccccc cece cesses eeeseeseseesesteeeneeeeeseeees 10 8 Figure 10 9 Optics Installation ceceeseesseceseessesseeseeseeseeeseeseeseseeseneeneeees 10 9 Figure 10 10 Connecting the Optics to the Optics Connector 0 0 10 9 Figure 10 11 Upgrading 50307 Heater Assembly c cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 10 Figure 10 12 Connecting Heater to Optics Assembly Cover ccee 10 11 Figure 10 13 Front Panel Label Replacement ccceccceceesceteeseees 10 11 Figure B 1 Flags Field ccunseetensiec anew Sawees ne ana See nes B 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xxi Figures xxii Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 50307 Specifications oo c ccccccccccccscscscesestesesteseetesesteseeseees 1 8 Table 2 1 Pressure Units COnVErSsiON ccccccccsessestese
271. ceive diag volt mib 3 3 3 3 5 0 7 2 5 0 7 flow This command reports the current sample flow The following example reports that the sample flow is 16 69 LPM Send sample flow Receive sample flow 16 69 LPM flow pres This command reports the current flow pressure for the detector in mmHg The following example reports that the flow pressure is 24 1 mmHg Send flow pres Receive flow pres 24 1 mmHg flow temp This command reports the current flow temperature for the detector in degrees C The following example reports that the flow temperature is 22 3 C Send flow temp Receive flow temp 22 3 deg io bd This command reports the presence of the I O expansion board yes no The following example reports the I O expansion board is present yes Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics B 26 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send io bd Receive io bd yes mass This command reports the presence of mass The following example reports that the mass is 0 1 mg m Send mass Receive mass 0 100E 00 neph bkg This command reports the current nephelometer background values stored on the nephelometer interface board The following example reports the nephelometer auto ranging background values Send neph bkg Receive neph bkg1 0 00272 0 00272 0 01099 0 04351 0 17430 0 65535 neph mode This command reports the current operating mode of the nephelometer The followi
272. cements ic25 eel hind ite ermal aoe 7 41 LCD Module Replacement lt cacste 8 6 Gliese Ge cad 7 42 Removing the SHARP Optics Covet siic isascvtsesiccsssgndeciontderaentavess 7 44 External Solenoid Valve Replacement lt cissie ccestesecccnscestca cesses 7 45 SHARP RH Temp Sensor Replacement ssisecisciussiaaicesltacctenercaie 7 46 SHARP Interface Board Replacement ioc iteccascect sezavecndes a sonteteatete 7 47 Delrin Nut Replacements iesse cet REI a 7 49 Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Replacement sssssssseseseeseeeeeeeeeese 7 51 Case Cable Repl cemient nnmnnn ia aie 7 52 External Zeroing Filter eeeeeseeeseseseseeeseseseeesrsrsesrsrsrsrertrtrererrerererseses 7 53 Service OC ALIO MS nn nei a cpt a a A R E 7 54 Chapter 8 System Description ssscsssssccssscsssssessssceesseesssscnesseecsessnessesenessnesseecersanesseees 8 1 TLE wy ae ree teu tcp vcesrtca sais sonne vast Cimireteyeediat tnt cusostnseenatnianguatatt i iansatie 8 1 Nephelometer Assembly 2 c0 gcc tisercstnwe jedi acca tiactiiagiecndihe 8 4 Primary Measurement Head 5 ccdedsictstetoicacsensat calens tieedeasveh anedeheneahvoes 8 4 Detector AMPUTET nats sac ots eden oe ce cae aeiee eon EE E cote 8 4 Cam Photo Interrupt Board gases eat he tesaen nua eee 8 4 Counter Wheel Interrupt Board Assembly ee eeeeseeecreeteeeeneeeeeees 8 4 Proportional Valves orasini senarai sheans 8 4 Cam MOO a oreen E EEE E EATE D O A e 8 4 EE OI E E 8 4 Pressure Board arsson erpen oann n a
273. cient time to equilibrate to room temperature due to temperature variations during shipping and or storage A 2 Following a sufficient equilibration period connect the power cord to the rear of the instrument and to a properly grounded power supply Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Note If the Model 50307 turns ON at this point set the power switch to the OFF position and then proceed A 3 Connect the pump intake to the vacuum port mounted on the rear panel of the instrument using the 3 8 inch vacuum tubing assembly with the plastic T fitting Connect the pump exhaust tube to Port 2 on the 3 way solenoid on the rear panel 4 Connect Port 1 of the rear panel 3 way solenoid to 3 8 inch compression fitting on the 5 8 inch x 3 8 inch reducing T fitting using the 3 8 inch vacuum tubing assembly with HEPA filter 5 Connect the vacuum pump power cord to the white circular grounded power supply labeled PUMP on the rear panel of the instrument 6 Connect the 4 pin Temperature RH cable to the 4 pin connector labeled RH TEMP on the rear of the monitor 7 Be sure that the pressure sensor calibration port toggle switches on the rear panel are pushed outward and away from the barbed Delta P 8 Set monitor power switch to the ON position During startup the Series splash screen will be shown followed by a mechanical filter tape change and a cycling of
274. cientific Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration 6 Press to return to the previous screen 7 Press to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use t until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press _ to scroll to a channel and press J 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press ce The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting 5 Press a gt to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other in
275. cisely Right Page 189 of 424 Annex 5 Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 8 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in pg m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 No Date Ratio SN 1 SN 2 Remark Test site PM2 5 PM10 PM2 5 PM2 5 m gt m 211 2 21 2012 9 9 10 5 16 3 17 4 60 4 11 6 11 0 Bornheim Winter 212 2 22 2012 13 3 14 4 20 8 22 2 64 5 15 4 16 0 213 2 23 2012 8 3 8 6 9 1 10 2 87 3 11 6 8 6 214 2 24 2012 12 1 11 6 14 7 14 9 80 1 13 0 12 3 215 2 25 2012 15 7 14 5 216 2 26 2012 26 5 26 4 38 6 39 6 67 7 29 3 27 6 217 2 27 2012 19 6 18 9 26 0 25 6 74 6 20 6 17 7 218 2 28 2012 18 7 16 0 21 8 21 7 79 8 16 1 16 0 219 2 29 2012 27 6 26 5 34 3 33 7 79 5 20 7 21 8 220 3 1 2012 19 6 18 0 29 1 29 8 63 7 18 8 17 3 221 3 2 2012 15 9 13 3 18 9 18 0 78 8 12 9 13 3 222 3 3 2012 23 4 21 1 223 3 4 2012 31 5 30 0 42 8 41 3 73 2 26 8 24 1 224 3 5 2012 6 1 4 6 8 1 TA 70 6 5 8 6 1 225 3 6 2012 15 2 12 8 21 5 20 5 66 7 14 6 15 0 226 3 7 2012 15 5 14 5 24 8 22 4 63 4 17 1 15 3 227 7 17 2012 4 2 4 5 8 5 8 9 50 1 2 6 6 9 Teddington Summer 228 7 18 2012 3 8 4 2 8 9 9 4 44 2 2 8 9 9 229 7 19 2012 4 6 4 6 9 1 8 9 51 2 4 9 3 8 230 7 20 2012 5 1 49 10 3 10 8 47 7 4 8 6 4 231 7 21 2012 5 8 6 1 10 9 10 7 55 0 ZT 7A 232 7 22 2012 7A 6 8 10 6 10 6 65 3 7 7 8 1 233 7 23 2012 8 5 8 8 12 7 12 8 67 8 10 9 9 4 234 7 24 2012 11 4 11 5 17 7 17 7 64 6 11
276. cked for tightness Leakage shall not ex ceed 1 of the sample volume sucked 6 2 Equipment The test required an adapter for tightness check and a mass flow meter 6 3 Performance of test The Model 50301 SHARP can perform a tightness check using an adapter For testing the leak tightness the instrument is switched to service mode First an external flow meter is installed at the inlet followed by a recording of the flow rates indicated on the instrument itself and by the external measurement as well as of the displayed vacuum VAC in mmHg The instrument flow rate is compared with the flow rate of the external flow meter and adjusted Then the tightness check adapter is inserted into the inlet as connection be tween inlet and external flow meter The adapter creates a significantly higher vacuum in the instrument for it reduces the size of the air sampling opening The flow rates indicated by the instrument and by the external flow meter are compared again Ideally i e at absolute tight ness there should be no difference between both flow rates The manufacturer specifies a maximum permissible difference of 0 42 I min 2 5 of the flow rate If greater deviations were to be found a leak test must be performed taking special care of checking the many fit tings above the radiometric measuring head If the cause cannot be found the manufacturer should be contacted The tightness check must only be performed with the tightness check
277. ckseite des Deckblatts und der folgenden Anlage mit insgesamt 33 Seiten Registrierungsnummer der Urkunde D PL 11120 02 00 Im Auftrag PIA ATIN Berlin 23 01 2013 Andrea Valbuena Abteilungsleiterin Siehe Hinweise auf der R ckseite 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 176 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH Standort Berlin Standort Frankfurt am Main Standort Braunschweig Spittelmarkt 10 Gartenstra e 6 Bundesallee 100 10117 Berlin 60594 Frankfurt am Main 38116 Braunschweig Die auszugsweise Ver ffentlichung der Akkreditierungsurkunde bedarf der vorherigen schriftlichen Zustimmung der Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH DAkkS Ausgenommen davon ist die separate Weiterverbreitung des Deckblattes durch die umseitig genannte Konformitatsbewertungsstelle in unveranderter Form Es darf nicht der Anschein erweckt werden dass sich die Akkreditierung auch auf Bereiche erstreckt die ber den durch die DAkkS best tigten Akkreditierungsbereich hinausgehen Die Akkreditierung erfolgte gem des Gesetzes ber die Akkreditierungsstelle AkkStelleG vom 31 Juli 2009 BGBI S 2625 sowie
278. company Thermo Fisher Page 79 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 3 Functional check If the operation or the functional check of the measuring system requires particular in struments they shall be considered as part of the measuring system and be applied in the corresponding sub tests and included in the assessment Test gas units included in the measuring system shall indicate their operational readi ness to the measuring system by a status signal and shall provide direct as well as re mote control via the measuring system 6 2 Equipment Manual zero filter and span foil set 6 3 Performance of test The system status is constantly monitored and problems are indicated by a series of different warning messages Parameters which are relevant for a proper functioning of the measuring system e g NEPH zero adjustment flow rates pump vacuum can also be reviewed on the instrument itself and or recorded continuously by a data logger Furthermore it is possible to check the zero point of the measuring system externally For this a zero filter is installed at the device inlet The use of this filter allows the provision of particle free air During the test the position of the zero point was determined approx every 4 weeks using a zero filter In order to check the stability of the beta measurement the mass transfer standard foil set is required This set co
279. connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal 7 22 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Output Testing 10 EXPANSION E a Current Outputs Analog Voltage Inputs Analog Voltage Outputs ___ Figure 7 11 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 1 2 2 3 3
280. creen displays the current nephelometer source current value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 50 to 70 mA If the LED current reading goes beyond 3 70 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt LED Current ERE Wi moi PS PHP L Min and Max LED Source The Minimum LED Source Current alarm limit screen is used to change Current Limits the minimum LED source current alarm limit The minimum and maximum LED Source Current screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt LED Current gt Min or Max Reference Detector The Reference Detector Voltage screen displays the current nephelometer Voltage reference detector voltage value and the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range 350 to 2000 mV If the reference detector voltage reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu There is no set mode for this value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt Ref Det Volt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Ala
281. d also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100 mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10 V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Current Outputs Optional Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs 8 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the current outputs The optional I O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum
282. d as refer ence point In case of deviating certification ranges the repeatability standard deviation at refer ence point shall not exceed 2 of the upper limit of this certification range In this case a value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of this certification range shall be used as reference point Note By resolution of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 104 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 4 Linearity lack of fit The analytical function describing the relationship between the output signal and the value of the air quality characteristic shall be linear Reliable linearity is given if deviations of the group averages of measured values about the calibration function meet the requirements of Table 2 of in the certification range according to Table 1 of St
283. d concentrations that becomes a dynamic correction factor for the real time nephelometer and the product of this correction factor and nephelometer becomes the SHARP Monitor concentrations Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 50303 Table 1 1 Model 50307 Specifications Safety Electrical Designations Designed to meet CE EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 A3 2003 EN 61010 1 UL 61010 1 2004 CSA C22 2 No 61010 1 2004 FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B Source and Detector IR LED 6mW 880 nm Silicon Hybrid Amplifier Photodetector B Source Carbon 14 lt 3 7 MBq lt 100 uCi Sealed Source Device Proportional Radiation Detector Standard System Configuration Menu driven software for user interaction via 320 x 420 pixels graphics display Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Connecting and Interface Cables and Vacuum Pump 3 foot heated sample tube Ambient T RH Assembly Consumables for average first year s operation ambient iPort Software for Local or Remote Communication Sample Heater 3 foot insulated heater tube Three Modes of Heater Control OFF Heater is turned off in non condensing environment TEMP fixed sample temperature RH Dynamic Heating of sample at set sample RH threshold e g 50 RH Instrument Performance 16 67 l min 1s stable conditions Measurement Range 0 to 1 0 2 0 3 0 5 0 10 0 mg m 0 to 100
284. d support boratory test part 2 Alarms added to the list of digital outputs 2 as well as the 3 Additional parameters for recording added additional campaign T i Bornheim Sum 4 Changes to timing procedure after filter ex mer 2013 change no calculations in the first 15 min following pump stop 5 Update of algorithms for calculating ambient temperature ambient humidity and flow temperature in order to provide a more pre cise sample humidity value sample rH 6 Recording of amplification and mode for NEPH added 7 Update of pressure calculations smoothing in order to improve flow control 8 Update of heating control PID control opti mised V02 00 00 232 1 Modification to new i series processor board Not installed exam 110570 ined during regular 2 Menu navigation Servise Pres Vacuum Cal production audit ibration Vac Flow changed 3 Diagnostics Voltages detector Board menu no longer locks up 4 Title line on Calibration factors Neph BKG Values restore Prev Values verschoben 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 53 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 5 range Clink comma
285. der Verordnung EG Nr 765 2008 des Europ ischen Parlaments und des Rates vom 9 Juli 2008 Uber die Vorschriften fiir die Akkreditierung und Marktiiberwachung im Zusammenhang mit der Vermarktung von Produkten Abl L 218 vom 9 Juli 2008 S 30 Die DAkkS ist Unterzeichnerin der Multilateralen Abkommen zur gegenseitigen Anerkennung der European co operation for Accreditation EA des International Accreditation Forum IAF und der International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation ILAC Die Unterzeichner dieser Abkommen erkennen ihre Akkreditierungen gegenseitig an Der aktuelle Stand der Mitgliedschaft kann folgenden Webseiten entnommen werden EA www european accreditation org ILAC www ilac org IAF www iaf nu 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland Luftreinhaltun 3 j Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 177 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 1 Detection limit Page 1 of 1 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific Type Model 50301 SHARP Standards ZP Zero filter Serial No SN 1 SN2 Date Measured values g m3 Date Measured values ug m Sn 1 2 11 13 2012 11 13 2012 11 14 2012 E 11 14 2012 11 15 2012 11 15 2012 11 16 2012 11 16 2012 11 17 2012 11 17 2012 11
286. ditions Not all of the I O available in the instrument are brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital input e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument Action Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Volumetric Conditions DH pikari Ce a E S a EA Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Channel output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all Allow Over Under Range 3 48 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and in
287. dius Tube Mounting bracket screws 2 Slide back bracket downwards 3 Slowly remove the existing Radius Face Seal by pulling straight up with a twisting action 4 Slowly insert the Radius Tube Adapter onto the Radius Tube and push down with a slight twist until it is seated 5 Tighten the radius tube mounting bracket screws as shown in Figure 10 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 5 Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Radius Tube Adapter Installation Figure 10 5 Radius Tube Adapter Install 6 Reassemble the two covers of the instrument in reverse order and check alignment of radius tube adapter through the hole in the cover as shown in Figure 10 6 Be sure to remove the old dust cover cap and the large plastic hole cover Figure 10 6 Radius Tube Adapter Alignment Check 10 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures SHARP External Valve Installation SHARP External Use the following procedure for SHARP external valve installation Valve Installation 1 Attach the SHARP External Valve Assembly which includes the to the Rear Panel using the captive hardware on bracket and attach the 3 pin connector to the rear panel labeled valve Figure 10 7 Figure 10 7 Rear Valve Assembly Installation 2 Follow the following plumbing procedure in accordance with Figure 10 8 below a Attach the 3 8 vacuum tubing
288. dividual current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Eike EE EE The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 5 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt Allow Over Under Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions ERED CH perm WH mid Pepi L Pi AG Lf bi Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Action output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to adjust for the selected output channel Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 ERE CH Pm Tit Wi mid PS PHP L Pi AG Lb i Select Range The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog outp
289. docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Requirements on measuring systems for particulate air pollutants Page 25 of 424 filled 5 4 1 General Equivalency of the sampling system Reproducibility of the sampling systems Calibration 5 4 5 Cross sensitivity 5 4 6 Averaging effect Test according to the minimum requirement stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Furthermore the particle mass concentration shall be related to a defined volume The equivalency to the refer ence method according to EN 12341 T2 shall be demon strated This shall be demonstrated in the field test for two identical systems according to EN 12341 T2 The systems under test shall be calibrated in the field test by comparison measurements with the reference method ac cording to EN 12341 and EN 14907 Here the relation ship between the output signal and the gravimetrically deter mined reference concentration shall the determined as a steady function Shall not exceed 10 of the limit value The measuring system shall al low for formation of 24 h aver ages The time of the sum of all filter changes within
290. ducibility at B4 e U Uncertainty e Bi 25 g m for PM25 e Sp Standard deviation from paired measurements e n No of paired measurements e tno 95 Students factor at confidence level of 95 e Xij Measured signal of system 1 e g SN 1 at i concentration e Xj Measured signal of system 2 e g SN 2 at i concentration 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 116 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment The reproducibility for PM2 5 was 10 for the complete dataset of the field test Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results The test results are summarised in Table 23 The graphical representation for PM25 is shown in Figure 41 to Figure 45 Note The determined uncertainties are applied to reference value B for each test site Table 23 Concentration averages standard deviation uncertainty range and reproducibility in the field measured component PM25 Test site No of ae SN 1 ver 20 4 20 3 0 827 2 007 1 66 winter Bornheim 91 11 8 11 7 11 7 1 354 1 986 2 69 summer Bornheim 49 21 3 21 3 21 3 1 033 2 010 2 08 12 winter a 0 956 2 009
291. duduspoactuieadhactadedetatateasetadsroatanss 4 12 Nephelometer Calibration 2i acihe danviailineniwene denies 4 13 Nephelomicter RIA siesta scored teats she EE 4 13 Nephelometer I emiperattret ciia eee ee eh ae 4 13 Nephelometer Source Levelt nt 002 cscg taste ea etc gd 4 14 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance s ssssssssssssssssssssesssessseeesnssneseesesssenssnsaneseens 5 1 Sate ty Precast ee ea us teu anaes act arcu aucun EE 5 1 Replacement Parts teccctir siae oa Jesse Geant hut RIE 5 2 Cleaning the Outside Casen issuri atin steak et area loin Sette 5 2 Cleaning the Tiletsii tiso sosirii Peles tesel att Ghee karat ahateenactet 5 2 U S EPA PM ig Valet x aiaiicansguesviagdecnduandieshauniasddeasncedvasticntvendany aeons 5 2 European PMio PM3s5 Ti ets sf acee es secest ctvacncc tls aic rence sewlegned econ 5 3 Cyclone Wiainite manic 2a acs ties ceed eee Ge eee cide oes eet eae ce 5 4 Heaterand Sample W uber 0c tea enii 5 5 Weather Proofingssanna ena ieee iter tte RRs 5 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning ct 45istcccecnce tuto ol cata adehuae can cares ncnh 5 5 Pump Rebuilding ycj cciecncitiea cies screed pateedtitiaeceleeideae bane ncees 5 6 bedk Testa ste catch ct sages hve nedied Spats Mos leur ves dele aiae andi Metin eed esetet 5 6 Filter Tape Replacement s i sccuizscsecusze
292. e It is proposed that the same pragmatic approach is taken here that was previously undertaken in earlier studies The slope for the full dataset is 1 068 For this reason a slope correction of the entire dataset was performed and evaluated again with the corrected values All datasets fulfil the require ments on data quality after the correction The measurement uncertainty was improved sig nificantly only at the test sites Bornheim summer and Teddington summer a slight worsening could be observed for SN 2 see Table 38 in comparison to Table 35 The version of the Guide of January 2010 requires that when operating in networks a candidate method needs to be tested annually at a number of sites corresponding to the highest expanded uncertainty found during equivalence testing These criteria are banded in 5 steps Guide 4 point 9 9 2 Table 6 We have to bear in mind that the highest determined expanded uncertainty lies in the range 10 to 15 after the correction of the slope The respective realisation of the above mentioned requirement on on going QA QC in net works is the responsibility of the network operator or of the responsible authority of the mem ber state However TUV Rheinland and their UK partners recommend that the expanded uncertainty for the full dataset is referred to for this namely 18 0 uncorrected dataset and 12 0 dataset after slope correction which again would require an annual test at 4
293. e detector assembly the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glassed must be worn during this replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the U S NRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 pCi A The detector pre amp assembly has a power backup built in DO NOT OPEN caution handeling Backup power will dissipate after 8 hours A CAUTION The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin can damage the detector A Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Serv
294. e instrument address 14 lt STX gt ST014 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command initiates a data transfer from the instrument The Query Command instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 14 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA014 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt 14 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated with either lt CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific
295. e 36 Zero point drift SN 2 measured component PM25 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control 3 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 121 of 424 Table 25 Sensitivity drift SN 1 amp SN 2 SN1 SN2 Measured Deviation from Deviation from Measured Deviation from Deviation from Date Value previous value start value Date Value previous value start value 1 27 2011 7170 9 7178 5 5 12 2011 7194 2 E 0 3 5 12 2011 7255 4 7 19 2011 7270 6 11 14 2011 7189 0 0 3 7215 0 3 8 2012 7332 3 2 0 2 3 3 8 2012 7006 9 2 9 2 4 6 18 2012 10 19 2012 7214 0 0 2 0 6 7119 2 1 0 0 8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx s 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 122 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Span point drift PM2 5 SN 1 D e a N o ro ro A D E E a Le c gt 2 5
296. e 7 14 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Figure 7 13 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 7 28 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement lt _ 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Board Connectors Dig ital Outp ut Board Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 14 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHAR
297. e Detector Amplifier Assembly cccccccceceeeeeee 7 16 Figure 7 8 Replacing the PUM uuu cece cccecesesesceesescsteseseseeteseseseacenesesees 7 18 Figure 7 9 Replacing the Pressure Board ASS MDIY ccecccececesesceteteseeee 7 19 Figure 7 10 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly Plumbing Connection 7 20 Figure 7 11 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 0 0 cece 7 23 Figure 7 12 Replacing the Thermistor ccccccccccecesssesceteesestetesesesceteseseees 7 27 Figure 7 13 Replacing the I O Expansion Board Optional 0 0c ccecee 7 28 Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Board Connectors cccecccccccscccecsseetesestesteteeeeeeee 7 29 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board cccceeceee 7 32 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Photo Interrupt Board 0 ccc ceteeseeee 7 33 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Proportional Valve occ cecccceceestetesesesteteseseees 7 34 Figure 7 18 Replacing the Detector Assembly o oo cece cece ce teteeeteteseseees 7 36 Figure 7 19 Replacing the RTD ees osc ce eae cecseer es centers var teeters eee tents 7 37 Figure 7 20 Replacing the Transformer 7 38 Figure 7 21 Replacing the Radius Tube ou ccc cccecsceceesestetesesesteteseseees 7 39 Figure 7 22 Replacing the Ambient RH Temperature Assembly 7 41 Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 42 Figure 7 24 Removing the SHARP Optics Co
298. e PM concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg PM Min and Max Average The Minimum Average PM Concentration alarm limit screen is used to PM Concentration Limits change the minimum average PM concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum average PM concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg PM gt Min or Max DH Guided PME TY aad PME Eee EE EE 3 80 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Average SHARP Min and Max Average SHARP Concentration Limits Average Nephelometer Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Average SHARP screen displays the current average SHARP concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 10000 g m or 0 to 10 mg m If the average SHARP concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg SHARP Wi mnie The Minimum Average SHARP Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum average SHARP concentration alarm limit The minimum and
299. e Packing Material 0 00 00 ccccccecesesestetesesesteteceteseseees 2 3 Figure 2 2 Model 50307 Sampling Room Air Under Stable Conditions 2 7 Figure 2 3 Model 5030 Side View inches millimeters 0 0ccccccee 2 10 Figure 2 4 Model 50307 Top View inches millimeters 00 0cccccceee 2 11 Figure 2 5 Model 50307 Vertical View 0 ccc cececeesceteesesteteseseeteteseseees 2 12 Figure 2 6 Heater Assembly ou ccc cece ceceteseseeceseseseeteseseseeteseseseecesesesaes 2 14 Figure 2 7 Rear Panel Plumbing Schematic 0 0 ccccccccccccesestesesteeeteeeeeeees 2 16 Figure 2 8 O Terminal Board Views cccccccscsccscssestesesteseeteseseseeeseeseeees 2 18 Figure 2 9 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connectol ccc ccccccccccceteseetesesteeeeeeee 2 19 Figure 2 10 D O Terminal Board ViQWS ccccccccccsccestesestesestesestesteeseeseeees 2 20 Figure 2 11 25 Pin Terminal Board ViGWS c ccccccceccsescetesesesteteseseeteteseseees 2 21 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Dis Ways ser ecce ces vente eto entanet velar de cuenta eer 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel PUSNDUtIONS ccc cecescseeteesesestesesesesteeseseees 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware ccccecccescsescetetesesteteseseees 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector 3 12 Figure 3 5 Common Fags ieu sesso ee ss a ae 3 31 Figure 3 6 Detector A Flags cccccccccccecesesesesestesesesesteesesesteesssesteeseseaes 3 31
300. e SHARP coefficient is 1 05 Send coef sharp Receive coef sharp 1 050 set coef sharp value This command sets the SHARP coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the SHARP coefficient to 1 04 Send set coef sharp 1 04 Receive set coef sharp 1 04 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration flow pres span This command reports the flow pressure span recorded at the time of calibration The following example reports that the flow span is 1 2 Send flow pres span Receive flow pres span 1 200 set flow pres span value This command sets the flow pressure span to value where value is a floating point representation of the pressure span specified at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for flow pressure to 1 5 Send set flow pres span 1 5 Receive set flow pres span 1 5 ok flow pres offset This command reports the flow pressure offset for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the flow pressure offset is 3 0 Send flow pres offset Receive flow pres offset 3 0 flow span This command reports the current flow span at the time of calibration The following example reports that the flow at calibration is 1 00 Send flow span Receive flow span 1 000 set flow span value This command sets the c
301. e This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration prek ee meh dt Erm PPP L mie LG ae Auto Flow Calibration The Auto Flow Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the correct flow rate The span value is automatically calculated e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Auto ERED aks PP Tite 7 METEEN Lid mith a mii Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 91 Operation Service Menu Manual Flow Calibration The Manual Flow Calibration screen allows the user to view and incrementally set the flow sensor calibration span factor e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Flow Calibration gt Manual Mass Calibration The Mass Calibration submenu is used to view and set the mass calibration point The mass calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration Thermal Mass Coefficient The Thermal Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to view and set the thermal coefficient using manual calibration mode Factory set e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Thermal Coefficient 3 92 Model 50307 SHA
302. e a letter was detected data not valid when the value should be numeric Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode feature not enabled 1 0 expansion board is not detected flags no alarm active No measurement alarms are active The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is important that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Table B 2 lists the 50307 C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page 1 Simulates pressing soft key 1 pushbutton B 44 2 Simulates pressing soft key 2 pushbutton B 44 3 Simulates pressing soft key 3 pushbutton B 44 4 Simulates pressing soft key 4 pushbutton B 44 addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 54 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 54 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 54 addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 55 addr ntp Reports sets IP address for network time protocol server B 55 alarm alpha count Reports al
303. e case Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put excessive tension on the cables Replace the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Fuse Replacement Fuse Replacement Fan Filter Replacement A 7 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 Ifeither fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Use the following procedure to replace the fan and the fan filter Figure 7 6 Equipment Required Fan Fan filter Philips screwdriver Cable cutter for tie wrap removal Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument O
304. e current concentration units mg m or pg m The following example reports that the concentration units are set to mg m Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration B 46 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send conc unit Receive conc unit pg m3 set conc unit unit unit g m mg m This command sets the concentration units to mg m or pg m The following example sets the concentration units to mg m Send set conc unit mg m3 Receive set conc unit mg m3 ok custom range range 1 2 3 This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The following example reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 mg m Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 5 500E 00 mg m3 set custom range range value set custom 1 value set custom 2 value set custom 3 value These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in the currently selected units The following example sets the custom 1 range to 100 5 ug m Send set custom 1 100 5 ug m3 Receive set custom 1 100 5 g m3 ok filter period This command reports the number of hours to be added to filter next time for the filter tape change The following example reports that the filter period is eight hours Send filter period Receive filter period 8 HRS set filte
305. e different Run screens Menu The is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a brief explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press gt to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons _ JCs jana gt Left Right gt _ move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second o
306. e following equation to calculate the percent difference Qm Qi l D 100x If D is within 4 then the Model 5030 volumetric flow rate acceptance test has passed If the Model 5030i volumetric flow rate is slightly out of tolerance 5 the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the volumetric flow rate performance is outside this range please perform a volumetric flow calibration For more information about the volumetric flow rate calibration see the Calibration chapter The leak check of the 50307 SHARP is conducted by first measuring the volumetric flow rate at the inlet adapter Next place the factory supplied leak check adapter on top of the inlet adapter and then install the flow meter on top of the leak check adapter Compare the volumetric flow rate of the 50307 to the flow meter and calculate the difference If the difference is less than 0 80 L min 80 ml min then the leak check passes If it is greater than 80 ml min check for leaks in the system by checking the various fittings upstream of the measurement head If the source of the leak cannot be found the instrument requires service by a trained technician The nephelometer light source has been factory set to a current of approximately 65 milliamps mA Should this valve be outside a range of 60 70 mA the source current should be adjusted in the calibration menu The 5030 has an auto zero function and it is common during setup to potent
307. e is the index number of a variable in the analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the Irec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 34 Receive set sp field 1 34 ok stream per This command reports the current time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the streaming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 sec set stream per number value number value 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration Calibration B 34 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to Table B 4 The following example reports that the streaming data shall not include a time stamp Send stream time Receive stream time 0 set stream time value Thi
308. e reference This average observed flow rate from your reference meter should now be entered in the screen below Errori pri pr ey yes Enmen ni METERA Lid CH ninii Rri Taic bm iii Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 Perform the Leak Test procedure on page 5 6 to verify no leaks The Model 5030 SHARP is calibrated for mass in the factory using a series of null and span foils The mass transfer standard foil sets are available from Thermo Fisher Scientific and should be used as part of a QA Program for performing a QC check on the mass measurements This mass foil calibration procedure can be used for QC checks auditing and calibration Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Calibration Procedure 4 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The Mass Calibration submenu is used to view and set the mass calibration point The mass calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient It is recommended to perform an annual Mass Coefficient on the Model 50307 Beta Monitor e The foil sets must be kept in a clean container Do not touch the foil window with your fingers
309. e separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 155 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Criterion 4 All of the expanded uncertainties are below 25 Criterion 5 The slopes used for evaluation of the complete dataset are significantly great er than the permissible values for SN 1 and SN 2 Other The evaluation of the complete dataset for both candidates together shows that the AMS demonstrates a very good correlation with the reference method with a slope of 1 068 and an intercept of 0 103 at an expanded total uncer tainty of 18 The January 2010 version of The Guidance is ambiguous with respect to which slope and in tercept should be used to correct a candidate should it fail the test of equivalence After communication with the convenor of the EC working group which is responsible for setting up the Guide Mr Theo Hafkenscheid it was decided that the requirement of the November 2005 version of the Guidance are still valid and that the slope and intercept from the orthog onal regression of all the paired data should be used These are shaded gold and marked other in the key on the above Table 35 The 2006 UK Equivalence Report 8 highlighted that this was a flaw in the mathematics re quired for equivalence as per the November 2005 version of The Guidance as it penalised instruments that were more accurate Appendix E Section 4 2 therein This same flaw is co
310. e signal outputs of the measuring system Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 91 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 4 Failure in the mains voltage In case of malfunction of the measuring system or failure in the mains voltage for a pe riod of up to 72 h uncontrolled emission of operation and calibration gas shall be avoided The instrument parameters shall be secured by buffering against loss caused by failure in the mains voltage When mains voltage returns the instrument shall auto matically reach the operation mode and start the measurement according to the operat ing instructions 6 2 Equipment Not additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test A failure in the mains voltage was simulated and it was tested whether the instrument re mains undamaged and is ready for measurement after restart of the power supply 6 4 Evaluation Since the measuring systems need neither operation nor calibration gases an uncontrolled escape of gases is not possible In case of a failure in the mains voltage
311. eatures include RS 232 485 and Ethernet C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen ESM Protocol streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet Radon gas activity measurement Rn 222 noble gas and mass refinement Flexible data storage configurations Volumetric air flow rate control with actual standard conditions concentration data output Processor controlled calibration of all sensors 880 nm near forward scattering nephelometer Beta Detector Life 10 years C 14 activity below USA authorized limit values shipped as non hazardous material under Code UN2911 easy handling of the source and instrument No license is needed in most countries Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Principle of Operation For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics e Principle of Operation on page 1 3 e Specifications on page 1 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this continuous ambient particulate monitor We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Thermo service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this instrument For more information on servicing see the Servicing chapter Principle Of The Model 5030 is based on the principles of aero
312. ecting and Cleaning the Fan Rebuild the sample pump once every 12 18 months or as necessary depending on the environment is is used in The pump repair kit contains instructions for rebuilding the pump See the Servicing chapter for a list of replacement parts Perform the Leak Test procedure that follows This leak test procedure uses a volumetric flow meter and a custom leak check adapter Use the following procedure to verify no leaks 1 Place a reference volumetric flow meter e g BGI Delta Cal onto the inlet adapter and calibrate the 50307 SHARP so that the reference flow meter and the 50302 SHARP Monitor read the same flow rate 2 Install the custom leak check adapter onto the inlet adapter and then place the reference flow meter onto the leak check adapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Filter Tape Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A 3 Preventive Maintenance Filter Tape Replacement Record the reference volumetric flow meter reading and the instant flow reading If the difference between both readings is less than 0 42 L min 2 5 the leak check passes Use the following procedure to replace the filter tape in case of breaks or if the tape runs out Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety prec
313. ed 6 3 Performance of test The test was carried out at four different comparisons during field test Different seasons and varying concentrations for PM2 5 were taken into consideration Of the complete dataset at least 20 of the concentration values determined with the refer ence method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold according to 2008 50 EC 7 For PMz5 the upper assessment threshold is at 17 g m8 At each comparison campaign at least 40 valid data pairs were determined Of the complete dataset 4 test sites 209 valid data pairs for SN 1 217 valid data pairs for SN 2 a total of 29 1 of the measured values are above the upper assessment threshold of 17 g m for PM 5 The measured concentrations were referred to ambient conditions 6 4 Evaluation According to point 9 5 3 1 of the Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Moni toring Methods applies The uncertainty between the candidates Ups must be lt 2 5 g m An uncertainty gt 2 5 g m between the two candidates is an indication that the performance of one or both systems is not sufficient and the equivalence cannot be declared The uncertainty is determined for e All test sites and comparisons together full dataset e 1 dataset with measured values 2 18 g m for PM2 5 Basis averages of reference measurement 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control
314. edenes E 13 1 2 Certification Proposal wid mentinnehminnnnebnnenneiaineekhauabnen Eman 18 1 3 Summary of test CS UMD Soest eg tee eee ceed edge eee 19 2 TASK DERINITION ere eee ene reer ee ar ore ee ee ee oe eee eee eee are 28 21 gt Nature tesien nnan a eee a eee meee eee ee reer 28 22 CDI OG UV Erran E E a A AEE EN EERE 28 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE AMS TESTED vinin nara 29 3 1 Measuring PINGING 228 sce Seta tao aunt atic sa ess ko secede ole coi 29 3 2 Functionality of the measuring system cece eee eeeteeee teeter eeeeetetaaeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeenaaees 32 3 3 AMS SCONE and SOU Die cesticsasdssterardcuhaceiaasvoroderatersVeesendss reuetcentseenserd Mlepaedeuvexarbienere 37 4y TEST PROGRAMME skiemeniniai Eaa EEn E RENEE REA REEERE AEREA 51 41 General eee eee eee eee E E ee eee eee 51 4 2 Laboratory VS Uae arcs ca ee ae ecm eta egmeneeeeee dee 54 43 Field TOG cossccretinseaselenenupebengeseulanssunebeupiumetasasnnenesoutendaysaepiasecebennepiuassundencouseiungeusedeneiape 55 5 REFERENCE MEASURING METHODS siscs2cs ced dectstsiscisdetciestieeds odie didi edieel 74 6 TEST RESULTS Zr ee ne e ee eee ee er rere eT 75 6 1 4 1 1 Measured value display 0 0 2 0 cceceeeeecceeee cette eeeeeeeceaeeeee tees etea aaa aaaaaaaeeeeeeeenenaa 75 6 1 4 1 2 Easy maintenance acs cecgteszacs sec tect seactais eecectescardassyiscoatteneig teatageasdect siateaieecaeuass 77 6 1 4 1 3 Functional check ssssenesseessoeseenrrneresorrrrtrrnnrrstrrrenrrnnntsorrserrrenr
315. eeseees 3 81 Min and Max Average Nephelometer Concentration Limits 3 82 Ja st nt PM fs cad cag sabes tues danecans zens an paa aa a RR 3 82 Min and Max Instant PM Concentration Limits eee 3 82 iistain GSR Psi ccnaip tec aitesovbvccdsecetaaah aoon aa 3 83 Min and Max Instant SHARP Concentration Limits 3 83 Instant Nephelometer tacet co cacei cdccla petasenutcateegecect decane tates 3 84 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xi Contents xii Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Min and Max Instant Nephelometer Concentration Limits 3 84 Device MVCN Ge tae ctah eda EE la hii ai let ane Boel 3 85 RH Temperature al ibrati git sentra see telsleaheled fond toiiee dents 3 85 Ambient Temperature veicciiccevetionsesssssherveedi deageitnctictudenicase 3 86 Fow Temperature oa taka seid Sate ete Dineen een as 3 86 Ambient Relative Humidity geese ene cent Pea eee ay av eD ante mr een arr 3 86 Pressure Vacuum Calibration ccccccscscsessccesscecsscesessecssseucseseacnse 3 87 Barometer Pressure Caltbrationtiaud ca concave casatdsacenavdecceeivinaocd teers 3 87 Calibrate Barometer Pressure Offset c ccccsscscssscecsssseesssceesees 3 88 Calibrate Barometer Pressure Span tcrcsntesiersdeaceonaisaceiedeed sonbetonds 3 88 Restore Default Galibratiofic dsstusnsidsca aera asnaetiasas 3 88 Vacuum Flow Calibration nose iaetiaictad haa iseadell aciwcanematiiats 3 89 Calibrate Vacuum Flow Offfset ccccccssss
316. eighed relative to the tare filter and check weight are shown in 50 20 D Z o baas ge 5 100 Y ow 50 0 50 20 D a baas p _ jos WY wo 12 o ou 50 0 O O O O O O OOU O O O O O OOG O O O O OOOHOO SBEBSSSFSSFRSRSFSEE RRS RSRSFSSESEBS ceeeat evpvnaesezeeQnpkB 88 8eeaeszeszraogpa sg EegeSRR SSP RR KT SRRESBSEBEEEE o r s Range of Spread ug 5 Figure 63 If filters lose relative mass between weightings then the distribution will be shifted to the right whereas if there is a gain in the relative mass the distribution will shift to the left EN14907 states that unsampled filters should be rejected if the difference between the masses of the two pre weightings is greater than 40 ug Similarly EN14907 states that sam pled filters should be rejected if the difference between the masses of the two post weight 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Precisely Right Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 218 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F ings is greater than 60 ug Filters were not rejected based on these criteria The observed distributions of repeat mass measurements are considered unlikely to have had a significant effect o
317. eitenmeneoconienenneoeceinaire 41 Vacuum pump type GAST Model 75R647 PN 110836 00 seeeeee 41 Main screen of the user interface ccccccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeees 42 Flow chart Overview of menu assiSted firmware cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45 Zero filter for supplying air free of suspended particles and its connection adaple 6 cersuaciteneetae deine etait oon ae aa sens ati 46 Set with foil holder and test foils 2 2 0 0 ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 47 Leak test adapter eer eee er ene ee eee eee ere ree eee eer ee 48 Course of PM2 5 concentrations reference at the test site Cologne parking lot WINIET siccreccecremitesrctemmetn weed ment eran mar 57 Course of PM2 5 concentrations reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot SUMME cceeeeeeee eect eeeeeetee eset tree eeeeeaaeeeaaeeeeeeeeeneeee 57 Course of PM25 concentrations reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot WWE scecsiets eee aie ates 58 Course of PM 5 concentrations reference at the test site Teddington SUMMON scvea enact ae Acutdetienct ted eapetastbae seas teuccsuss acewurseustaniguce idtedsdateiahe nce tesueeesddaas 58 Field test site Cologne parking lOt cccceeeeeeesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeeeeeeeenenenal 59 Field test site Bornheim motorway parking lot ccceeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 59 Field
318. eive alarm flow temp max 20 0 degC set alarm flow temp min value set alarm flow temp max value This command sets the flow temperature alarm maximum value to value where value is a floating point number representing flow temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the flow temperature alarm maximum value to 70 C Send set alarm flow temp max 70 Receive set alarm flow temp max 70 ok alarm ib status This command reports the status of the interface board as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the interface board status is OK Send alarm ib status Receive alarm ib status ok alarm io status This command reports the status of the I O expansion board as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the I O expansion board status is OK Send alarm io status Receive alarm io status ok alarm mb status This command reports the status of the motherboard as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the motherboard status is OK Send alarm mb status Receive alarm mb status ok alarm nb status This command reports the status of the nephelometer interface board as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the nephelometer interface board status is OK Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Send alarm nb status Receive alarm nb status ok alarm ncal status This command reports the status of the last nephelometer auto zero calibration
319. eive set range 5 ok Table B 5 Standard Ranges Selection ng m mg m 0 100 0 1 1 1000 1 0 2 2000 2 0 3 3000 3 0 4 5000 5 0 5 10000 10 0 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Selection g m mg m 6 C1 C1 7 C2 C2 8 C3 C3 rh th This command reports the current heater RH threshold for the sample The following example reports that the RH threshold is 30 Send rh th Receive rh th 30 set rh th value This command sets the heater RH threshold for the sample to value where value is a floating point number representation of RH threshold between 25 to 90 The following example sets the RH threshold to 35 Send set rh th 35 Receive set rh th 35 ok temp comp This command reports whether temperature compensation is for actual or standard conditions The following example shows the temperature compensation is standard Send temp comp Receive temp comp std set temp comp selection selection act std These commands turn the temperature compensation to either actual or standard conditions The following example turns the temperature compensation to actual Send set temp comp act Receive set temp comp act ok temp std This command reports the standard temperature The following example reports that the standard temperature is 18 C Send temp std Receive temp std 18 degC B 50 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction
320. el 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The inner box that the instrument resides in is an ISTA 1A certified packaging and is appropriate for transporting the instrument on local paved roads to the monitoring site Precautions should be taken to secure this package from shifting during local transport Using the ISTA 2A packaging is strongly recommended for transporting the instrument over poor roads or on highways When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person may lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when the instrument is received notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from its shipping container s and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material in the analyzer Figure 2 1 Th
321. eld Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 33 sr Reports the last srec stored B 29 srec Reports maximum number of srecs B 29 srec format Reports sets output format for srecs ASCII or binary B 30 srec layout Reports current layout of srec data B 31 srec mem size Reports maximum number of srecs that can be stored B 31 srec per Reports sets srec logging period B 31 stream per Reports sets current time interval for streaming data B 33 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Command Description Page tape counter Reports the number of counts corresponding to the filter tape B 27 movement tape to ncal ratio Reports sets the ratio of filter tape changes per B 43 nephelometer auto zero temp comp Reports sets temperature compensation to actual or standard B 50 temp std Reports sets the standard temperature B 50 temp th Reports sets the temperature threshold for the detector B 51 thermal mass coef Reports sets the current thermal mass coefficient B 40 time Reports sets current time 24 hour format B 53 tz Reports sets the timezone string for the NTP server B 60 up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 44 vac mass coef Reports sets the current vacuum mass coefficient B 41 vac pres Reports the current vacuum pressure B 27 vac pres span Reports sets the vacuum pres
322. em e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Concentrations Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item For Common Flags and Detector A Flags see Figure 3 5 and Figure 3 6 for data descriptions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Other Measurements 3 40 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions ERED CH Ps Tit Wi hid PS PHP ESE Pi AG Lf bie Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Analog Inputs TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note The instrument power must
323. embly 59 008630 Pump Rebuild Kit 24 000483 Pump Tubing External 3 8 inch 106994 00 Tubing Internal 3 8 inch 104401 00 Tape Guides 106443 00 Filter Tape 108183 00 Tape Hardware Kit 112298 00 Replacement O ring Kit 106531 00 Cover Assembly 106988 00 Handles front cover FH125C14 Calibration Kit Cal Foils 10 000447 Modified Shoe for Tripod 106445 00 Metal Assembly Paste 107000 00 Fitting 5 8 Union w Nylon Ferrules 107001 00 Tubing 5 8 Stainless Steel 109583 00 Roof Flange Assembly 57 002758 Large Bypass Filter Assembly 110504 00 SHARP Radius Tube Adapter Final Assembly 108154 00 SHARP Connector Bracket Assembly 109408 00 Tubing Assembly Zero In 3 8 inch 108151 00 SHARP Assembly 110489 00 Final SHARP Cover Assembly w Insulation 109489 00 Inlet Dust Cover 110084 00 Delrin Nut 104961 00 Gasket Extrusion Chamber 104955 00 RH Temp Board Gasket 110481 00 SHARP 3 way Ext Solenoid Valve Final Assembly 110086 00 Heater Adapter CE Kit 110082 00 Custom Gasket for Inlet Expendable item not covered by warranty 7 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Cable List Cable List Table 7 2 lists the Model 50303 cables See the Troubleshooting chapter g P for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 50307 Cables Part Number 101349 00 Description AC Power Cable 115 VAC US AC Power Cable 220 VAC EU DC
324. emi annual filter tape changes are expected to be sufficient under normal conditions no unscheduled filter changes due to significantly high dust concentrations The Filter Tape Counter function allows for monitoring the current number of filter tape changes as well as configuring alarm thresholds which remind the user of upcoming changes 4 An inspection of the sensors for ambient temperature and ambient pressure shall be carried out every three months according to the manufacturer s specifications 5 A flow rate check must be performed every three months according to the manufac turer s specifications 6 The system s leak tightness shall be inspected every three months according to the manufacturer s specifications 7 The external pump exhaust filter shall be exchanged every six months 8 As part of an annual basic maintenance the carbon vanes of the vacuum pump shall be exchanged and the SHARP optics module shall be cleaned once a year The cleaning of the SHARP optics module is ideally performed by an experienced service technician Furthermore it is recommended to carry out a yearly inspection and if re quired a re calibration of the radiometric measurement using the foil set 9 The cleaning of the sampling tube shall be paid attention to during the annual basic maintenance The instructions of the manual chapters 4 and 5 shall be observed when performing maintenance works In general all works can be carried out w
325. emperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A Note If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See contrast levels in Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands for more information on this command amp e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast rip gies PIL ERE i The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 5030 The service wrench icon on the status bar is shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its o
326. en consent TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH D 51105 Cologne Am Grauen Stein Tel 49 221 806 5200 Fax 49 221 806 1349 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx i TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Lah i ne mang Air Pollution Control recisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 2 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Acknowledgement TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH would like to acknowledge the involve ment of Bureau Veritas and the National Physical Laboratory as our UK partners in this project for their involvement in collecting the UK field data project management and data processing NPL BUREAU National Physical Laboratory 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 3 of 424 DAkks Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle D PL 11120 02 00 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scient
327. ence average in g m Deviation from reference 4 1 4 1 average in Deviation from The single values are presented in annexes 5 and 6 of the appendix The presentation and the assessment of the measuring uncertainties Wom of days with a rel ative humidity gt 70 are shown in Table 28 and Table 29 The single values are presented in annexes 5 and 6 of the appendix 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx y T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 136 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 28 Comparison candidate SN 1 with reference instrument rel humidity gt 70 all test sites measured component PM25 Comparison candidate with reference according to Guide Demonstration of Equivalence Of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods January 2010 Candidate Modell 50301 SHARP SN SN 1 Test site All test sites rH gt 70 Limit value 30 g m Status of measured values Raw data Allowed uncertainty 25 Slope b significant Uncertainty of b Ordinate intercept a not significant Uncertainty of a Deviation at limit value Uncertainty Uc s at limit value Combined measurement uncertainty wom Expanded measurement uncertainty Wom Status equivalence test Table 29 Co
328. ence between sample and calibration port The difference between the measured values obtained by feeding gas at the sample and calibration port shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certifica tion range shall be used as reference point Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 126 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 16 Converter efficiency In the case of measuring systems with a converter the converter efficiency shall be at least 98 Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation
329. end set alarm board temp max 38 Receive set alarm board temp max 38 ok alarm conc avg neph min alarm conc avg neph max These commands report the current 24 hour average nephelometer concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the average nephelometer concentration minimum is 0 ug m Send alarm conc avg neph min Receive alarm conc avg neph min 0 000E 00 pg m3 set alarm conc avg neph min value set alarm conc avg neph max value These commands set the 24 hour average nephelometer concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the average nephelometer concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 pg m Send set alarm conc avg neph max 10000 Receive set alarm conc avg neph max 10000 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms alarm conc avg pm min alarm conc avg pm max These commands report the current 24 hour average PM concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the average PM concentration minimum is 100 pg m Send alarm conc avg pm min Receive alarm conc avg pm min 1 000E 02 pg m3 set alarm conc avg pm min value set alarm conc avg pm max value These commands set the 24 hour average PM concentratio
330. eneration is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other So for example an srec containing just the current SHARP level could be generated every 5 minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Volumetric Conditions containing 32 items once each minute for a week gt 20 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time SHARP concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type for other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Srec Lrec DH Guided Piet View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data
331. ent mass coefficient B 40 mass limit Reports sets the current filter mass limit B 48 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 44 neph Reports the 1 minute running average nephelometer B 12 concentration neph 24avg Reports the last calculated 24 hour average nephelometer B 12 concentration neph bkg Reports the current nephelometer background B 26 neph cal bkg Sets the nephelometer into an auto zero calibration routine B 41 neph coef Reports sets the nephelometer span coefficient B 41 neph led current Reports the nephelometer LED current B 13 neph mode Reports the current operating mode of the nephelometer B 26 neph prev bkg Reports the previous nephelometer background B 26 neph raw Reports the raw unaveraged nephelometer concentration B 13 neph ref det Reports the nephelometer reference detector voltage B 13 neph reset bkg Resets measured background to zero B 41 neph restore bkg Restores background to the previous background values B 42 neph rh Reports the nephelometer relative humidity B 13 neph rh offset Reports sets the nephelometer relative humidity sensor B 42 offset neph src level Reports the nephelometer source level B 42 neph temp Reports the nephelometer temperature sensor B 13 neph temp offset Reports sets the nephelometer temperature sensor offset B 42 neph thermal coef Reports sets the nephelometer thermal coefficient B 43 no of Irec Reports number of Irecs stored in memory B 32 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 9 C
332. entific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Page 209 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Weighed filters are packed in separate polystyrene jars for transport and storage These jars remain closed until the filter is placed in Virgin filters can be stored in the weighing room for up to 28 days before sampling Another pre weighing is carried out if this period is exceeded Sampled filters can be stored for not more than 15 days at a temperature of 23 C or less The filters are stored at 7 C in a refrigerator 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TU V R h ein an d TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH z Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 210 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A2 Filter evaluation The filters are evaluated with the help of a corrective term in order to minimise relative mass changes caused by the weighing room conditions Equation Dust MF post Mrara X MKonpost MKonpre F1 MKonpre average mass of the 3 control filters after 48 h and 72 h pre weighing MKoNpost average mass of the 3 control filters after 48 h and 72 h post weighing Mrara average mass of the filter after 48 h and 72 h pre weighing MF post average mass of the loaded filter after 48 h and
333. eph temp offset 2 5 ok neph thermal coef This command reports the nephelometer thermal coefficient set at the factory The following example reports that the nephelometer thermal coefficient is 0 00058 Send neph thermal coef Receive neph thermal coef 0 00058 set neph thermal coef value This command sets the nephelometer thermal coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the nephelometer thermal coefficient to 0 001 Send set neph thermal coef 0 001 Receive set neph thermal coef 0 001 ok tape to ncal ratio This command reports the ratio of filter tape changes per nephelometer auto zero The following example reports this value Send tape to ncal ratio Receive tape to ncal ratio 1 1 set tape to ncal ratio This command sets the filter tape change per nephelometer auto zero ratio to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the ratio The following example sets the nephelometer filter tape change to auto zero to 2 1 Send set tape to ncal ratio 2 1 Receive set tape to ncal ratio 2 1 ok vac pres span This command reports the vacuum span for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the vacuum pressure span is 1 0 Send vac pres span Receive vac pres span 1 000 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display Keys Displa
334. ephelometer Backgrounds are determined during automatic and manual calibration and are used to maintain a stable zero The nephelometer background menu is shown below The instrument can also be calibrated manually using this menu For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Bkg Values Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Factors Menu CREE RE Te Wi rid E PURE TE Peak Bases PME Oe hei E E oo uei E beet HH Nephelometer Mode The Nephelometer Mode screen allows the user to place the nephelometer into one of three modes Available modes are Sample Zero and Stdby The sample mode begins photometric detection The zero mode begins a zeroing process that will begin with a filter tape change and the standby mode Stdby mode will stall any measurement by the nephelometer e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Bkg gt Neph Mode Values The Values screen displays the optional background for each range of the nephelometer These values can be control charted by the user to help evaluate any optional drift e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Bkg gt Values WH mrhivt Pin Piri i a prin pn PELIR E Bel LEbdbert pe EN EEE TE Sanat Bone EY anal Bat ade POE S ei n Restore Previous Values The Restore Previous Values screen is used to restore the prior background values should a poor
335. eports the 24 hour averaging PM concentration The following example reports the 24 hour PM concentration value Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms Alarms B 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send pm 24avg Receive pm 24avg 10 000E 00 ug m3 sharp This command reports the 1 minute running average SHARP concentration The following example reports the 1 minute running average value Send sharp Receive sharp 1 187E 01 pg m3 sharp 24avg This command reports the last calculated 24 hour average SHARP concentration which defaults to 9 999 pg m if 24 hours has not passed Send sharp 24avg Receive sharp 24avg 9 999E 03 pg m3 alarm alpha count min alarm alpha count max These commands report the current alpha count alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the alpha count alarm minimum value is 200 Send alarm alpha count min Receive alarm alpha count min 200 alarm amb rh min alarm amb rh max These commands report the current ambient relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports the ambient relative humidity alarm minimum value is 35 0 Send alarm amb rh min Receive alarm amb rh min 35 0 set alarm amb rh min value set alarm amb rh max value These commands set the ambient relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representin
336. er Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and Pressure Span pressure sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating a e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Span ip priori Piet Restore Default The Restore Default Calibration screen allows the user to reset the default Calibration values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Set Defaults 3 88 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Vacuum Flow Calibration The Vacuum Flow Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the vacuum flow offset vacuum flow span or reset default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow Calibrate Vacuum Flow The Calibrate Vacuum Flow Offset screen calibrates the vacuum flow Offset sensor offset value e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Flow Offset Calibrate Vacuum The Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set Pressure Span the flow sensor calibration span point Note The operator should use an independent manometer capable of measuring approximately 100 mmHg of vacuum Measure the vacuum Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SH
337. er at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter DH iid PHL EO The Model 50302 utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the flowchart in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen normally displays the current SHARP concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing _ The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the appropriate sections for more information instrument settings submenu contains related Oyu JOe UOD g Jo 09 0q Y 10 99 9q pueog uoisuedxg O I uoneinByuoD puawnysu swuejy 29u09 synejag Aojoey 310 S H swunejy MO 4 synez q 13SN 310 S H4 M
338. erature rise ensuring negligible loss of semi volatiles from the col lected sample when the ambient relative humidity is below the threshold to which the heater is controlling As the ambient relative humidity increases above the threshold the applied heating is optimised to maintain the relative humidity threshold above the beta attenuation fil ter tape of the radiometric stage The regulation of the DHS is carried out using the control variable relative sample humidity rH here nominal value lt 50 58 see Section 4 3 Field test and the filter temperature sensor here maximum value of 30 C The heating conditions can be adjusted subject to the requirements of the measurement network Figure 1 and Figure 5 show the path a particle sample travels within the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system after passing the sampling inlet and sampling tube including the DHS Conditioned Aerosol Sample SHARP Board SHARP Box shown with Cover Off Beta Attenuation Nephelometer Figure 1 Sample path within the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH UV Rhe A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 33 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209
339. ere tested in the laboratory Laboratory test part 1 2009 e Description of system functions e Determination of dependence of sensitivity on ambient temperature e Determination of dependence of sensitivity on mains voltage Laboratory test part 2 2012 2013 Detection limit Determination of the dependence of zero point sensitivity on ambient temperature Determination of the dependence of zero point sensitivity on the mains voltage Tightness of the sampling system The following auxiliary devices were used to determine the system characteristics during the laboratory test Climatic chamber temperature range from 20 C to 50 C accuracy lt 1 C Adjustable isolating transformer Zero filter for external zero point checks Span foil sets The measured values were recorded internally by the instruments Once stored in the sys tems they were transmitted via Ethernet to the iPort software for read out The laboratory tests and results are presented in Section 6 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 55 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F 4 3 Field test The field test was carried out with two identi
340. ermo Fisher Scientific Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Remove Packing 2 pieces Remove Packing 2 pieces Units without Optional I O Board Units with Optional 1 0 Board Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Thermo Fisher Scientific Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Check for possible damage during shipment 5 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached 6 Re install the cover 7 Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior 8 Remove the external pump from its shipping container and place next to the instrument The Model 50307 has been bench tested and calibrated at the factory prior to shipping The mass sensors RH sensors flowmeter temperature sensor external ambient temperature sensor barometric pressure and volumetric flow rate have been calibrated to traceable standards For a quick start proceed immediately to the Startup procedures and skip the Bench Acceptance Test To assure the best quality data it is recommended that you perform an acceptance test Furthermore as part of a quality assurance program acceptance testing will be conducted prior to field installation This is an excellent opportunity to compare the monitor to the primary and transfer standards utilized by the end user within their specific monitoring Model 50307 SHARP I
341. ern Hessen Protocol ssssssssssessssesesseesseeseestesteenteenees D 1 Serial Communication Parameters ces ssecssecsssscsssessesssstessseeenes D 1 TCP Communication Parameters seis tus cistshsevava nesters desaneeavansseciansteaves D 2 lnstt ment Add tess n eto fo0 kal hoe ats Sone at aes alia 22 D 2 Abbreviations Used inaa a RAAS D 2 Basic Command Structure ssesssssesssessssserssersossersseesoesessesesersesssersessesres D 2 Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt cccccscsesseesssecssscessceseeeeseeesseeens D 3 Gesytec COLTS ct oh Js asian nie iss eair Eis D 3 Instrument Control Command ST ccccccccceessssecessssseceesssseceessnees D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA ci eeeeseeeseereeeeeeeees D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command sees D 7 Operating and Error S tatuisicts 54k teacs Gade ane Gecnrineneene D 8 Appendix E ESM Protocol CommandS s sssssssssssssssusnnnsssnusnnnnnnessunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnne E 1 ESM Commands Supported s s sssssssesssesesssssssrsrsssrsrseseseseseseseseseseseseses E 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xvii Contents xviii Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 SHARP Monitor Sample Path cc cccececceceeceteseeseeteteeteneeees 1 3 Figure 1 2 Nephelometer Sample and Zero Flow Schematic 0 0cc0 1 5 Figure 2 1 Remove th
342. erved in com parison with the reference method The evaluation of the campaign led to the following re sults Table 7 Evaluation of the Teddington summer campaign with rH adjusted to 50 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 PM2 5 5030i Sharp Dataset No s r Slope b Up Intercept a ua Wem 217 ug m3 Teddington Summer w ith 50 RH Setting 38 0 856 0 902 0 058 0 305 0 493 20 03 5 3 Teddington Summer w ith 50 RH Setting 38 0 850 0 819 0 054 0 965 0 459 31 07 5 3 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 63 of 424 100 90 4 a SN1 Teddington Summer with 50 RH Setting 80 4 70 60 5 so Al 40 5 PM 5030i Sharp pg m 30 4 20 5 10 4 gt Ne 0 r r r r r r r 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 26 Comparison of reference and candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Ted dington summer relative humidity threshold adjusted to 50 100 90 4 4 SN2 Teddington Summer with 50 RH Setting 80 4 fo 70 4 ra 60 4 x PM
343. eseesectesteseeseeseetesteseeseesee 2 6 Table 2 2 O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions 0 0 ccccccceceseeeseeesteeeeees 2 18 Table 2 3 Default Analog OUtpUtS o oo ccc ce cecescstesestesesteseeteseeteseeeeees 2 19 Table 2 4 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions 0 0 cccccccscesestesesteeeteees 2 20 Table 2 5 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin DeSCriptions cccccececeeesesee tence 2 21 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons 2 cece cece cece eeteseeeseeseeeeeeseeseseeeeeteneees 3 3 Table 3 2 Standard Ranges ace ceestcscteee sort astuercactteentassusncast tetera etvendatuel 3 11 Table 3 3 Default Analog Outputs 0 ccccececsessesecsesesseceesesseeseeseceeseess 3 12 Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale oo ccc cccecececeeetesesteteseeeees 3 50 Table 3 5 Signal Type Group Choices ceeececccsessestetesteseeseeseeesteseeseens 3 51 Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide oo cs tees teseeteseeeees 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages c cccececcsescecetesesteteseseetenenees 6 5 Table 6 3 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions 2 120011105111051111011111 6 10 Table 6 4 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 15 Table 6 5 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Diagram 0 ccccccceceseeeeeeee 6 20 Table 6 6 O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 21 Table 6 7 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 0 cccce 6 2
344. est at the site Bornheim Summer 2013 SN 1 58 amp SN 2 50 component PM25 raw data Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset Slope b Up Intercept a Ug Wem 217 ug m3 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 2013 44 0 917 1 157 0 051 0 372 0 625 35 91 11 4 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 2013 44 0 904 1 001 0 048 0 048 0 518 0 586 0 586 11 75 11 4 Assessment 1 The uncertainty between the two candidate systems is 1 53 g m and thus is below the permissible 2 5 yg m 2 The expanded uncertainty for the raw data for SN 1 58 is higher as the acceptable 25 the expanded uncertainty for the raw data for SN 2 50 is below the permis sible 25 The correction factors terms detected during suitability testing in 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments are afterwards applied to the raw data sets Therefore a correction of the data sets for SN 1 and SN 2 with a slope of 1 068 uncertainty of slope 0 013 is carried out This results to the following evaluation Table 10 Results of the equivalence test at the site Bornheim summer 2013 SN 1 58 amp SN 2 50 component PM25 slope correction 1 068 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset No s Slope b Up Intercept a Ug Wom 217 ug m3 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 2013 44 0 917 1 080
345. et format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Table B 8 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to Series Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 Send set host name analyzero1 Receive set host name analyzero1 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 50302 Send instr name Receive instr name SHARP Particle Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification ID The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 14 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set instrument id value This command sets the instrument ID to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 12 Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new ID for subsequent commands A Se
346. etent German body see module 5 3 1 reference is made to the following requirement in the previous version of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 June 2002 The detection limit of the measuring system shall be smaller or equal to reference val ue Bo The detection limit shall be determined in the field 6 2 Equipment Zero filter for testing the zero point 6 3 Performance of test The detection limit is determined for candidates SN 1 and SN 2 by operating the devices with the respective zero filters installed at the inlets of both measuring systems Sampling air free of suspended particulate matter was offered over a period of 15 days for a duration of 24ha day The determination of the detection limit was done in the laboratory since the provision of particulate free air for such a long time was not possible under field conditions 6 4 Evaluation The detection limit X is determined from the standard deviation s of the SHARP measured values by applying particulate free sampling air to both candidates It corresponds to the standard deviation of the average Xo of the measured values Xo of each candidate multiplied with the Students factor 1 X th 10 95 So where S o facet X Reference value Bo 2 g m8 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP w
347. etraCal venturi manufactured by BGI for use in the UK Power consumption measuring device type Metratester 5 manufactured by Gosen Metrawatt e Zero filter for external zero point checks e Span foil sets Two Model 5030i SHARP systems and two PM2 5 reference instruments were each operated simultaneously for 24 h during the field test The reference equipment worked discontinuous ly i e the filter had to be changed manually after each sample drawing 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland j Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 56 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The impaction plates of the PM25 sampling inlets of the reference devices were cleaned ap prox every 2 weeks and lubricated with silicone grease in order to guarantee a safe separa tion and deposition of the particulate The PMzs5 sampling inlets of the candidates were cleaned approx every 4 weeks The inlet was cleaned according to the manufacturer s in struction while taking into account the local suspended particle concentrations The flow rate was tested on each candidate and reference device prior to and after each change of location with a dry gas meter and a mass flow meter connected wi
348. ewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password gt Unlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and settings can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Unlock Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 105 Frequency of Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Equipment Required Chapter 4 Calibration The Model 50302 is an i
349. exceed the reference value By in 24 h and in the maintenance interval The temporal change in the measured value in the range of the reference value B shall not exceed 5 of B in 24 h and in the maintenance interval 6 2 Equipment Zero filter for testing the zero point and span foil set for testing the reference point 6 3 Performance of test The test was performed as part of the field test over a period 20 months As part of the monthly regular checks including those at the beginning and at the end of tests at each field test site the measuring systems were operated with a zero filter at the device inlet over a period of at least 24 h each The values obtained at zero concentration were evaluated Furthermore the stability of the mass coefficient was tested and evaluated as reference point check at the beginning and at the end of the tests at each field test site It is not possible to produce a reproducible signal for the sensitivity of the nephelometer us ing external test standards Since the nephelometer is continuously calibrated with a very stable radiometric measurement a separate examination of the stability of the nephelome ter s signal at the reference point can be omitted 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 118 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with
350. f pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot be assigned soft keys A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry Screen Entry Line gt Keyboard pE Rri Taic Firmware Overview 3 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Programmable Soft Key Labels The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Jand gt keys Ifa character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the and keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any charact
351. f the measuring inlet ensures a low internal background produced by opti cal reflection The analogue raw signal is detected in cycles of one second digitised for fur ther processing and the minute average is calculated The nephelometer module offers six automatically chosen measuring ranges which ensure that measured values as precise as possible are obtained During the periodic zero adjustment procedures performed as part of every filter change the zero adjustment magnetic valve on the rear side is activated and HEPA filtered air free of suspended particles is admitted into the nephelometer Every range is then zeroed again The results of the zero adjustment can be read on the display and are as C link command available At the location at which the nephelometer is attached to the enclosure of measuring system an isolated radial tube hits the sampling tube The nephelometer module can thereby be eas ily detached from the actual measuring system This makes it possible to reconfigure the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system combination of nephelometric and radiometric measurements into the Model 50141 BETA measuring system see test report 936 21209885 H After passing the nephelometer the particles of the particle sample are deposited on the glass fibre filter tape for radiometric measurement The particles are collected on the filter tape up to a specified threshold during test fast forward of filter tape after 8 h or when mass is
352. ference recognised as signif icant outliers and discarded at each test site Table 12 Results of Grubbs outlier test Reference PM25 Graph Number Site Sampler Number of data Maximum Number Number identified Number Deleted Number of data pairs that can be deleted pairs remaining Bornheim Winter PM s Reference Cologne Winter PM s Reference Bornheim Summer PM Reference Teddington Summer PM 5 Reference 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx i 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 70 of 424 The following paired values were discarded Table 13 Discarded reference PM paired values according to Grubbs Test site Date Reference 1 ug m Reference 2 g m3 Cologne Winter 05 May 2011 11 2 14 8 Teddington summer 03 Aug 2012 5 5 4 6 100 90 4 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 80 z aouaIajay Wd 90 100 PM 5 Reference 1 Figure 28 Grubbs test results for the PM25 reference method Cologne winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollutio
353. ffset value This command sets the nephelometer relative humidity sensor offset to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the offset The following example sets the nephelometer relative humidity sensor offset to 3 Send set neph rh offset 3 Receive set neph rh offset 3 ok neph src level This command reports the nephelometer source level set at the factory The following example reports that the nephelometer source level is 44 Send neph src level Receive neph src level 44 set neph src level value This command sets the nephelometer source level to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the level The following example sets the nephelometer source level to 50 Send set neph src level 50 Receive set neph src level 50 ok neph temp offset This command reports the nephelometer temperature offset set at the factory The following example reports that the nephelometer temperature offset is 2 6 C Send neph temp offset Receive neph temp offset 2 6 degC Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set neph temp offset value This command sets the nephelometer temperature offset to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the offset The following example sets the nephelometer temperature offset to 2 5 C Send set neph temp offset 2 5 Receive set n
354. for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled 5 2 8 Availability Minimum 95 The availability was 97 4 for SN 1 and 96 1 for SN 2 without test related outages or 90 2 for SN 1 and 89 0 for SN 2 including test related outages 5 2 9 Instrument soft The version of the instrument The version of the instrument soft ware software to be tested shall be ware is shown on the display Chang displayed during switch on of es to the instrument software are the measuring system The test communicated to the test institute institute shall be informed on changes in the instrument software which have influence on the performance of the measuring system 5 3 Requirements on measuring systems for gaseous air pollutants 5 3 1 General Minimum requirement accord The test is based on the minimum re ing VDI 4202 Part 1 quirements of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 Test points 5 3 2 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 are evaluated as before basing on the minimum requirements stated in VDI 4202 Part 1 of 2002 i e using the reference values Bo B and B2 The performance of the test points 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 13 and 5 3 18 is omitted as they are not relevant for particulate measuring devices 5 3 2 Repeatability The repeatability standard de The investigations result in detection standard devia viation at zero point shall not limits of 0 11 g m8 for system 1 SN ti
355. from Date Value previous value start value Date Value previous value start value pg m pg m pg m pg m pg m pg m 3 5 2011 0 0 3 6 2011 3 6 2011 0 0 3 7 2011 3 7 2011 4 8 2011 4 8 2011 4 9 2011 4 9 2011 4 10 2011 4 10 2011 5 10 2011 5 10 2011 5 11 2011 5 11 2011 7 22 2011 7 22 2011 7 23 2011 7 23 2011 7 24 2011 7 24 2011 9 17 2011 9 17 2011 9 18 2011 9 18 2011 10 22 2011 10 22 2011 10 23 2011 0 0 0 2 11 11 2011 11 11 2011 11 1 0 11 12 2011 11 12 2011 0 0 1 1 11 13 2011 2 11 2012 0 1 0 2 2 12 2012 2 0 2 0 1 9 2 12 2012 2 3 2 4 3 9 2012 3 10 2012 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 9 8 2012 0 0 0 1 0 1 9 8 2012 0 1 9 9 2012 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 10 12 2012 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 13 2012 0 0 0 0 0 1 10 13 2012 0 7 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 120 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Measured value ug m IANO O O OOGO 7 O 0 Zero point drift PM2 5 SN 1 9 N N N QS Y N N N N N K N N O O O O O O O K D v yw oe w we we oe N X D N RN N Time Figure 35 Zero point drift SN 1 measured component PM25 Measured value ug m Zero point drift PM2 5 SN 2 Figur
356. g ambient relative humidity alarm limits in percent The following example sets the ambient relative humidity alarm maximum value to 55 Send set alarm amb rh max 55 Receive set alarm amb rh max 55 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms alarm amb temp min alarm amb temp max These commands report the current ambient temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the ambient temperature alarm minimum value is 4 0 C Send alarm amb temp min Receive alarm amb temp min 4 0 degC set alarm amb temp min value set alarm amb temp max value These commands set the ambient temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing ambient temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the ambient temperature alarm maximum value to 38 C Send set alarm amb temp max 38 Receive set alarm amb temp max 38 ok alarm baro pres min alarm baro pres max These commands report the current barometric pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the barometric pressure alarm minimum value is 500 0 mmHg Send alarm baro pres min Receive alarm baro pres min 500 0 mmHg set alarm baro pres min value set alarm baro pres max value These commands set the barometric pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point
357. g example sets the sample relative humidity alarm maximum value to 40 Send set alarm sample rh min 40 Receive set alarm sample rh min 40 ok alarm status det This command reports the board status of the detector as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the detector board status is OK Send alarm status det Receive alarm status det ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Diagnostics Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics alarm tape counter max This command reports the current filter tape count alarm maximum value setting The following example reports that the filter tape count alarm maximum value is 480 Send alarm tape counter max Receive alarm tape counter max 480 set alarm tape counter max value This command sets the filter tape count alarm maximum value where value is an integer number representing filter tape alarm limits The following example sets the filter tape count alarm maximum value to 490 Send set alarm tape counter max 490 Receive set alarm tape counter max 490 ok alarm vac pres min alarm vac pres max These commands report the current vacuum pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the vacuum pressure alarm minimum value is 20 0 mmHg Send alarm vac pres min Receive alarm vac pres min 20 0 mmHg set alarm vac pres min value set alarm vac pres max value These commands set the vacuum pressure alarm minimum and maxim
358. ght Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 75 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 Test results 6 1 4 1 1 Measured value display The measuring system shall be fitted with a measured value display 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment is required 6 3 Performance of test It was checked whether the measuring system has a display for measured values 6 4 Evaluation The measuring system has a display for measured values The main screen displays the cur rent SHARP concentration at all times updated every second From here it is easy to select the screens displaying the PM concentration BETA the NEPH concentration the ambient conditions the flow conditions and the mass sensor data using the arrow keys 7 6 5 Assessment The measuring system is fitted with a measured value display Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 76 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Figure 32
359. gt is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Gesytec command lt STX gt Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR lt STX gt Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters lt STX gt at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or lt CR gt If a command is terminated with lt ETXs gt then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Gesytec Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with lt CR gt no checksum is attached The block checksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be
360. gt 1500 ug on the filter tape or when the deviation of the current flow rate from the nominal flow rate is more than 2 5 The filter tape can be found between the proportional detector and the 14C beta source The beta ray is transmitted from the bottom upwards passing through the filter tape and the ac cumulated particle layer The intensity of the beta ray is attenuated by the increasing mass load thus reducing its intensity The reduced beta intensity is then measured by the propor tional detector The mass on the filter tape is calculated from the continuous integrated count rate The determined count rate is continuously corrected with regard to changes in the air density Furthermore the radiometric mass determination is optimised by the simultaneous determi nation and consideration of the natural a activity of aerosols This additional a count rate serves the purpose of measuring radon which causes undesirable interference in the radio metric mass determination of particles and must therefore be compensated In order to keep the sampling flow rate at a constant nominal value the continuous meas urement of the flow rate as well as its adjustment is carried out by means of a proportional valve The PM concentrations are shown on the display on the front side of the measuring system as SHARP hybrid values PM radiometrically measured values gt analogous to Model 50141 BETA and NEPH values measured with scattered light T
361. hall not was 2 4 g m in relation to the previ exceed the requirements of ous value and 2 2 g m in relation to Table 2 in the field test of the start value and is therefore within Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 the permissible limits of Bo 2 ug m September 2010 in the field The values obtained during the sensi test tivity drift tests amount to a maximum For PM of 2 9 in relation to the previous Zero point within 24 h and value for PMas within the maintenance interval a maximum of BO As reference point within 24 h and within the maintenance in terval a maximum 5 of B1 5 3 13 Short term drift The short term drift at zero Not applicable point and reference point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 within 12 h for benzene 24 h in the laboratory test and within 24 h in the field test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T aa VRh 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH U einland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 24 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled 5 3 14 Response time The response time rise of the Not applicable measuring system shall not ex ceed 180 s The response time fall of the measuring syste
362. he ambient air measuring system Model 5030i SHARP operates combining the principles of particle light scattering nephelometry and beta attenuation The designation SHARP stands for Synchronised Hybrid Ambient Real time Particulate The clever combination of a highly sensitive but potentially inaccurate measuring technique NEPH and a non sensitive but highly accurate real time measurement BETA aims at providing a precise and at the same time sensitive real time measurement of fine dust Nephelometry is based on the measurement of light radiation intensity which is scattered by a totality of particles passing through a measured volume defined by the intersection of the il lumination beam and the field of view of the detection optics In contrast to particle counters the measured volume shall be large in terms of inverse function of the concentration of parti cle numbers The resulting signal is linearly proportional to the particle volume concentration for an aerosol with constant optical characteristics particle size form and refractive index provided that the conditions of independent and single scattering that shall be maintained for the concentration range in focus are met A nephelometer s response R is defined by the following formula as the relation of the detec tion signal for light scattering to the mass concentration of the particles R ff f a j al i i f A F O dd dado sar where lo irradiation inte
363. he beta measurement chamber houses an RTD temperature sensor The T sensor directly measures the temperature of the incoming sample stream for a continuous air mass compensation and the flow system The flow and ambient sensor measurements are combined within a firmware algorithm to maintain an accurate measurement and control of volumetric flow at the inlet and through the differential orifice The Model 50303 also includes three pressure sensors to measure the differential pressure across a subsonic orifice vacuum under the filter tape and barometric pressure The flow P sensor is solely used for measurement at the orifice for flow rate control The vacuum sensor is used for air mass compensation as an indicator for clogging of the system and is included in the volumetric flow control The barometric P sensor is used for air mass compensation and for volumetric flow rate regulation The volumetric flow system is built on a calibrated feedback signal from the CPU to the proportional valve signal By using this flow control flow stability is easily maintained With regard to the hybrid 50307 SHARP Monitor methodology the nephelometer and beta attenuation concentrations are calculated and both values are digitally filtered e g averaged with an elastic time constant that is a function of the real time concentrations The time constant of this dynamic digital filter will vary with concentrations It is the ratio of those two digitally filtere
364. he high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for the communications between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated over the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics Monitoring Signals Output Communication Electronics Motherboard 8 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final measurement values The one second accumulated counts are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is still reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of com
365. he highly sensitive but potentially inaccurate measurement technique NEPH is continuously calibrated by the non sensitive but very pre cise measurement technique BETA The mass collected on the filter tape is determined by the radiometric measurement The calculated mass is then related to a defined and actively regulated sampling volume thus determining the particulate mass concentration 6 5 Assessment Testing was carried out in compliance with the minimum requirements stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The calculated mass is related to a defined and actively regulated sampling volume thus de termining the particulate mass concentration Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland oe ait Pollut Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 130 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 2 Equivalency of the sampling system The equivalency between the PM 9 sampling system and the reference method accord ing to EN 12341 T5 shall be demonstrated Note Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of th
366. he inlet of the instrument By reviewing the top view drawing of the instrument Figure 2 3 the roof flange must be centered in direct alignment with the 5 8 inch OD tube entering the 5030 instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Setup 17 3 4404 168 4255 i J so 1273 i T E 223 568 0 25 0 635 0 Figure 2 4 Model 5030 Top View inches millimeters Heater Once the x y coordinates of the instrument and roof flange system are established and a waterproof flange system has been installed perform a dry run by attaching the heated sample tube on top of the 5030 base If the heated tube protrudes through the roof flange either the instrument should be lowered or an elongated PVC sleeve and cap system should cover the heater while maintaining a waterproof seal However for the remainder of this description it is assumed the heater will fit within the ceiling height of the air monitoring station Based on the vertical height requirements use additional 5 8 inch OD stainless tubing and connectors to make up the difference between the desired inlet height and the top of the heater Additional routing is necessary for the ambient T RH sensor assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 11 Installation Setup Ambient Inlet PM or PMs Ambient T RH T Fitting Sensor Assembly Tripod Adapter T RH Sensor Cable Tripod
367. he limit value for the annual average Thermo Fisher Scientific has commissioned TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH to perform of a suitability test of Model 5030 SHARP measuring system for component sus pended particulate matter PMo 5s e Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Performance criteria for performance tests of automated ambient air measuring systems Point related measurement methods for gaseous and particulate air pollutants September 2010 or June 2002 1 e Standard VDI 4203 Part 3 Testing of automated measuring systems Test proce dures for point related ambient air measuring systems for gaseous and particulate air pollutants September 2010 or August 2004 2 e Standard EN 14907 Ambient air quality Standard gravimetric measurement meth od for the determination of the PM25 mass fraction of suspended particulate matter German version EN 14907 2005 3 e Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods English version of January 2010 4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland j Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 16 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMzs Report No 936 21209885 F The measuring system Model 5030i SHARP is a synchr
368. he maximum deviation at zero point was 2 4 g m in relation to the previous value and 2 2 g m in relation to the start value and is therefore within the permissible limits of Bo 2 ug ms The values obtained during the sensitivity drift tests amount to a maximum of 2 9 in rela tion to the previous value for PMo 5 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 24 presents the values obtained at zero concentration and the calculated deviations in relation to the previous value and to the start value in g m Figure 35 to Figure 36 presents a graph of the zero point drift during the entire test Table 25 shows the deviations of the measured values from the respective previous value in Figure 37 and Figure 38 presents a graph of the drift of the measured values in relation to the previous value 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 119 of 424 Table 24 Zero point drift SN 1 amp SN 2 test with zero filter SN1 SN2 Measured Deviation from Deviation from Measured Deviation from Deviation
369. he measured values can be obtained through different output paths analogue digital Ethernet 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control A Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 37 of 424 3 3 AMS scope and set up The measuring system comprises the PM25 sampling inlet the heated sampling tube dy namic heating system DHS the optional extension tube the ambient air sensor including radiation protection shield the vacuum pump the nephelometer module SHARP optics module the central unit SHARP beta module identical in design to the 5014i measuring system see test report 936 21209885 H including glass fibre filter tape the respective con nection lines cables and adapters roof bushing with flange and a manual in German Figure 6 Model 5030i SHARP SHARP optics modules top SHARP beta module bot tom 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 38 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the compo
370. he measurement interface board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Detector Assembly Replacement 4 Disconnect plumbing 5 Remove four mounting screws and remove proportional valve assembly 6 Replace the proportional valve assembly by following the previous steps in reverse 7 Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Unhook Tubing from Measurement Head Unfasten Screws 4 Unhook Tubing from Rear Panel Unhook Connector from SS Measurement Interface a Board Beta 1 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Proportional Valve Detector Assembly Use the following procedure to replace the detector assembly Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Detector assembly Hex driver 4 mm Safety glasses 7 34 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Assembly Replacement WARNING The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing the detector assembly the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glassed must be worn during this replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the USNRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 pCi A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified representatives A If the equipment is operated in a man
371. he new value for flow span based on the corrected flow entered The following example sets the new value for flow span based on the corrected flow to 17 2 LPM Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 38 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Send set cal flow span 17 2 Receive set cal flow span 17 2 ok set cal vac pres span value This command automatically sets the vacuum span based on the vacuum pressure entered at the time of calibration The following example successfully sets the new value for vacuum span based on the vacuum pressure to 120 5 mmHg Send set cal vac pres span 120 5 Receive set cal vac pres span 120 5 ok set cal vac flow offset This command automatically triggers the filter change and sets the new value for vacuum and flow offset The following example successfully sets the vacuum and flow offset Send set cal vac flow offset Receive set cal vac flow offset ok coef pm This command reports PM coefficient The following example reports that the PM coefficient is 1 200 Send coef pm Receive coef pm 1 200 set coef pm value This command sets the PM coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the PM coefficient to 1 200 Send set coef pm 1 200 Receive set coef pm 1 200 ok coef sharp This command reports SHARP coefficient The following example reports that th
372. head during a filter tape change After the measurement head is opened this motor is used to advance the filter tape a fixed amount prior to initiating another beta attenuation event on a fixed sample spot Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Board External Solenoid Pump Intake T Fitting Firmware Instrument Control Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Firmware This PCB assembly is mounted on the floor plate and has three pressure sensors attached The pressure board is used to measure the barometric pressure differential pressure across the orifice and vacuum under the filter tap All tubing attached to the pressure board is numbered in case of the need to swap out this board The external solenoid is used to permit the pump to either exhaust normally or to deliver filtered air to the instrument during the nephelometer zero The pump intake T fitting provides excess air specifically for periods of nephelometer zeroing The processor firmware tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument control e Monitoring signals e Measurement calculations e Output communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with t
373. hermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Roof Flange Assembly The flange design also has four holes that can be used to secure the flange to the roof surface by the use of carriage bolts washers and nuts The length of the carriage bolts depends on the thickness of the roofline Figure 9 6 shows a picture of the roof flange that is used with this assembly Figure 9 6 Securing the Roof Flange Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 9 9 Instrument Preparation Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 10 Model 5014 to 5030 Upgrade Procedures This chapter describes the 50147 to 50307 upgrade procedures For details see the following topics Instrument Preparation on page 10 1 SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation on page 10 2 Radius Tube Adapter Installation on page 10 5 SHARP External Valve Installation on page 10 7 SHARP Optics Assembly Installation on page 10 9 Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly on page 10 10 Model Label Change on page 10 11 Power On Instrument on page 10 11 Use the following procedure to prepare the instrument If upgrading at an installed site take the appropriate measures to secure the sample downtube and remove the instrument heater assembly and set aside From Instrument Panel select Main Menu select Instrument Controls and then Service Mode Toggle to Service Mode On From Instrument Panel select F
374. his replacement procedure The amount of C 14 meets the USNRC regulations as an exempt amount of radioactive source lt 100 pCi A The detector pre amp assembly has a power backup built in DO NOT OPEN caution handeling Backup power will dissipate after 8 hours A The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin can damage the detector A Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly amp If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component amp Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully amp Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it
375. hod shall be demonstrated according to chapter 9 5 3 2 to chapter 9 6 of the guidance doc ument Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods in the field test at least at four sampling sites representative of the future application The maxi mum expanded uncertainty of the systems under test shall be compared with data quality objectives according to Annex A of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 6 2 Equipment Auxiliary equipment described in Section 5 6 3 Performance of test The test was carried out at four different comparisons during field test Different seasons and varying concentrations for PM25 were taken into consideration Of the complete dataset at least 20 of the concentration values determined with the refer ence method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold according to 2008 50 EC 7 For PM25 the upper assessment threshold is at 17 g m At each comparison campaign at least 40 valid data pairs were determined Of the complete dataset 4 test sites 209 valid data pairs for SN 1 217 valid data pairs for SN 2 a total of 29 1 of the measured values are above the upper assessment threshold of 17 g m for PM 5 The measured concentrations were referred to ambient conditions 6 4 Evaluation Point 9 5 3 2 The calculation of the in between uncertainty of the reference devices Uret is carried out prior to the calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the candidates The in bet
376. hogonal regression u x random uncertainty of the reference procedure if value Ups which is calcu lated for using the candidates can be used in this test refer to point 6 1 5 4 9 Determination of uncertainty between systems under test ubs Algorithms for the calculation of ordinate intercept a as well as slope b and its variances by orthogonal regression are described in detail in annex B of 4 The sum of the relative residuals RSS is calculated by the following equation RSS yy a bx Uncertainty ucr is calculated for e All test sites and comparisons together e Each test site and comparison individually e 1 dataset with measured values PM2 5 2 18 g m Basis average values of the refer ence measurement Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that e The slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2 u b and e The intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 a lt 2 u a Where u b and u a are the standard uncertainties of the slope and intercept respectively calculated as the square root of their variances If these preconditions are not met the can didate method may be calibrated according to point 9 7 of the Guide refer to 6 1 5 4 11 Application of correction factors and terms The calibration shall only be applied to the full dataset 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right
377. ht Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 99 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 1 General The test is based on the minimum requirements of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Septem ber 2010 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The test is based on the minimum requirements of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 6 4 Evaluation Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 and VDI 4203 Part 3 were republished after an extensive revision with latest update September 2010 Unfortunately after this revision uncertainties and con tradictions remain regarding the concrete minimum requirements on the one hand and the general relevance of the test points on the other hand when testing particulate ambient air measuring devices The following test points require clarification 6 1 5 3 2 Repeatability standard deviation at zero point no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 3 Repeatability standard deviation at reference point not relevant for particulate devices 6 1 5 3 4 Linearity lack of fit not relevant for particulate devices 6 1 5 3 7 Sensitivity coefficient of surrounding temperature no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 8 Sensitivity coefficient of supply voltage no minimum requirement defined 6 1 5 3 11 Standard deviation
378. ially disturb the zero To evaluate the zero of the 5030i place a HEPA filter at the inlet for approximately five minutes or until the concentration has stabilized The nephelometer concentration should be 1 ug m If this is not the case the HEPA filter should be removed and a Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Setup Setup Inlet System nephelometer zero should be conducted After re zeroing the nephelometer repeat the zero check steps above Setting up this monitor includes siting the monitor per local government agency requirements creating a waterproof inlet system installation with vertical support connecting the inlet system to the instrument through the dynamic heater system connecting vacuum lines establishing datalogging setting and making the power connections When siting the inlet system it is best to first establish the instrument location and height within the air monitoring station From whatever chosen surface the instrument is to rest on rack or table top add approximately 24 inches to that height to allow for overall height of the 50307 monitor Next allow approximately 40 inches to attach the heated sample tube to the top of the 5030 via 5 8 inch OD tubing unions that use Teflon ferrules 2 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 2 3 Model 50307 Side View inches millimeters It is also important to locate the roof flange installation in vertical alignment with t
379. ic Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing SHARP RH Temp Sensor Replacement SHARP RH T EMP Use the following procedure to replace the SHARP RH Temp sensor Sensor Figure 7 26 Replacement T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the nephelometer from the base instrument 2 Remove the two side cover screws and remove cover 3 Disconnect the RH Temp connector from the SHARP MIB board TEMP RH 4 Remove the two socket head screws from the RH Temp board assembly from the upper optic chamber endplate 5 Remove the RH Temp gasket from the old RH Temp board assembly and add it to the new RH Temp board assembly 6 Slide in the new RH Temp assembly by following the previous steps 7 Calibrate the RH Temp sensor Refer to the Calibration chapter in this manual 7 46 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific SHARP Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific A Servicing SHARP Interface Board Replacement TEMP RH Socket head Screws 2 Figure 7 26 Disconnecting the RH Temp Connector Use the following procedure to replace the SHARP interface board Figure 7 27 and Figure 7 28 Equipment Required SHARP interface board Philip
380. ic electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect plumbing from the pressure board assembly Figure 7 10 Note the plumbing connections to facilitate reconnection 7 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Board Replacement 3 Disconnect the pressure board from the floor plate on the measurement interface board 4 Remove the four pressure board assembly retaining screws and remove the pressure board assembly Figure 7 9 Unhook Pressure Cable from Interface Board Press Board Remove Plumbing Remove Screws 4 Figure 7 9 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly 5 To install the pressure board assembly follow the previous steps in reverse Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Pressure Board Calibration Eevee PRESSURE SENSOR BD VAC FLOW AMB OPEN FORT OPEN PORT TO REAR PANEL DELTA PA PORT 1 TO REAR PANEL DELTA PA SWITCH PORT 1 TO PRIMARY MHEAD PORT 1 TO PRIMARY MHEAD PORT 2 Figure 7 10 Replacing the Pressure Board Assembly Plumbing Connection 6 Calibrate the pressure sensor Refer to the Pressure Board Calibration procedure that follows
381. ice Mode 7 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module a 2 Pa 2 2 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Press gt toreturn to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Replacement Parts Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Replacement Parts List Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for the Model 5030 major List subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 to identify the
382. ich have influence on the performance of the measuring system 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test It was tested whether the instrument software version can be displayed on the instrument The manufacturer was made aware that any change to the instrument software must be re ported to the test institute 6 4 Evaluation The current software version is not displayed on the instrument during switch on It can however be reviewed at any time by selecting the menu Diagnostics item Program Ver sions The test started in the year 2009 with the software version V00 05 41 114 The software was steadily enhanced and optimised during the course of testing At the beginning of the field test in January 2011 software version V01 00 01 197 was im plemented This version was used during the whole field test The software was updated to version V01 00 03 225 after conclusion of the regular field test and before starting the remaining laboratory tests This software version was as well installed during the additional comparison campaign Bornheim summer 2013 In the meantime the software version was set to the current version V02 00 00 232 due toa discontinuation of a processor board An overview of software changes can be found in Section 4 1General The reliability of the AMS was consistently increased with every change The changes intro duced up to version V02 00 00 232 are not expected t
383. ield index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 pm 3 baro 4 vac 6 pflow 8 ambrt 9 srh 11 ambtemp 12 brdtemp 13 ftemp 15 stemp Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 17 frol 19 beta 28 braw 29 araw 30 avgpm 32 mass 34 bzero 45 exfg 50 bref 52 cflg 53 aflg relay stat This command reports the current relay logic as normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status of all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The following example sets the rel
384. ifferent measurement sites with manageable ef fort The set up time is approximately 1 hour and the warm up time takes a minimum of ap prox 12 hours after the measuring system has adjusted to ambient conditions Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 83 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 5 Instrument design The instruction manual shall include specifications of the manufacturer regarding the design of the measuring system The main elements are Instrument shape e g bench mounting rack mounting free mounting Mounting position e g horizontal or vertical mounting Safety requirements Dimensions Weight Power consumption 6 2 Equipment A power consumption measuring instrument and a scale were used for this test 6 3 Performance of test The installation of the delivered instruments was compared with the description given in the manuals The specified power consumption was determined for a period of 24 h under nor mal operating conditions during field test 6 4 Evaluation The measuring system mus
385. ific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Instrument tested Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific 27 Forge Parkway Franklin Ma 02038 USA Test period June 2009 to September 2013 Date of report 20 September 2013 Report number 936 21209885 F Editor Dipl Ing Karsten Pletscher Tel 49 221 806 2592 karsten pletscher de tuv com Scope of report Report 173 Pages Annex Page 174 Manual Page 220 Manual Of 204 Pages Total 424 Pages 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx W A T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Li i de land Air Pollution Control recisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 4 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Blank page 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control 2 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 5 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Content 1 SUMMARY AND PROPOSAL FOR DECLARATION OF SUITABILITY ssosseseeeeeesn 13 LI SUMMA sssecererajenesdpatenereosiectadiedenssepeteneraee resmiewieconorer
386. ilter Tape and then Manual and select the BENCH to open From Instrument Panel select Diagnostics Instrument Configuration and change the DETECTOR configuration from BETA to SHARP Turn instrument power off with the measurement head in the open position Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 1 Model 5014 to 50301 Upgrade Procedures SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation 6 Unplug instrument from AC power source SHARP Connection Use the following procedure for SHARP connection bracket assembly Bracket Assembly installation Installation Locate the Connection Bracket Figure 10 1 and remove two screws and set aside 4 pin SHARP Connector 2 pin connector not used Figure 10 1 SHARP Optics Connection Bracket 2 Remove both sides of the Cover Remove the tape pick up spool Figure 10 2 by removing the thumb screw washer filter tape spacers o rings and rear filter support guide plate 10 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation STEPS 1 UNFASTEN THUMB NUT 2 SLIDE TAPE PICKUP SPOOL OFF 3 SLIDE TAPE ASSEMBLY OUT TO GAIN ACCESS TO SCREW AREA 4 4 FASTEN 2X SCREWS TO CONNECTION BRACKET THRU WALL PLATE 5 MAKE SURE CONNECTOR ORIENTATION CLOSER TO THIS EDGE Figure 10 2 Tape Pick up Spool Removal 3 Remove the two Philips
387. imes of the availability tests were defined by the start and end of the field tests at each test site All measurement interruptions e g due to system failures or mainte nance works were taken into account 6 4 Evaluation Table 16 and Table 17 show a summary of the operation maintenance and malfunction times The measuring systems were operated over a period of 313 measurement days see annex 5 This period includes a total of 22 days of zero filter operation audits and days which had to be rejected due to the change to zero filter see annex 5 Outages caused by external influences which cannot be attributed to the devices them selves were recorded on 10 March 2011 and 14 March 2011 power outage Since the AMS needs some hours for stabilising one day following the outages had to be discarded as well Furthermore SN 1 was switched off inadvertently on 26 April 2011 Therefore both the 26 and 27 April 2011 could not be evaluated An unintended switch off of SN 1 was also record ed on 3 May 2011 This time the system was down for a very short time so that the data of the following day did not have to be discarded On this account the total operating time is reduced to 306 days for SN 1 and 309 days for SN 2 The systems presented the following malfunctions SN 1 A malfunction of SN 1 was observed on 8 August 2012 at the test site Teddington summer It was however not noticed directly and the staff on site could not identify
388. ine which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 69 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition B 70 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual NO 21f Code_0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code_7 Code _8 Code_9 Code 10 Code 11 Lset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appe
389. ing range of 0 200 or 0 1000 g m is recommended Recommended measuring range 0 200 or 0 1000 ug m8 Upper limit of the certification range PM25 50 g m8 6 5 Assessment A measuring range of 0 10 000 g m is set by default It is possible to adjust other meas uring ranges The upper limit of the measuring range of the measuring system is greater than the respec tive upper limit of the certification range Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 90 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 3 Negative output signals Negative output signals or measured values may not be suppressed life zero 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The AMS was tested on its ability to display negative output signals in the laboratory and in the field 6 4 Evaluation The AMS can display negative values both on the front panel and over data outputs 6 5 Assessment Negative measured signals are displayed directly on the AMS and are transmitted correctly via the respectiv
390. instrument is set to power up in the local remote mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The following example sets the instrument to power up in remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Table B 10 Power Up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number Send program no Receive program no iSeries 50301 00 05 37 093 tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT set tz string This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen description in Chapter 3 Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example repor
391. ion gt Ambient RH 3 86 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu aa pe Phin Py Tit Rri Taic mF i i Pressure Vacuum The Pressure Vacuum Calibration submenu allows the user to view and Calibration calibrate the pressure sensor and vacuum flow sensor The pressure vacuum calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration Barometer Pressure The Barometer Pressure Calibration submenu is used to calibrate the Calibration barometer pressure offset span or reset default values e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres rt fool emj what Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 87 Operation Service Menu Calibrate Barometer The Calibrate Barometer Pressure Offset screen allows the user to calibrate Pressure Offset the pressure sensor at offset pressure Note The operator should use an independent barometer to measure the ambient pressure and enter the value on this screen before calibrating a e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Baro Pres Calibration gt Offset Calibrate Barometer The Calibrate Baromet
392. ion Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 10 Model 50301 SHARP measuring system Optics module Figure 11 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Model 50301 SHARP measuring system Beta module TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland 9 Air Pollution Control g Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 41 of 424 Figure 12 Model 5030i SHARP measuring system Systems 1 and 2 from right at measur ing station Figure 13 Vacuum pump type GAST Model 75R647 PN 110836 00 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 42 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The measuring system is operated through pushbuttons and an LCD display on the front side of the instrument Here
393. ir Pollut Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 96 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment The availability was 97 4 for SN 1 and 96 1 for SN 2 without test related outages or 90 2 for SN 1 and 89 0 for SN 2 including test related outages Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 16 Determination of availability without test related outages Sen Sime NT operano me iP a ft owein ipa fe Maintenance Jo 0 Table 17 Determination of availability including test related outages R N a Pa time 309 Maintenance incl zero fil ter operation 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 97 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 9 Instrument software The version of the instrument software to be tested shall be displayed during switch on of the measuring system The test institute shall be informed on changes in the instru ment software wh
394. ir Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 86 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Figure 33 shows a view of the rear side of the instrument with the respective measured value outputs Figure 33 Rear view of Model 5030i SHARP 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control gt s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 87 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 1 General The manufacturer s specifications in the instruction manual shall be by no means better than the results of the performance test 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The test results were compared with the specifications of the manual 6 4 Evaluation Deviations found on the first draft of the manual from the actual design were cleared 6 5 Assessment No differences between the instrument design and the descriptions given in the manual were detected Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presenta
395. ired a re calibration of the radiometric measurement using the foil set The cleaning of the sampling tube shall be paid attention to during the annual basic maintenance Further details are provided in the user manual Department of Environmental Protection Air Pollution Control Pr aie Kuido Tog V4 Dipl Ing Karsten Pletscher Dipl Ing Guido Baum Cologne 20 September 2013 936 21209885 F 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 173 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 8 Literature 1 Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Performance criteria for performance tests of automated ambient air measuring systems Point related measurement methods for gaseous and particulate air pollutants June 2002 amp September 2010 2 Standard VDI 4203 Part 3 Testing of automated measuring systems Test proce dures for point related ambient air measuring systems for gaseous and particulate air pollutants August 2004 amp September 2010 3 Standard EN 14907 Ambient air quality Standard gravimetric measurement method for the determination of the PM25 mass fraction of suspended particulate matter Ger man ver
396. is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Vacuum ERED EN EEE TE Sanat Beee Min and Max Vacuum The Minimum Vacuum alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum Limits vacuum alarm limit The minimum and maximum vacuum screens function the same way Note The maximum vacuum value should not be changes as this is also used as a protective feature for the instrument A e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Vacuum gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Alarms Menu Flow The Flow screen displays the current flow reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 mmHg to 40 mmHg If the flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Flow ip priori PIL Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Pressure Vacuum Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max ip priri Piet Flow Alarms The Flow Alarms submenu all
397. is command sets the nephelometer into an auto zero calibration routine The following example set this command Send set neph cal bkg Receive set neph cal bkg ok neph coef This command reports the nephelometer span coefficient set at the factory The following example reports that the nephelometer span coefficient is 388 000 Send neph coef Receive neph coef 388 000 set neph coef value This command sets the nephelometer span coefficient to user defined values to value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the nephelometer span coefficient to 250 00 Send set neph coef 250 Receive set neph coef 250 ok neph reset bkg This command will reset all measured background values to zero The following example sets this command Send set neph reset bkg Receive set neph reset bkg ok Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 42 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual neph restore bkg This command will restore the background values to the previous background values The following example sets this command Send set neph restore bkg Receive set neph restore bkg ok neph rh offset This command reports the nephelometer relative humidity sensor offset set at the factory The following example reports that the nephelometer relative humidity sensor offset is 7 3 Send neph rh offset Receive neph rh offset 7 3 set neph rh o
398. is report 6 2 Equipment Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable to PM25 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report 6 5 Assessment Not applicable to PM25 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 of this report 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 131 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 3 Reproducibility of the sampling systems The PM sampling systems of two identical systems under test shall be reproducible among themselves according to EN 12341 T5 This shall be demonstrated in the field test Note Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report 6 2 Equipment Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report 6 3 Pe
399. is shown as the byte value 0xCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the last data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read Holding Input Registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Functi
400. is the pressure differential across the orifice e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Pressure Vacuum Flow The Flow screen read only displays the current sample flow reading The flow is measured by the internal pressure board sensors e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Diagnostics Menu tOo Miker i Detector Status The Detector Status screen read only displays the current sample mass reading alpha counts and beta counts Note A mass value will only be calculated when the flowrate is within acceptable limits However when in Service Mode a mass value will be calculated if the pump is turned OFF A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Detector Status PU ba EE EE Nephelometer The Nephelometer Status screen read only displays the current Status 2ephelometer reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Nephelometer Status OPER EEE CRn The CRn screen read only displays the current CRn reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt CRn 3 62 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Input Readings Analog Input Voltages Digital Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed
401. is to collocate the inlet at the same height as other similar use inlets The Installation chapter discusses specific siting criteria In addition to using the optional inlets extending the sample downtube length is necessary using a rigid sample tube The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10 V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation chapter for information on attaching the cable to the Model 50302 SHARP Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Terminal Block and Cable Kits Terminal Block and Cable Kits Cables 9 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual connector board For associated part numbers refer to the Servicing chapter The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For associated part numbers refe
402. isher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 100 90 4 a SN1 Bornheim Winter f 80 4 A 70 4 af 60 4 A 50 4 F 40 4 Z PM 5 5030i Sharp pg m a s 20 K 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 55 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Bornheim winter 90 4 a SN2 Bornheim Winter A 80 4 f 70 4 u 60 4 f 50 4 ri PM 5 5030i Sharp ug m S 40 af 30 AL 20 5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 56 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Bornheim winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 163 of 424 100 90 a SN1 Teddington Summer 80 70 4 s 60 4 50 of PM 5030i Sharp yg m 40 4 Af 30 fp a 20 5 rare 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference yg m Figure 57 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Teddington sum mer
403. ital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of 0xFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function Code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response
404. ith PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 102 of 424 6 5 Assessment The investigations result in detection limits of 0 11 g m3 for system 1 SN 1 and 0 07 ug m8 for system 2 SN 2 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 18 Detection limit PM25 System SN 1 System SN 2 Number of values n 15 15 Mean of the zero values x pg m 0 02 0 03 Standard deviation of values s g m 0 05 0 03 Students Factor tn 1 0 95 2 14 2 14 Detection limit X g m8 0 11 0 07 Single values from the determination of the detection limit can be looked up in annex 1 of the appendix 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 103 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 3 Repeatability standard deviation at reference point The repeatability standard deviation at reference point shall not exceed the require ments of Table 2 in the certification range according to Table 1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The limit value or the alert threshold shall be use
405. ith commonly available tools 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 78 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment Maintenance works can be carried out with commonly available tools taking reasonable time and effort The semi annual filter tape change and the works described in points 7ff are to be performed while the system is on standstill only These works come up every six or twelve months In the meantime maintenance works are limited to the check of contaminations plausibility checks and possible status error messages Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results The maintenance works were carried out during the test in accordance with the instructions given in the manual No problems were noticed while following the described procedures All maintenance works could be performed smoothly with customary tools 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei nland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the
406. itions sample conditions and mass sensor data The status bar displays the time 24 hour format the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates that no parameter changes can be made from gt B 4 E The alarm bell ion indicates the front panel that an alarm is active The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode 3 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview The Run screen normally displays the current SHARP concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data Pressing and __ _ will scroll through the different Run screens PU ER ERR ET eh T hE RAGES EEE f PRETE EE LEY Status Bar Concentration lt Mass Units Status Bar ee Sa 6 J5 lt Status Bar Icons Ambient Conditions Run The Ambient Conditions Run screen displays the real time volumetric flow Screen rate at the inlet the ambient temperature the barometric pressure and the ambient relative humidity Status Bar Status Bar Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Firmware Overview Sample Conditions Run The Ambient Conditions Run screen displays the samp
407. its sesssesesesesesesseseereeerersrreresesse 3 72 Sample RA a ri yea or is a a E en 3 73 Min and Max Sample RH Limits ssesesesesesesesesssssererereeeesrrerrseseses 3 73 Ambient Temperat re makonen e o at 3 73 Min and Max Ambient Temperature Limits sssssesseseseseeeeeeeeeee 3 74 Flow Temperature norinni aises ieai iaaii aa 3 74 Min and Max Flow Temperature Limits n 3 75 Board Temperaturer aregon a a A RAS 3 75 Min and Max Board Temperature Limits 3 75 Pressure Vacuum Alarms ssesessesssssssesrsssesssesssesssisesrsesrseseerersesreres 3 76 Barometric Pressure coiilascsisagicvsetiveds tussnweiesavbarssanahauesadeasegedanereer 3 76 Min and Max Barometric Pressure Limits 0 0 seeeeseeseneeeeeeees 3 76 Vacuum suerte tceuteciatee a a a n a ete teense 3 77 Min and Max Vacuum Limits 3 77 FO a a ad alae Oa sea 3 78 Min and Max Flow Wirinttss 5 ahs ata cat ether 3 78 Flow Lae Stace aistnde tela cacared doe cde ccbei ates Rel acne ded noes tec ee 3 78 FloW iii asic Gagner tate 3 79 Min and Max Flow Limits s isce dive coeds anil hier tndedeect AudeieSeaee 3 79 Concentration Alaris 223 ses Padceohe Nace caedeaen eee seca Manger etice lan ceaer a 3 79 Ayerage PMen siie n ea a E a a 3 80 Min and Max Average PM Concentration Limits 0 0 0 3 80 Ayerage SHARP nsise e A caneauntawtunuetdes 3 81 Min and Max Average SHARP Concentration Limits 3 81 Average Nephelometer ssssseseeesesessesesesrsesesesrsrsrsrsrerrrerrerer
408. ity test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 62 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Parameterisation of the relative humidity threshold for the Dynamic Heating System DHS The Model 5030i SHARP measuring system uses a heated sampling system in order to pre vent the effects of condensation in the system especially in the nephelometer and filter tape The heater must also be designed in such a way that the potential risk of volatile parti cle loss is minimised The Dynamic Heating System DHS implemented in the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system ensures that the relative humidity of the air passing through the filter tape at the radiometric stage is kept well below the point at which the collected particles adhere together thus producing disrupting condensation effects Furthermore the relative humidity in the nephelometer is adjusted below the specified limit The system minimises the increase of internal temperature This ensures a negligible loss of semi volatile particle com ponents provided that the relative ambient humidity is maintained below the limit to which the heater is adjusted As that the relative ambient humidity rises above the threshold the applied heating is optimised to maintain the relative humidity threshold above the filter tape of the radiometric stage The DH System is adjusted
409. l min 2 5 of the flow rate between the flow rates measured by the instrument and by the external flow meter under application of the adapter proved to be appropriate parameters for monitoring the instrument s tightness The laboratory tests resulted in a maximum leakage lt 1 of the nominal flow rate of 16 67 I min for both candidates The tightness check must only be performed with the tightness check adapter and the de scribed procedure It can otherwise damage the instrument Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 33 contains the values determined during the tightness check Table 33 Results of the tightness check System s Pump vacu System s Pump vacu Ext flow me Difference of Related to measured um without measured um with ter s measured flow rates nominal flow value with adapter value with adapter value with with adapter rate out adapter adapter adapter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 143 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 Methodology of the equivalence check modules 5 4 9 5 4 11 According to the version of the Guide from J
410. lated for the uncertainty between systems under test Ups The graphical representation is displayed in Figure 41 to Figure 47 Table 34 Uncertainty between systems under test Ups for candidates SN 1 and SN 2 measured component PM25 Candidate Test site No of Uncertainty Ups values SN SN 1 SN2 All test sites 242 Single test sites 52 91 49 50 mer 82 winter a Classification over reference value 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR heinland Air Pollution Control x Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 147 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Model 5030i SHARP SN 1 SN 2 All test sites Raw data Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 yg m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 41 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMzs all test sites Model 5030i SHARP SN 1 SN 2 Cologne Winter Raw data o Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m
411. le 2 4 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Relay1_ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay9_ContactA 6 Relay3_ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6_ContactA 23 not used 12 Relay6_ContactB 24 24V 25 Pin Terminal Board 2 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board Figure 2 11 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices down and spacer Table 2 5 identifies the connector pins and associated signals See Detail A See Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 11 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Detail A Table 2 5 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog_In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog_In2 3 lOut2 15 Analog_In3 4 Isolated ground 16 Ground 5 lOut3 17 Analog_In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog_In5
412. le filter Screen temperature the sample filter relative humidity the differential pressure across the orifice and the vacuum under the filter tape Title Bar Status Bar lt Status Bar Icons m g Mass Sensor Data Run The Mass Sensor Data Run screen displays the real time beta counts during Screen attenuation and the initial beta counts from a fresh filter spot Title Bar Status Bar agp 3 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Hybrid Data Run Screen The Hybrid Data Run screen displays the mass concentration values from the rea time beta attenuation method PM and the real time nephelometer method NEPH These values are entered into the dynamic digital filtering algorithm to calibrate the nephelometer in real time Title Bar Thermo Fisher Scientific Status Bar Main Menu rip gui pi PME ba EE NEE The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration appears above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode later in this chapter e Use t Jand to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Press
413. le time of day to perform a mass calibration would be either early morning or late afternoon A The preferred method of mass coefficient calibration is the Auto Mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass Coefficient ERED CH PT it H WH mht PSPS Py AG Lf bi The Auto Mass Coefficient screen allows the user to conduct a mass calibration of the measurement head and will walk you through the process Use the following procedure to conduct a mass calibration 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Mass Calibration gt Mass gt Auto 2 Enter the SPAN foil value e g 1 328 pg using the keypad and press to save the foil value and to open the bench The beta attenuation chamber should now open WH nied Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 9 Calibration Calibration Procedure 3 Cut break the filter tape and remove from the bench Then insert the Foil Holder from the calibration kit and press while maintaining a slight sideward pressure on the filter holder 4 Insert the Null Zero foil with the label side up and press to proceed with the foil calibration or press to stop the foil Wi mh ivd DH mii Pinar Ai Lafin rri The auto zero procedure of mass will begin and last approximately 270 seconds When the zero is complete the beta attenuation measurement will remain closed and an average Beta count rate is displayed 5 Remove the zero null foil and i
414. librat ed using the values obtained for slope and or intercept of all paired instruments togeth er The fulfilment of the 5 criteria is checked in the following chapters In chapter 6 1 5 4 9 Determination of uncertainty between systems under test Up criteria 1 and 2 will be checked In chapter 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments criteria 3 4 and 5 will be checked In chapter 6 1 5 4 11 Application of correction factors and terms there is an exemplary evaluation for the case that criterion 5 cannot be fulfilled without the application of correction factors or terms 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland oe ait Pollut Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 144 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 9 Determination of uncertainty between systems under test ups For the test of PM25 measuring systems the uncertainty between the systems under test shall be determined according to chapter 9 5 3 1 of the guidance document Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods in the field test at least at four sampling sites representative of the future application 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment requir
415. lips screwdriver f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Ifthe instrument is mounted on a rack remove it from the rack 3 Unfasten the two screws 4 Lift cover in an upward direction 5 Replace the SHARP optics cover by following the previous steps in reverse 7 44 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Solenoid Valve Replacement External Use the following procedure to replace the external solenoid valve Figure Solenoid Valve Replacement ment Reauiret External solenoid valve amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord 2 Disonnect all vacuum tubing from the solenoid 3 Disconnect the solenoid electrical connector from the rear panel connector 4 Unfasten the two captive hardware screws from the rear panel 5 Replace the solenoid valve by following the previous steps in reverse To Outdoor Roof Flange Captive Hardware 2 To Pump Exhaust Connector Figure 7 25 Replacing the External Solenoid Valve Thermo Fisher Scientif
416. lity Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems published by the U S EPA Research Triangle Park NC 27711 can be consulted for detailed quality assurance guidelines Optional mass transfer standards are available from Thermo Fisher Scientific for performing an annual mass calibration However additional specialized equipment is needed to calibrate the Model 5030 for temperature relative humidity barometric pressure and volumetric flow The following equipment should be used e A thermistor or thermocouple thermometer capable of measuring ambient temperatures in a range of 20 to 50 C readable to the Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Pre Calibration Pre Calibration Calibration Procedure 4 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual nearest 0 1 C This thermometer should be referenced to within an accuracy of 0 5 C to NIST traceable precision thermometers Multiple thermometers may be used to cover the temperature range as long as each thermometer meets the accuracy and readability specifications described above e A barometer capable of measuring barometric pressure over a range of 600 to 800 mmHg 80 to 106 kilo Pascals kPa and readable to the nearest 1 mmHg At least once a year this barometer should be calibrated to within 5 mmHg of a NIST traceable barometer of known accuracy e Flow rate Transfer Standard FTS measurement equipment capable of calibrating or verifying
417. lity measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F filled Page 26 of 424 5 4 7 Constancy of sample volumet ric flow Tightness of the measuring sys tem Determination of uncertainty be tween systems under test ubs 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments 3 of the rated value All in stantaneous values of the sample volumetric flow shall be within a range of 5 of the rated value during sampling Leakage shall not exceed 1 of the sample volume sucked Shall be determined according to chapter 9 5 2 1 of the guid ance document Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods in the field test for at least two identical systems Determination of the expanded uncertainty of the candidates according to chapter 9 5 2 2ff of the guidance document Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx All determined daily averages present deviations less than 3 from the nominal value all instantaneous val ues deviate less than 5 The criteria specified by the manufac turer upon which the tightness check is considered passed maximum dif ference of 0 42 I min 2 5 of the flow rate between the flow rates measured by the instrument and by the external flow
418. llocated for lrecs and sreco to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logged data in memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of Irec and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 Irecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in the scratch pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 1 in the scratch pad is set to index number 3 which is for the variable PM concentration pressure Send sp field 1 Receive sp field 1 3 PM set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where valu
419. llowing installation procedures for the Model 5030 describes packaging lifting the instrument unpacking the instrument setup and installation including the sample tube and pump and attaching the analog and or digital outputs to a recording device The installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures for installing the instrument e Packaging and Transport on page 2 1 e Lifting on page 2 2 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 2 e Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures on page 2 3 e Setup on page 2 10 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 17 e Startup on page 2 22 e Data Content on page 2 23 e Shutdown on page 2 23 e Important Tips on page 2 23 Packaging and The Model 5030 instrument power cord and operator manual are Transp ort shipped in an ISTA 2A certified packaging and all other items accessories are shipped separately The ISTA 2A certified packaging is comprised of the instrument within an inner box which is secured within an outer box using foam end caps and corner bracing In this configuration the packaging is ready for shipping by carrier domestically and internationally Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Lifting Lifting Unpacking and Inspection 2 2 Mod
420. log3 17 TTL_Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL_Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL_Input5 10 Analog ground 22 TTL_Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL_Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific D O Terminal Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 2 9 See Table 2 3 for channels and pin connections O 0000000000000000 00 oO000000000000000000 Figure 2 9 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 2 3 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 PM 2 33 3 AVG PM 3 15 5 NEPH 4 34 7 AVG NEPH 5 17 9 SHARP 6 36 11 AVG SHARP Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply 4 Figure 2 10 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 4 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 19 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A See Detail B rj Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 10 D O Terminal Board Views Tab
421. lometer Zero Calibration 5 minutes Please use Port to access data download from the instrument Use the following procedure when shutting down the instrument 1 Turn the power OFF 2 Cover instrument ports when not in use DO NOT e Do not pressurize the monitor e Do not allow liquids to enter the sample port e Do not expose the instrument to excessive vibration or magnetic interference e Do not remove adjust the beta attenuation bench of the 50307 e Do not remove the C 14 radioactive source at any time Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 23 Installation Important Tips DO e Operate the instrument in a climate controlled environment 4 50 C e Set DHCP to ON when changing the IP address 2 24 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 10 e Integration Time on page 3 13 e 24 Hour Average on page 3 14 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 14 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 18 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 57 e Alarms Menu on page 3 66 e Service Menu on page 3 85 e Password Menu on page 3 103 Display The 320 x 240 pixels graphic
422. lrec srec format format command aa hours 01 to 23 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 30 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual bb minutes 01 to 59 oo month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output lrec or srec logged data The output format is determined by the set lrec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set lrec per and set srec per commands In the following example assume there are 740 lrecs currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Send lrec 5 Receive lrec 100 5 08 28 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 29 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 30 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac 260 000 pflow 52 000 ambrh 0 000 srh 0 000 ambtemp 32 000 stemp 41 000 fvol 0 000 cflg 00001F86 aflg OOOOFCOC 08 31 05 04 09 flags 00110000 pm 0 000 baro 0 000 vac
423. lter for supplying air free of suspended particles and its connection adapter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRhein land 2 Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 47 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F In order to check and if required calibrate the radiometric measurement the manufacturer provides a set of mass transfer standard foils This set comprises one null foil and two span foils The null foil has the same approximate mass as a clean filter spot and the span foil is a calibrated mass increase above the null foil Therefore the foils come in a set and must not be mixed with other sets Figure 17 Set with foil holder and test foils It is not possible to produce a reproducible signal for the sensitivity of the nephelometer us ing external test standards However the nephelometer is regularly flushed with zero air dur ing operation auto zero function as part of every filter change thus determining and docu menting the position of the zero point on a regular basis Since the nephelometer is continu ously calibrated with a very stable radiometric measurement a separate examination of the stability of the nephelometer s signal under operating conditions can
424. lue is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the barometric mass coefficient to 0 000630 Send set baro mass coef 0 000630 Receive set baro mass coef 0 000630 ok baro span This command reports the current barometric pressure span recorded at the time of calibration The following example reports that the barometric span is 1 0 Send baro span Receive baro span 1 0000 set baro span value This command requires to manually specifying the span value for the barometric pressure span where value is a floating point representation of barometric pressure span The following example successfully sets the barometric span to 1 023 Send set baro span 1 023 Receive set baro span 1 023 ok beta th This command reports the current reference beta threshold for the detector The following example reports that the beta threshold is 440 Send beta th Receive beta th 440 set beta th value This command sets the reference beta threshold for the detector to value where value is a floating point representation of the beta threshold The following example sets the beta threshold to 500 Send set beta th 500 Receive set beta th 500 ok bkg pm This command reports the current PM backgrounds The following example reports that the PM background is 4 g m Send bkg pm Receive bkg pm 4 000E 00 pg m3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration
425. lution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 85 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 7 Data output The output signals shall be provided digitally e g RS232 and or as analogue signals e g 4 mA to 20 mA 6 2 Equipment PC with iPort software 6 3 Performance of test The test was carried out using a PC with the software iPort via Ethernet The AMS was connected to a PC via Ethernet and the data were downloaded The AMS also offers the possibility of outputting analogue signals and measured signals or communicating via serial interface RS 232 RS 485 6 4 Evaluation The measured signals are offered as follows at the rear side of the instrument Analogue 0 0 1 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V selectable concentration range 0 20 or 4 20 mA selectable concentration range Digital Ethernet with iPort software RS 232 RS 485 interface 6 5 Assessment Measured signals are output as analogue signals in V or mA and digitally via Ethernet RS 232 RS 485 The connection of additional measuring and peripheral devices to the respective ports of the devices is possible e g analogue inputs Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A T VRheinland T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A
426. lyhalogenierten Dibenzo p Dioxinen und Dibenzofuranen bei Emissionen und Immissionen Probenahme von faserf rmigen Partikeln bel Emissionen und Immissionen Ermittlung von gas oder partikelf rmigen Luftinhaltsstoffen mit kontinuierlich arbeitenden Messger ten Bestimmung von Geruchsstoffen in Luft Kalibrierungen und Funktionspr fungen kontinuierlich arbeitender Messger te f r Luftinhaltsstoffe ein schlie lich Systemen zur Datenauswertung und Emissionsfern berwachung Eignungspr fungen von auto matisch arbeitenden Emissions und Immissionsmesseinrichtungen einschlie lich Systemen zur Datenaus wertung und Emissionsfern berwachung Feuerraummessungen Ermittlung der Emissionen und Immissionen von Ger uschen Ermittlung von Ger uschen und Vibrationen am Arbeitsplatz Akustische und schwingungs technische Messungen Im Eisenbahnwesen Bestimmung von Schallleistungspegeln von zur Verwendung im Freien vorgesehenen Ger ten und Maschinen nach Richtlinie 2000 14 EG und Konformit tsbewertungsver fahren Schallmessungen an Windenergieanlagen Ger uschemission Gerduschimmission Immissionsprognose auf der Grundlage der Technischen Anleitung zur Reinhaltung der Luft und der Geruchsimmissions Richtlinie und der VDI 3783 Blatt 13 Modul Immissionsschutz Die Akkreditierungsurkunde gilt nur in Verbindung mit dem Bescheid vom 23 01 2013 mit der Akkreditierungsnummer D PL 11120 02 und ist g ltig bis 22 01 2018 Sie besteht aus diesem Deckblatt der R
427. m summer 2013 Annex 8 Ambient conditions during the additional campaign Bornheim summer 2013 Appendix 2 Filter weighing procedure Appendix 3 Manuals 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVR hein land 2 Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 175 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Dakks A Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH Beliehene gem 8 Absatz 1 AkkStelleG i V m 1 Absatz 1 AkkStelleGBV Unterzeichnerin der Multilateralen Abkommen von EA ILAC und IAF zur gegenseitigen Anerkennung Akkreditierung I Die Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH best tigt hiermit dass das Priiflaboratorium TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH mit seiner Messstelle fiir Immissionsschutz Environmental Protection Am Grauen Stein 51105 K ln und seiner unselbstandigen Messstelle Robert Koch StraBe 27 55129 Mainz die Kompetenz nach DIN EN ISO IEC 17025 2005 und CEN TS 15675 2007 besitzt Pr fungen in folgenden Bereichen durchzuf hren Bestimmung Probenahme und Analytik von anorganischen und organischen gas oder partikelf rmigen Luftinhaltsstoffen im Rahmen von Emissions und Immissionsmessungen Probenahme von luftgetragenen po
428. m limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt Neph Temp RRS E hi ii Min and Max The Minimum Nephelometer Temperature alarm limit screen is used to Nephelometer change the minimum nephelometer temperature alarm limit The Temperature Limits minimum and maximum nephelometer temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt Neph Temp gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Alarms Menu ip gies PIL Nephelometer RH The Nephelometer RH screen displays the current nephelometer relative humidity value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 95 If the nephelometer RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt Neph RH Min and Max The Minimum Nephelometer RH alarm limit screen is used to change the Nephelometer RH Limits minimum nephelometer RH alarm limit The minimum and maximum nephelometer RH screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms gt Neph RH gt Min or Max ip priori PLP LED Current The LED Current s
429. m paired measurements under field conditions shall be de termined with two identical measuring systems by paired measurements in the field test It shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Sep tember 2010 Note This item cannot be evaluated according to the current versions of Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 and VDI 4203 Part 3 September 2010 when testing particulate meas uring systems due to the fact that a minimum requirement has not been defined By resolu tion of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 reference is made to the following requirement in the previous version of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 June 2002 The Reproduzierbarkeit reproducibility Rp of the measuring system shall be deter mined by parallel measurements with two identical measuring systems and shall be at least equal to 10 B shall be used as the reference value 6 2 Equipment The reproducibility was determined with the auxiliary equipment described in Section 5 6 3 Performance of test Reproducibility is defined as the maximum difference between two randomly chosen single values obtained under equal conditions This test was carried out with two identical systems operated simultaneously during the field test All measurement data obtained during the field test was evaluated 6 4 Evaluation The reproducibility is calculated as follows n R 1210 where U t8p tinogs and sp exe i e R Repro
430. m shall not ex ceed 180 s The difference between the re sponse time rise and re sponse time fall of the meas uring system shall not exceed 10 of response time rise or 10 s whatever value is larger 5 3 15 Difference be The difference between the Not applicable tween sample measured values obtained by and calibration feeding gas at the sample and port calibration port shall not ex ceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 5 3 16 Converter effi In the case of measuring sys Not applicable ciency tems with a converter the effi ciency of the converter shall be at least 98 5 3 17 Increase of NO2 In case of NOx measuring sys Not applicable concentration tems the increase of NO2 con due to residence centration due to residence in in the measuring the measuring system shall not system exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 5 3 18 Overall uncer The expanded uncertainty of By resolution of the competent Ger tainty the measuring system shall be man body see module 5 3 1 this determined The value deter test is not relevant for particulate mined shall not exceed the cor measuring systems Reference is responding data quality objec made to module 5 4 10 tives in the applicable EU Di rectives on air quality listed in Annex A Table A1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN
431. maximum average SHARP concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg SHARP gt Min or Max WH mri The Average Nephelometer screen displays the current average Nephelometer concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 10000 ug m or 0 to 10 mg m If the average nephelometer concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg Neph Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 81 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Average Nephelometer Concentration Limits Instant PM CHA Pit Hels pid The Minimum Average Nephelometer Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum average nephelometer concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum average nephelometer concentration screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms gt Avg Neph gt Min or Max The Instant PM screen displays the current instant PM concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 10 to 10000 pg m or 01 to 10 mg m If the instant PM concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in
432. may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual iii About This Manual Electrical Safety Certifications Alert Description use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Electrical S afety The product has been tested and has been documented to be in compliance Certifications with the following U S and Canadian safety standards UL Standard 61010 1 2004 2nd Edition ites CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 2004 2nd Edition Eh C IEC 61326 2 3 2006 c US Thermo Fisher Scientific certifies that this product operates in compliance Py with the EC Directive 89 336 EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immunity Specifically the equipment meets the requirements of EN 61326 1 1998 for Immunity and Emissions In addition the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards in accordance with EN61010 1 2001 Safety in fulfillment of EC Directive 73 23 EEC FCC Compliance Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules
433. measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Page 213 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 40 Stability of the control filters Control filter No Weighing No TM1 TM2 TM3 1 0 09257 0 09155 0 09110 2 0 09258 0 09155 0 09113 3 0 09260 0 09155 0 09115 4 0 09260 0 09157 0 09116 5 0 09262 0 09156 0 09117 6 0 09264 0 09157 0 09116 7 0 09262 0 09154 0 09114 8 0 09260 0 09156 0 09116 9 0 09262 0 09156 0 09113 10 0 09263 0 09160 0 09117 11 0 09263 0 09158 0 09118 12 0 09263 0 09158 0 09117 13 0 09267 0 09160 0 09118 14 0 09265 0 09157 0 09116 15 0 09266 0 09159 0 09119 16 0 09269 0 09162 0 09122 17 0 09268 0 09162 0 09121 18 0 09267 0 09161 0 09121 19 0 09266 0 09161 0 09118 20 0 09268 0 09160 0 09120 21 0 09264 0 09161 0 09117 22 0 09264 0 09159 0 09116 Average 0 09264 0 09158 0 09117 Standard de viation 3 2911E 05 2 4937E 05 2 8558E 05 rel standard de viation 0 036 0 027 0 031 Median 0 09264 0 09158 0 09117 lowest value 0 09257 0 09154 0 09110 highest value 0 09269 0 09162 0 09122 Marked in yellow average value Marked in green lowest value Marked in blue highest value 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR heinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Precisely Right Luftreinhaltung
434. mentation The Calibration submenus allow the user to view and calibrate the instrument All calibration submenus are visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in Chapter 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure RH Temperature All screens that appear in this chapter have been referenced in the previous Calibration lt hapter Ambient Temperature Using a NIST traceable thermometer as a reference collocated next to the ambient RH temperature sensor assembly measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 5030 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset This offset ZERO should now be entered in the screen below ERE CH perm WH mnie PS PHP ELSES Pi AG Lf bie Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more If it appears that the temperature has shifted into the wrong direction change the sign of your offset value Ambient Relative Using a NIST traceable hygrometer as a reference collocated next to the Humidity ambient RH temperature sensor assembly measure and compare three individual readings between both the reference and the 5030 response Taking an average of both sets of readings calculate the average difference between the two readings and record that as your offset
435. milar experiences during measurement campaigns in China the manufacturer suggested a change in the parameterisation of the relative air humidity threshold from 50 to 58 to solve the problem This would activate the heater only when the relative humidity exceeds 58 instead of 50 as in the previous campaigns The Teddington summer comparison campaign was subsequently repeated using the new parameters average vola tile content during this campaign 34 3 No problems demonstrating the equivalence dur ing this measurement campaign were detected after applying this change The results are presented in detail in Section 6 1 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments Table 6 and Annex 6 of this report present the results of the measurement campaigns with regard to content of volatiles in suspended particulate matter PM2 5 To qualify the necessary change of the threshold for the relative humidity to control the sam ple heating from originally 50 to 58 necessary due to the results of the campaign in Ted dington UK an additional campaign at one of the German sites with two candidate systems with settings of each 50 and 58 was performed decision of the 32 Expert discussion test reports of May 14 15 201 Table 2 gives an overview on the additional campaign The results of this campaign are shown in chapter 4 3 Field test from page 55 The tests were performed at the site Bornheim with the candidate systems
436. mparison candidate SN 2 with reference instrument rel humidity gt 70 all test sites measured component PM25 Comparison candidate with reference according to Guide Demonstration of Equivalence Of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods January 2010 Candidate Modell 50301 SHARP SN SN 2 Test site All test sites rH gt 70 Limit value 30 g m Status of measured values Raw data Allowed uncertainty 25 Slope b significant Uncertainty of b Ordinate intercept a not significant Uncertainty of a Deviation at limit value Uncertainty Uc s at limit value Combined measurement uncertainty wom Expanded measurement uncertainty Wom Status equivalence test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 137 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 6 Averaging effect The measuring system shall allow for formation of 24 h averages The time of the sum of all filter changes within 24 h may not exceed 1 of this averag ing time 6 2 Equipment A clock was required for this test 6 3 Performance of test It was tested whether the AMS allows the formation of daily averages 6 4 Evaluation By default the measuring system saves the meas
437. mperature RH cable assembly Please be sure the side panel has been removed for at least 60 minutes A 2 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific One Point Temperature One Point RH Sensor Thermo Fisher Scientific Verification Verification Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Figure 2 2 Model 5030 Sampling Room Air Under Stable Conditions Record the temperature sensor readings from the Model 50307 and compare to your NIST traceable thermometer Each of these measurements should be within 2 C tolerance of your NIST traceable thermometer Within this tolerance the temperature sensors have passed the acceptance test If the sensors are slightly out of tolerance 3 C the acceptance test should be classified as marginal If the sensor performance is outside this range please perform a temperature sensor calibration For more information about the temperature sensor calibration see the Calibration chapter Record the ambient RH sensor and nephelometer RH sensor readings from the Model 50307 and compare to your NIST traceable Hygrometer The Model 50302 RH sensors should compare within 2 RH tolerance of your NIST traceable hygrometer If the RH sensor performance is within this tolerance the acceptance test has passed Note The ambient temperature verification should be completed prior to performing the RH sensor verification due to a thermal compensation applied
438. mprises one null foil and two span foils The null foil has the same ap proximate mass as a clean filter soot and the span foil is a calibrated mass increase above the null foil Therefore the foils come in a set and must not be mixed with other sets The foil set is used for determining mass only A comparison campaign was carried out once at the beginning and once at the end of the test in order to determine the mass coefficient It is not possible to produce a reproducible signal for the sensitivity of the nephelometer us ing external test standards However the nephelometer is regularly flushed with zero air dur ing operation auto zero function as part of every filter change thus determining and docu menting the position of the zero point on a regular basis Information on the current and pre vious NEPH backgrounds can be retrieved from the instrument at all times Since the nephe lometer is continuously calibrated with a very stable radiometric measurement a separate examination of the stability of the nephelometer s signal under operating conditions can be omitted 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 80 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2
439. municating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the concentrations simultaneously The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and span values may be set by the user to any desired value All electronics operate from a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the all specified ranges External pumps and heaters all operate on 110 VAC An optional transformer is required if operating on the 210 250 range An on off switch controls all power to the analyzer and is accessible on the front panel The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies and a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel function keys and or over I O connections on the rear panel The motherboard sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital
440. n Control 7 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 71 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 100 e Not Outlier 90 5 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 80 4 1 to 1 Line zZ aouaIajay Wd PM 5 Reference 1 Figure 29 Grubbs test results for the PM2 5 reference method Bornheim summer 100 Not Outlier 90 5 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 80 4 1 to 1 Line z souaIajaY FIN PM Reference 1 Figure 30 Grubbs test results for the PM2 5 reference method Bornheim winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 72 of 424 100 Not Outlier 90 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 80 1 to 1 Line Z souaIajay Wd 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference 1 Figure 31 Grubbs test results for the PM25 reference method Teddington summer
441. n alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the average PM concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 mg m Send set alarm conc avg pm max 10000 Receive set alarm conc avg pm max 10000 ok alarm conc avg sharp min alarm conc avg sharp max These commands report the current 24 hour average SHARP concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the average SHARP concentration minimum is 0 0 pg m Send alarm conc avg sharp min Receive alarm conc avg sharp min 0 000E 00 pg m3 set alarm conc avg sharp min value set alarm conc avg sharp max value These commands set the 24 hour average SHARP concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the average SHARP concentration alarm maximum value to 10 000 pg m Send set alarm conc avg sharp max 10000 Receive set alarm conc avg sharp max 10000 ok alarm conc inst neph min alarm conc inst neph max These commands report the current 24 hour instant nephelometer concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the instant nephelometer concentration minimum is 0 pg
442. n body see module 5 3 1 this test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems Reference is made to module 5 4 10 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 129 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 1 General Testing of measuring systems for particulate air pollutants is carried out in compliance with the minimum requirement stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 Furthermore the particle mass concentration shall be related to a defined volume The relation to volume with respect to pressure and temperature shall be comprehensively described 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test Testing was carried out in compliance with the minimum requirements stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 It was tested whether the measured particulate mass concentrations are related to a defined volume 6 4 Evaluation Testing was carried out in compliance with the minimum requirements stated in Table 5 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The Model 5030i SHARP measuring system combines two different methods of measure ment nephelometry radiometry Here t
443. n the results 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 A TUVRheinland Genau Richtig Page 219 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F 20 20 D 150 pe O oi 100 9 a 50 0 50 20 D Oo 150 O Q N wo 7 O a 50 0 BBSBSBBSBEFEBSSRBRSSSREBERVPBBSBEFRBSBRBSSSSB ye Cp epaeaeaeaeeesetfsaeaesee2e2nnns BPanpBRBAL SES 9 c BeS88R8R BR 9 HR FT SRAEFBBR BEE EE 8 se g Range of Spread ug 5 Figure 63 Distribution for Emfab filters of A Pre spread weighed relative to the check weight and B Post spread weighed relative to the check weight 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 220 of 424 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Appendix 3 Manuals Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual Synchronized Hybrid Ambient Real time Particulate Monitor Part Number 108148 00 25Mar201
444. nally with a reliable deviation from the nominal value of 2 5 If this criterion is not met during operation the measuring system performs a filter change To determine the constancy of the sample volumetric flow the internal data regarding flow rate and pump vacuum information on filter load were recorded for the test site Cologne winter characterised partly by high concentrations and the flow rates were evaluated on a 24 h basis 6 4 Evaluation Average values standard deviations as well as maximum and minimum values were deter mined from the flow rate measured values 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 139 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment The results of the flow rate checks performed before testing at each field test site are pre sented in Table 30 Table 30 Results of flow rate checks Flow rate check before SN 1 SN 2 testing at l min Deviation l min Deviation Test site from nominal from nominal value value Cologne winter 16 33 2 04 16 44 1 38 Bornheim summer 16 48 1 14 16 51 0 96 Bornheim winter 16 66 0 06 16 68 0 06 Teddington summer 16 80 0 78 16
445. nc alarm setting Re zero Verify conc alarm settings Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the Connection electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 3 through Table D lagrams 6 7 to troubleshoot board level faults VOEXPANSION BOARD EPANSICNIO J1 MEASUREMENT DIGITAL OUTPUT TO SYSTEM BOARD DOTA ag 2 11Pn 8Pn 14 PLA i 14Pin LOD PSAP Hia oe DISPLAY RLPS PIB Jig PANEL 9Fin ARn 3Fin BOARD B 1OBASET 2 Sa L_ KEYPANEL EXPANSION RS485 J15 a MOTHER BOARD Hoy SPAREDATA ANALOGOUIPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 pn J alla gt 3Fin 3Fin s 2 n Pe POWER GOOD oe dia PJI RB Re 3Pn 3Pn 3Pin 24VDC REARPANEL AC POWER 24VDC ANUT 30m SUPPLY i AC FRONT PANEL FONERSN S O eS eet ae ce we gt 3Pn 1 1 a I TRANGFORVER 1 Ue ee ee 1 k inie QOVAC or 240VAC Chior 6 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams PJ34 ep BETA 1 DETECTOR PJ35 BETA 2 DETECTOR
446. nclude the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defective Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii
447. nd set instrument id 12 Receive set instrument id 12 ok layout ack This command reports the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 9 The following example reports that the instrument is configured to do nothing Send layout ack Receive layout ack 0 set layout ack value This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 9 Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok Table B 9 Set Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting to either 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked according to Table B 10 The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode The following example shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote locked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 59 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 60 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 according to Table B 10 If the
448. nd Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 69 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Sampling period EN 14907 defines a sampling period of 24h 1 h The sampling period was set to 24 h for all instruments during the entire field test 10 00 10 00 in Teddington and Cologne and 7 00 7 00 in Bornheim Data handling All paired reference values determined during the field tests were subject to statistical testing according to Grubbs 99 to prevent influences of clearly implausible data on the meas urement results Paired values identified as significant outliers may be discarded from the da ta pool as long as the critical value of the test statistic does not fall below the target The January 2010 version of Guide 4 stipulates that only 2 5 of the paired values may be identified as outliers and discarded During the Combined MCERTS and T V PM Equivalence Testing programme we agreed with our British partners not to discard any value measured by the candidates unless the im plausibility is attributed to technical causes Thus no values measured by the candidates were discarded during the entire testing period Table 12 shows an overview of the amount of paired values re
449. nd hybrid silicon photodetector to measure the intensity of scattered light in the presence of aerosol This assembly houses a nephelometer temperature sensor relative humidity sensor and PCB interface The primary measurement head uses a beta source and proportional alpha beta detector to measure the attenuation of beta particles by sampled aerosol across a glass fiber filter and to discriminate against any naturally occurring beta interferences from the daughter nuclides of alpha decay products This cylindrical tube houses a printed circuit board provides power to the proportional detector and amplifies the beta and alpha counts prior to being sent to the 50307 measurement interface board This small printed circuit board includes a photo interrupter to detect the closed position of the measurement head This is connected to a motor assembly used to open and close the measurement head This small printed circuit board is mounted onto a chopper wheel that measures the amount of filter tape advanced during a filter tape change The proportional valve is a proportional solenoid valve that is used as a means of flow control In response to the measured flow across a subsonic orifice the proportional valve will either partially open or close to make a flow adjustment in real time This motor is used to drive the cam to rotate By rotating the cam the measurement head lever arm is raised and lowered for opening and closing the measurement
450. nd now deliberately writes a response in every case 6 Several parameters are no longer displayed when the unit is password locked 7 Remove blanket rejection of set for the sp field Clink command The reliability of the AMS was consistently increased with every change The changes intro duced up to version V02 00 00 232 are not expected to affect the performance of the AMS significantly The suitability test comprised a laboratory test for determining the system s performance characteristics and a field test carried out over several months at different locations All determined concentrations are given as g m operating conditions The report in hand provides a description of the minimum requirement for each test item in accordance with the number and wording used in standards 1 2 3 4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 54 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 4 2 Laboratory test The laboratory test was carried out with two identical instruments of the type Model 5030i SHARP with serial numbers SN 1 and SN 2 In conformity with standards 1 2 the following performance criteria w
451. nd risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Description DANGER A hazard is present that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A Alert WARNING A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A CAUTION A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A f Equipment Damage A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert Description WARNING The Model 5030 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert A CAUTION f Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A The detector assembly should be replaced by a qualified technician knowledgeable in dealing with radiation precautions By removing the detector assembly the C 14 radioactive source is partially exposed Safety glasses must be worn during t
452. nd the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms gt Alpha Min and Max Beta The Beta Alarms screen allows the user to view the minimum and Alarms maximum alarm parameters Acceptable alarm limits range from 5000 to 20000 If the beta count reading goes beyond the maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Detector Alarms gt Beta amga PME TY Saad fat ip gies PLP Nephelometer The Nephelometer Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the Alarms nephelometer alarm parameters Board status indicates that the power supplies are working and connections are successful The nephelometer 3 68 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu temperature nephelometer RH LED current and reference detector voltage all have adjustable alarms pre set in the factory e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Neph Alarms Wi moh Nephelometer The Nephelometer Temperature screen displays the current nephelometer Temperature temperature value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 60 C If the nephelometer temperature reading goes beyond the minimum or maximu
453. ne Winter 18 4 2 5 13 8 21 9 28 3 1011 37 0 3 4 109 0 0 62 5 8 2011 12 3 Tr 13 7 22 1 28 6 1013 34 7 4 1 97 0 0 63 7 25 2011 Bornheim Summer 11 6 172 22 8 1001 73 8 0 8 193 1a 64 7 26 2011 11 8 2 9 24 1 17 0 20 6 1006 78 4 11 259 0 0 65 7 27 2011 14 0 4 2 29 9 17 3 24 3 1010 84 8 0 7 229 51 7 66 7 28 2011 18 2 5 1 27 9 17 7 24 5 1011 85 6 0 6 228 5 9 67 7 29 2011 9 0 3 5 39 0 16 9 20 2 1011 76 2 2 9 299 0 0 68 7 30 2011 1 6 14 5 16 1 1010 80 4 2 3 288 0 0 69 7 31 2011 9 7 1 2 12 6 13 4 16 6 1009 76 2 0 9 244 0 0 70 8 1 2011 12 1 r 13 8 19 1 26 1 1008 68 1 0 9 177 0 0 71 8 2 2011 10 2 1 4 13 4 23 2 30 0 1007 60 8 1 5 143 0 0 72 8 3 2011 16 8 2 6 15 8 19 7 24 1 1006 82 9 LS 195 5 4 73 8 4 2011 8 6 3 2 36 8 22 3 29 2 1005 71 6 0 8 204 3 6 74 8 5 2011 9 6 1 8 18 3 20 6 25 0 1004 75 8 i Pal 221 0 6 75 8 6 2011 A 19 3 25 4 996 85 0 1 4 171 Tale 76 8 7 2011 3 0 1 3 43 5 17 8 22 4 998 64 0 1 5 209 1 8 7 8 8 2011 3 4 0 2 6 8 15 5 18 4 1000 74 7 25 219 6 2 78 8 9 2011 3 0 0 1 4 8 13 8 17 8 1012 76 8 27 265 14 8 79 8 10 2011 5 8 2 3 38 9 18 0 22 4 1013 57 5 1 3 224 0 0 80 8 11 2011 5 3 1 3 25 3 20 9 25 5 1004 53 8 1 2 220 0 3 81 8 12 2011 3 4 1 0 29 7 18 5 2st 1003 78 9 a Pea 228 21 82 8 13 2011 2 0 20 1 23 7 1001 77 0 0 7 185 0 0 83 8 14 2011 3 1 0 1 3 8 17 4 19 9 1000 86 2 11 219 17 4 84 8 15 2011 5 7 0 9 15 7 17 9 22 4 1009 71 8 1 2 230 0 0 85 8 16 2011 6 0 1 6 27 6 19 1 23 9 1010 69 0 0 7 190 0 6 86 8 17 2011 14 3 3 1 21 6 RIA 27 8 1007 73 8 0 7 2
454. nent suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F As sampling inlet a PMz25 inlet manufacturer Digitel type DPM2 5 01 00 16 which serves as pre separator for suspended particles sucked in from outside air is used The instruments are operated at a constant volume flow rate adjusted to 16 67 l min 1 0 m h It is also pos sible to use PM and PM sampling inlets instead Nozzles 8 Baffle Plate Safety Snap Lock Tube d 16 14 Figure 7 European PM25 sampling inlet for Model 5030i SHARP The heated sampling tube approx 0 9 m long and the optional extension tube approx 1 8 m long connect the sampling inlet to the actual measuring system The adjustment of the sample heater dynamic heating system DHS is carried out as described in Section 3 2 Functionality of the measuring system 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control A Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 39 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 8 Heated sampling tube DHS Figure 9 Model 5030i SHARP measuring system 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 40 of 424 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollut
455. ner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION The detector window is very fragile Handle with great care and do not wipe or touch the window Furthermore do not touch the solder cable connection electrode with your bare fingers The oils from your skin can damage the detector A Safety glasses must be worn while replacing the detector assembly A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the SHV connector from the detector amplifier assembly and slide throught the wall plate 3 Loosen both detector mounting screws and slowly lift the detector assembly 4 Install the new detector assembly by following the previous steps in reverse while taking special care not to puncture the mylar 5 Calibrate the detector assembly Refer to the Detector Calibration procedure on page 4 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Flow RTD Replacement Unhook SHV Connector ll o o Unfasten Screws 2
456. ng example shows that the nephelometer is in sample mode Send neph mode Receive neph mode sample neph prev bkg This command reports the previous nephelometer background values stored on the nephelometer interface board The following example reports the previous nephelometer auto ranging background values Send neph prev bkg Receive neph prev bkg 0 00272 0 00272 0 01094 0 04357 0 17422 0 65535 set reset tape counter This command resets the tape count to zero Send set reset tape counter Receive set reset tape counter ok sample rh This command reports the sample RH in percent The following example reports that the sample RH is 20 Send sample rh Receive sample rh 20 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Datalogging Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging tape counter This command reports the number counts which corresponds to the filter tape movement The following example reports that the tape count is 250 Send tape counter Receive tape counter 250 vac pres This command reports the current vacuum pressure for the detector in mmHg The following example reports that the vacuum pressure is 100 mmHg Send vac pres Receive vac pres 100 0 mmHg clr records This command will clear all lrecs and srecs that have been saved Send clr records Receive clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The
457. ng term drifin ashe ste oles late Base thee ieee eae 117 5 3 13 Short term AON ccs ccascacranctecenenaciesenacaimieteniimess Sa ietsuseienimaeteaadersteneiecetmieaeameacpeny 123 5 3 14 Response time aaj sas sch a scceradecca soci ebacedarecegsachaucatuan heer eseaatausassaieaciuceeeiauieiaactice 124 5 3 15 Difference between sample and calibration Port c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeees 125 5 3 16 Converter efficiency siccncccccncccarsenseursndeenendeuaenstenineeenceenentenis dxeeonereceneceeenescnnbete 126 5 3 17 Increase of NO concentration due to residence in the measuring system 127 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 7 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 18 Overall uncertainty ssssseeseeesssesererrrrresstererrrrrtrsserttttrrrrrnntresetnttrnnnneseennnee 128 6 1 AA General oree e a E a a EE E 129 6 1 5 4 2 Equivalency of the sampling system ccccceeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeetesensaaaeaaeaes 130 6 1 5 4 3 Reproducibility of the sampling systems ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeees 131 6 1 Oe 6 e212 eee meee eee eee ee ee eee eee eer ee re ee 132 6 1 5 AS CrOSS SOriSitivity aicese
458. nrrrnnrrsseresrrennnrnnnrnserrenne 91 5 2 5 Operating States iieiea EE E EAEEREN E NA EEE EE ENE ENAERE E 92 5 2 6 Switch Over Senne ee ee mee ee ere ree eee eee eee ae 93 5 2 7 Maintenance interval ia secs cteadentest cnet caan ceases nsne dean cianteatnviettncecntndeaniantucnamctass 94 5 28 Availability annn a a E A 95 5 2 9 Instrument software ssssseesseesseseetrrrrtresttttrrnnnrtsttrssttttttrnnnnesetnnttnn nense nenne 97 5S3 CARING ial rne AEE E E E E E S 99 5 3 2 Repeatability standard deviation at zero point sssssseresessseserrrrrresssrrrrrnn 101 5 3 3 Repeatability standard deviation at reference POINt ccceeeeeeetettereeeees 103 5 3 4 Linearity lack of fit oiciacerctcetneiesereateuideee ds dreaaetertatneeddedanld Geceneeeandneaeenrets 104 5 3 5 Sensitivity coefficient of sample gas pressure ssssssresesssererrrrrrrsserrrrrrrn 105 5 3 6 Sensitivity coefficient of sample gas temperature c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 106 5 3 7 Sensitivity coefficient of surrounding temperature cceeeeeeeeesnteeeeeeees 107 5 3 8 Sensitivity coefficient of supply voltage cceceeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeetteteteeeenaaees 111 5 3 9 Cross sensitivity aa ths ees te tc eet ee eee 113 5 3 10 Averaging effect cecicqaccterereexeietenencietdnmraceileceneueneiereinnicetel el eeemeieuetenciers 114 5 3 11 Standard deviation from paired measureMent cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 115 5 312 Lo
459. nsert with the Span foil e g 1328 ug and press to begin the span calibration or press to stop the foil 4 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure The span foil calibration procedure is now active and after another 270 seconds the calibration procedure should end whereby a new Mass Coef value is shown and the percent difference is shown from the last foil calibration to the current calibration This percent difference can also be used to directly audit the mass coefficient value since a percent difference in a mass coefficient is the same percent mass difference overall 6 After the span calibration the screen will ask you to press to accept the new calibration Otherwise press to keep the old Mass Coef value Remove the span foil and press 4 The bench will now open Remove the filter holder replace the filter tape and press to confirm the calibration routine has now been competed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 11 Calibration Calibration Procedure Detector Calibration The Detector Calibration submenu is used to view and set the detector calibration The detector calibration screen is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician
460. nsity N particle number concentration Cm mass concentration f d particle size distribution function A illumination wavelength r distance of scattered particles to detector inio Lorenz Mie scattering functions alternately dependent on the relation of particle size to wavelength and on the refractive index f A combined dependence of wavelengths on emitter and detector F 0 angular scattering geometry of the optical system The high sensitivity of the nephelometer is thus accompanied by an overall dependence of the measured signal on the size of particles This means that nephelometric measuring sys tems are in contrast to gravimetric reference measurements prone to have difficulties caused by shifts in response 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 30 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The nephelometer is therefore calibrated on site with a HEPA filter zero point and test aer osols for reference with PM25 Sharp Cut Cyclone connected upstream Zero point checks can be performed anytime with help of the HEPA filter at the instrument inlet Furthermore the sensitivity of the nephelometer is continuousl
461. nstruction Manual 2 3 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Acceptance Test 2 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual program Furthermore it is an opportunity to assure that the monitor is operating according to the manufacturer specifications After acceptance testing a completed monitoring installation will require final volumetric flow rate verification Prior to installing the Model 50302 you should perform the acceptance testing procedures These tests are conducted to evaluate the out of box performance of the instrument perform any necessary calibrations prior to final site installation and familiarize the user with the menu structure Use the following procedure to perform the bench acceptance test Equipment Required Model 50302 Power Cord Ambient Temperature RH Cable Assembly Vacuum Pump Assembly Flow Adapter Assembly NIST traceable Thermometer NIST traceable Hygrometer NIST traceable Barometer NIST traceable Manometer s NIST traceable Volumetric Flow Transfer Standard Do not use the heated sample tube assembly at this point 1 After unpacking the instrument place the Model 50303 and accessories onto a table or bench located within a stable indoor environment Remove the side panel cover and inspect the filter tape Leave cover OFF until after acceptance testing has been completed Note Prior to continuing with acceptance testing the instrumentation and accessories should have suffi
462. nstrument that can make accurate mass concentration measurements of PM PM25 and PM o However with all electronic instruments the accuracy of the measurements depends on proper calibration In general terms calibration also called standardization is the process that establishes the relationship between sensor output signals and the parameter the operator is attempting to measure The 5030 instrument uses sensors that measure temperature humidity pressure and radiation This chapter describes the procedures for performing the necessary sensor calibrations This chapter is also a follow up to the Acceptance Testing outlined in the Installation chapter and a continuation of the menu display descriptions in the Operation chapter Each instrument is calibrated and tested for accuracy at the factory The mass calibration is conducted with a set of NIST traceable mass calibration foils The radiation detector is calibrated against certified check sources for beta and alpha emissions The temperature relative humidity pressure and flow rate are all calibrated against NIST traceable standards It is recommended that the instrument be calibrated once per year and encounter quality checks on a periodic basis in accordance with the users specific quality assurance project plan For example volumetric flow checks on a two week basis are common in some air monitoring agencies and with full scale quarterly audits for flow and mass The Qua
463. nt Pre DaTAliO Mixa caksics seavecensens tet snastyssnrenvdes sosinrbenccared vise tenn 10 1 SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation cceeeeeeeee 10 2 Radius Tube Adapter Installation s i 9 asvaiioheteaenenveine 10 5 SHARP External Valve Installation 20 55 4 Ace acae eee 10 7 SHARP Optics Assembly Installation j 22 1024 canines 10 9 Upgrade of the Heater Tube Assembly 10 10 Model Label Change iiinis 10 11 Power On INSU MICH sicions ioaea 10 11 VCC es aa A 1 C Link Protocol CommandS nnnnn1rrrreereerrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrrrrrrnrne B 1 Instrument Identification Number ses4 0it ioe eae elec B 1 Commands sste i oaeaeei aian dened ah SS etl B 2 Commands List sonans eiea rere a aN EE EEA S A a B 3 Meas tementS oieta o A a EES B 11 Aarm S A n O ae R ae B 14 Diagnostics seesi iiris iiaii iiai iii B 23 VAAL TN Oe enganes eate Ee coe cae E a a s ES B 27 Calibrations awteciieivivatiiacey Nesa SRE Era K EE aa EATE ENEE EREE NE B 34 Keys Displays ona ea saad iee R EEEE aeaa B 44 Measurement Configuration sissiesiaicacstasstiectiineischeeaneeeneatassdacdastieede B 45 Hardware Configuration ssn tees 228 ee ENE lene atone B 51 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Communications Configuration cstepdcstcccaenetiess dectangetunctiercaneeace cs B 54 W O Configuration sssini iad aini a Naaa B 61 Record Layout Definition s sssssssesssssesssesssseststersesssestsrtersesesseseseeee B 66 Format Specifier for A
464. nt air quality measuring system Page 68 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Assessment summary To verify the equivalence of the data between both candidates with the threshold set for the heating of 50 respectively 58 a comparison campaign was performed at one of the German sites The gathered data sets SN 1 with 58 setting SN 2 with 50 setting were subjected to an equivalence test The assessment led to the following results 1 The uncertainty between the two candidate systems is 1 53 g m and thus is below the permissible 2 5 ug m gt 2 The expanded uncertainty of the data corrected by the slope of 1 068 is for SN 1 58 and SN 2 50 below the permissible 25 3 The combined evaluation of the 4 original data sets of suitability testing with the addi tional 5 data set Bornheim summer 2013 leads as well to a compliance with the equivalence criteria according to the guide 4 Hence the verification of the equivalence of the candidate systems with a threshold for the rel humidity of 58 was proved also for a German site Therefore the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system can alternatively as well be operated with a relative humidity threshold of 58 in particular for any site where a significantly high volatile content is expected 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinla
465. number representing barometric pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the barometric pressure alarm maximum value to 800 0 mmHg Send set alarm baro pres max 800 Receive set alarm baro pres max 800 ok alarm bench status This command reports the current status of the bench as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the bench status is OK Send alarm bench status Receive alarm bench status ok alarm beta count min alarm beta count max Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual These commands report the current beta count alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the beta count alarm minimum value is 5000 Send alarm beta count min Receive alarm beta count min 5000 alarm board temp min alarm board temp max These commands report the current board temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the board temperature alarm minimum value is 0 C Send alarm board temp min Receive alarm board temp min 0 0 degC set alarm board temp min value set alarm board temp max value These commands set the board temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing board temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the board temperature alarm maximum value to 38 C S
466. o Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options EXTENDER BRACKET OPTION 2111 343 iN g car BAR NUT SHOULD BE 17a ASSEMBLED WITH OFF CENTERED g TAPPED HOLE AWAY FROM INSTRUMENT AS SHOWN Ah f Rgs RACK MTG RAIL So REAR MIG BRACKET INSTRUMENT CASE FOR SUDES RACK SUDE P N 5225 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual 9 7 Optional Equipment Roof Flange Assembly Roof Flange An optional roof flange assembly can be used with flat roof applications as shown in Figure 9 5 This roof flange assembly uses 3 PVC tubing Assembly fittings and roof flange with gasketing The installer must assure a water tight installation when using a flange of this design A 2 1 2 circular hole should be drilled through the roofline of the the enclosure or building if it has a flat roof The roof surface should be clean and swept of all debris The flange should be centered over the hole that has been drilled A generous bead of RTV or silicone sealent should be applied to the circumfernce of the ponts shown in Figure 9 5 t 7 OD S5 5ampke hbng Towards niet Liquid tight compression fing pe a N F Sampl tube ambient sensor aceway Feed amben serso cable through here Roof fange eet Flange gasket Figure 9 5 Roof Flange Assembly 9 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual T
467. o affect the performance of the AMS significantly 6 5 Assessment The version of the instrument software is shown on the display Changes to the instrument software are communicated to the test institute Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRh TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH einland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 98 of 424 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results PROGRAM VERSIONS PRODUCT MODEL 5830i VERSION 62 06 06 232 FIRMWARE arlo hzl B AMPL 03 00 31 01 15 18 Figure 34 Software version here V02 00 00 232 displayed by selection of the menu Di agnostics Program Versions Note The subordinate software versions FIRMWARE general parameters of the i series B AMPL beta amplifier and NEPH nephelometer listed in the software display above are fixed main software components Changes to the subordinate programmes FIRMWARE general parameters of the i series B AMPL beta amplifier and NEPH nephelometer are neces sarily bound to a change in the main software 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Rig
468. o the reference method In that event the results achieved by that meth od must be corrected to produce results equivalent to those that would have been achieved by using the reference method 2008 50 EC Annex VI B The Guidance Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods 4 which was developed by an ad hoc EC task group Source http ec europa eu environment air quality legislation pdf equivalence pdf Version January 2010 describes an equivalence check method for non standard measurement methods The specifications of the Guide for the equivalence testing were included in the last revision of the VDI Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 1 as well as VDI 4203 Part 3 2 The following limits were applied during suitability testing PM25 Daily limit value 24 h not defined Annual limit value 1 a 25 ug m as well as for the calculations according to the Guide 4 PM25 Limit value 30 g m8 Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 of 2002 describes all Performance criteria for performance tests of automated ambient air measuring systems General parameters for the related tests are given in Standard VDI 4203 Part 1 Testing of automated measuring systems General con 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 14 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with
469. oburyY dYvHS sun WED SWL VORS Suy 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Flow chart Overview of menu assisted firmware Figure 15 z D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 46 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F In addition to the possibility of direct communication via pushbuttons display the measuring system may be completely operated and parameterised over RS232 RSRS485 and Ethernet both directly from a PC and indirectly via modem or network During suitability testing the measuring system was accessed over Ethernet and the terminal software iPort especially for downloading the measurement data saved internally The nature and scope of internal data logging logging interval recorded parameters can be configured on the Instrument Con trols menu This remote operation of the measuring system contains the same features as direct operation The measuring system supports C Link MODBUS Gesytec Bayern Hessen ESM Streaming Data and NTP protocols To perform external zero checks of the measuring system a zero filter is mounted to the AMS inlet This filter ensures the supply of air free of suspended particles Figure 16 Zero fi
470. odule but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module a 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls gt Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen constrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command amp Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Removing the SHARP Optics Cover Removing the SHARP The SHARP optics cover can be removed from the SHARP optics Refer to P P the following steps when a procedure requires access to the SHARP optics Optics Cover assembly Figure 7 24 Remove Screw Remove Screw Figure 7 24 Removing the SHARP Optics Cover Equipment Required Phi
471. of a measuring cabinet A non stationary application is therefore only to be undertaken together with the associated peripheral devic es The following steps are strictly necessary for the installation of the measuring device Unpacking and installation of the measuring system in a rack or on a bench Installation of the sampling tube dynamic heating system and PM25 sampling inlet Connection of the pump Fitting of the ambient temperature sensor near the sampling inlet Set up of all connecting and control lines Connection of power supply Optional Connection of peripheral recording and control systems data logger PC with iPort to the respective ports e Switch on of the measuring system e Set up of filter tape The time it takes to perform these works makes up the set up time In this case it amounts to approx 1 hour 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 82 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The warm up time is the time between the start of operation of the measuring system and the point when it is ready for measurement After switching on the system the system is in the equilibration phase until the BETA detec t
472. of either alarms or non alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State Perea Wi nist ENE Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Volumetric Conditions Alarms The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Alarms DH vided Piet Non Alarm The Non Alarm screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A 3 46 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Con
473. of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 127 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 17 Increase of NO concentration due to residence in the measuring system In case of NOx measuring systems the increase of NOz concentration due to residence in the measuring system shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 The requirements of Table 2 apply to certification ranges according to Table 1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For deviating certification ranges the re guirements shall be proportionally converted Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 128 of 424 Model 50
474. of the zeroing are available via display and C Link read commands At the location where the nephelometer attaches to the 50304 instrument case a radial insulated tube joins the sampling tube to the collection chamber The particulate is drawn onto the glass fiber filter tape between the proportional detector and the C beta source Here the beta beam passes upwards through the filter tape and accumulated particulate layer The intensity of the beta beam is attenuated with the increasing mass load resulting in a reduced beta intensity measured by the proportional detector From a continuously integrated count rate the mass on the filter tape is calculated During sampling the mass on the filter spot is always known and the rate of particulate accumulation is observed A continuous measurement of the flow rate determines the sample volume A proportional valve is used to maintain the sample flow rate at its nominal value From both integrated sample volume and mass detection the particulate concentration is calculated At any given time the output signal delivers the concentration of particulate in actual or standard conditions The Model 50307 outputs particulate matter concentrations to the front panel display as SHARP PM and NEPH which are the hybrid beta attenuation and nephelometer derived particulate concentrations respectively Displayed concentrations analog outputs also makes the data available over the serial or Ethernet connection
475. off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing LCD Module Replacement Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 lt _ LCD Module Replacement A A 7 42 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Two Wire Connector a Bottom Support Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 23 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully a Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing LCD Module Replacement Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD m
476. on Verify cable connection Verify cable connection RH Temperature Alarms Flow Temp Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace sensor RH Temperature Alarms Board Temp Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify connection to measurement interface board Replace sensor Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Pressure Vacuum Alarms Barometer Pressure Possible Cause Disconnected cable Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Verify cable connections Replace board Pressure Vacuum Alarms Vacuum Disconnected plumbing Disconnected cable Sensor defective Verify plumbing connections Verify cable connection Replace pressure board Pressure Vacuum Alarms Flow Disconnected plumbing Disconnected cable Sensor defective AP valve open Verify plumbing connections Verify cable connection Replace pressure board Verify valve is in close position Flow Alarms Flow Low flow No flow Check that pump is connected Verify that both AP valves are in the closed position Verify proportional valve plumbing Verify connection to measurement interface board Conc Alarms PM Conc negative Conc alarm setting Check heater and Beta counts Verify conc alarm settings Conc Alarms AVG SHARP Conc negative Co
477. on Codes C 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Request Function Code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function Code Exception Code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2 x N N N or N Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 IIlegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register Value Hi 10 Register Value Lo 10 Register Value Hi 11 Register Value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register Value Hi 12 0x00 Register Value Lo 12 0x64 Register Value Hi 13 0x00 Register Value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The Force Write Single Coil function simulates the activation of the dig
478. on Ports A PB e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Vac Pres Span The Flow Pressure Span screen allows the user to view and set the flow sensor calibration span point To calibrate the flow pressure sensor span point the instrument must be pulling an active flow through the filter tape By use of a manometer connect the respective ports of your NIST traceable manometer to the respective rear panel ports Please be certain to zero any digital manometers prior to connecting Open the ports by pressing the toggle switches inward Calculate an average reading from the reference manometer in units of mmHg Enter this span value into the screen below Thermo Fisher Scientific Flow Calibration Auto Flow Calibration Mass Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Procedure e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Pres Vacuum Calibration gt Vac Flow gt Flow Pres Span Wi hid A a E PEPE Be sure to save the entry and compare the values once more Repeat as necessary to within 2 mmHg The preferred method of flow rate calibration is the Auto Flow Calibration Place a NIST traceable volumetric flow meter on top of the instrument after complete installation reassembled heater tube sample tubes and inlets Allow approximately 1 minute for the flow to stabilize Once stable measure and average three individual readings from th
479. on at zero point exceed the requirements of 1 and 0 07 g m for system 2 SN Table 2 in the certification 2 range according to Table 1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 For PM Max Bo 5 3 3 Repeatability The repeatability standard de Not applicable standard devia viation at reference point shall tion at reference not exceed the requirements of point Table 2 in the certification range according to Table 1 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 5 3 4 Linearity lack of The analytical function describ For PM2 5 particulate measuring sys fit ing the relationship between tems this test shall be performed ac the output signal and the value cording to minimum requirement of the air quality characteristic 5 4 10 Calculation of the expanded shall be linear uncertainty of the instruments 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 22 of 424 5 3 5 Sensitivity coeffi cient of sample gas pressure 5 3 6 Sensitivity coeffi cient of sample gas temperature Sensitivity coeffi cient of sur rounding tem perature Sensitivity coeffi cient of supply voltage 5 3 9 Cross sensitivity TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate
480. on page B 44 e Measurement Configuration on page B 45 e Hardware Configuration on page B 51 e Communications Configuration on page B 54 e I O Configuration on page B 61 e Record Layout Definition on page B 66 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent to the instrument s identification number plus 128 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands B 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual For example if the instrument ID is set to 25 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 153 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode and service mode not active in order to change instrument parameters remotely However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode regardless of the service mode setting For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands are not case sensitive Each command must begin with the
481. on panel can be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to Measurement Case the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Assembly and Lowering gure 7 5 the Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS Remove SHARP Optics Pass Through Cover Assembly Connectors Loosen Captive Screw Remove Screws Remove Screw gt Figure 7 5 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Required Philips screwdriver 7 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 10 11 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord If the instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack Remove the SHARP optics cover assembly then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly described previously Disconnect the plumbing connections at the rear of the measurement case assembly Disconnect the connectors that pass through the center of the partition panel Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from the front Remove one screw from the bottom rear of th
482. onditioning 24 h 2 h Filter weighing and immediate packaging Filter weighing The balance is always ready for use An internal calibration process is started prior to each weighing series The standard weight of 200 mg is weighed as reference and the boundary conditions are noted down if nothing out of the ordinary results from the calibration process Deviations of prior weighings conform to the Standard and do not exceed 20 pg refer to Fig ure 61 All six control filters are weighed afterwards and a warning is displayed for control fil ters with deviations gt 40 ug during evaluation These control filters are not used for post weighing Instead the first three acceptable control filters are used while the others remain in the protective jar in order to replace a defective or deviating filter if necessary Figure 62 shows an exemplary process over a period of more than four months All filters which display a difference of more than 40 ug between the first and second weigh ing are excluded from the pre weighing process Filters exhibiting deviations of more than 60 ug are not considered for evaluation after post weighing as conforming to standards 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung TUVRheinland os ae Genau Richtig Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Sci
483. one record type will automatically change the other Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Volumetric Conditions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation te ERED CHa perm Wi mid PS PHP ELSES Pi AG Lf bie uo pH EE at a E a E Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval Note This feature is found in all Series instruments but it is recommended that the data type be set to ONLY the current value cur as the datalogging averaging is done in addition to the normal concentration averaging A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Data Treatment DH Guided PLP Flag Status Data The Flag Status Data screen is used to set the flag status data to either ON or OFF for the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Flag Status Data 3 34 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo
484. onised hybrid real time measuring instrument for particulate matter which determines the particulate concentration using a combined nephelometric radiometric method of measurement With the aid of a pump ambi ent air is sucked at 16 67 l min via a PM25 pre separator The dust laden sampling air passes through a light scattering photometer nephelometer and is then collected on a filter tape The determination of particulate mass collected on the filter tape is performed continuously during sampling by means of the radiometric measuring principle of beta absorption The ac tual reading of the measuring system Model 5030i SHARP is determined from the values measured by the nephelometer and radiometer by means of a calculation algorithm The tests took place in the laboratory and for several months in the field The following test sites were chosen for the field test according to Table 1 Table 1 Description of the test sites Cologne Bornheim Bornheim Teddington UK parking lot motorway parking motorway parking summer winter lot lot summer winter Period 03 2011 05 2011 07 2011 11 2011 01 2012 03 2012 07 2012 10 2012 No of paired values Candidates 52 91 49 50 Characteristics Urban background Rural structure Rural structure Urban background motorway motorway Rank of pollution Average to high Low to average Average Average To qualify the necessary change of the threshold for the relati
485. only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in the chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 97 Operation Service Menu Nephelometer RH Nephelometer Temperature Nephelometer Source Level 3 98 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual In the Main Menu choose Service gt Nephelometer Calibration The Nephelometer RH screen allows the user to view and calibrate the nephelometer relative humidity In the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration gt Neph RH The Nephelometer Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate the nephelometer temperature sensor calibration In the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration gt Neph Temp EHO guided Piet The Nephelometer Source Level screen allows the user to view and calibrate the source level In the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration gt Neph Src Level Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Calibration Analog Output Calibrate Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Operation Service Menu The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels for calibration Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board is installed The analog output calibration menu is
486. ons configuring the inter nal data logging and communication settings adjusting the screen contrast turning the ser vice mode on and off wrench icon appears on the main screen when service mode is on as well as setting up the date and time 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 44 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The Diagnostics sub menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions e g software version current reading of the different sensors radiometric detector and nephe lometer status status of the analogue and digital inputs and outputs etc This information is especially useful when troubleshooting the instrument The Alarms sub menu displays the status of the measuring system with regard to potential ly upcoming alarm messages The bell icon on the main screen indicates that one or more alarm s are active The Service sub menu available only when the service mode is activated on the Instru ment Controls sub menu gt if on the wrench icon appears on the main screen provides ac cess to advanced diagnostic functions These include for example the adjustment of
487. or has adjusted to the ambient conditions This phase has a duration of at least 12 hours Af ter the equilibration phase the following actions are necessary for starting operation the first time e Check of system settings with regard to flow heating filter tape parameters record ing of measured values date and time e Check and if required adjustment of the temperature sensors ambient temperature nephelometer temperature flow temperature e Check and if required adjustment of rel air humidity of the nephelometer e Check and if required adjustment of the ambient air pressure measurement e Check and if required adjustment of the flow rate e Leak test e Check and if required adjustment of the nephelometer s zero point with a HEPA filter at the inlet e f necessary check of the radiometric mass determination calibration with mass foils Duration approx 1 hour In case of restarting operation after a short downtime e g after a power outage the above mentioned steps can be omitted with exception of a check of the system parameters a plau sibility test of the sensor values and an inspection of possible status error messages If required potential changes in the basic parameterisation of the measuring instrument can likewise be performed in just a few minutes by staff familiarised with the instruments 6 5 Assessment The set up and warm up times were determined The measuring system can be operated at d
488. or of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 6 Ambient conditions at the field test sites daily mean values TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 61 of 424 Cologne Bornheim Bornheim Teddington UK parking lot motorway parking motorway parking summer winter lot summer lot winter No of paired values 48 87 41 65 reference Ratio PM25 PMio Range 38 8 86 3 27 1 88 1 43 1 91 1 36 2 70 5 Average 61 7 57 3 73 0 53 9 Ratio Volatiles PM2 5 Range 11 0 44 8 0 0 53 3 10 4 73 2 10 8 70 8 Average 26 2 21 6 25 2 34 3 Air temperature C Range 5 0 22 1 5 2 24 5 8 9 10 4 8 9 24 2 Average 12 3 15 5 1 9 16 4 Air pressure hPa Range 998 1031 995 1024 1003 1031 971 1010 Average 1012 1008 1018 996 Rel humidity Range 34 7 90 4 53 8 91 1 50 2 90 5 47 1 94 6 Average 61 8 75 1 77 7 72 7 Wind velocity m s Range 0 3 5 3 0 3 4 1 0 6 5 7 0 1 1 9 Average 1 9 1 4 2 1 0 5 Precipitation mm d Range 0 0 11 1 0 0 51 7 0 0 12 8 0 0 30 0 Average 0 9 2 7 1 5 1 6 The content of volatiles was measured with a TEOM FDMS system operated simultaneously 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVR h 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH einland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitabil
489. or the full dataset is referred to for this i e 18 which again would require an annual test at 4 measurement sites Guide 4 chap ter 9 9 2 Table 6 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 156 of 424 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Table 36 presents an overview on the uncertainties between the reference devices Ue from the field tests In Table 37 the results of the equivalence test including the determined ex panded measuring uncertainties Woy from the field test are summarised Table 36 Uncertainty between the reference devices Ure for PM25 Reference Test site Amount Uncertainty Ups eo values Ooo T O o 1 2 Cologne winter 48 0 58 The uncertainty between the reference devices Ure is lt 2 g m for all test sites 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 157 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate ma
490. orce Write Single Coil 0x05 Read Exception Status 0x06 If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Function Codes below In MODBUS over serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 5030i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output q
491. ot transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e lt operating status gt lt SP gt lt error status gt Each of the two lt operating status gt and lt error status gt are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e lt 0000000000 gt Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual D 5 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands D 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero To set the Gesytec serial number select Main Menu gt Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 000 The Gesytec serial number is bold in the example Gesytec Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query St
492. otocol server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 10 209 43 237 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address 9 consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 Receive set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local and set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands according to Table B 7 The default value is 0 ignore the commands The following example shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 55 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 56 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands according to Table B 7 If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the ins
493. ow span B 37 cal vac flow offset Automatically triggers the filter change and sets the vacuum B 38 and flow offset cal vac pres span Automatically sets the vacuum pressure span B 38 clr recs Clears away only Irecs that have been saved B 27 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 27 clr srecs Clears away only srecs that have been saved B 27 coef pm Reports sets current PM coefficient B 39 coef sharp Reports sets current SHARP coefficient B 38 conc unit Reports sets current concentration units B 45 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 51 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 28 copy sp to Irec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 27 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 27 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 27 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 28 copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 28 pad crn Reports the current radon concentration B 24 custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 46 data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in lrecs B 28 data t
494. ow you to remove any deposits within the sample tube This same procedure also applies to the heater tube The Installation chapter covers detailed installation instructions After proper installation it is recommended to check the weather proof installation at all interfaces exposed to ambient conditions Ensure that the condition of the roof flange and silicone caulking will prevent any precipitation from entering the shelter and possibly damaging the instrument s electronics Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 4 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan and remove the filter 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free purge will help the drying process or blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 5 5 Preventive Maintenance Pump Rebuilding A REFER TO STICKER AIRFLOW FOR POSITIONING OF FAN Pump Rebuilding Leak Test 5 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A ABLE INSERTED THIS WAY EXTERIOR SIDE OF REAR PANEL Mounting Screws 4 7 Filter S Fan Guard Figure 5 4 Insp
495. ows the user to view and set the flow alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms 3 78 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Flow The Flow screen displays the current flow and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 16 00 to 17 34 LPM If the flow reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms gt Flow Min and Max Flow Limits The Minimum Flow alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum flow alarm limit The minimum and maximum flow screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Flow Alarms gt Flow gt Min or Max mye WH rnd Saal wows EE fee PEE aE E Concentration Alarms The Concentration Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the 24 hour average concentration and the instant concentration for PM SHARP and nephelometer alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Conc Alarms Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Alarms Menu Average PM The Average PM screen displays the current average PM concentration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 10000 pg m or 0 to 10 mg m If the averag
496. pendence of the measured value at zero concentration shall not exceed the reference value Bo if ambient temperature is changed by 15 K in the range of 5 to 20 or by 20 K in the range of 20 to 40 The temperature dependence of the measured value in the range of the reference val ue B shall not exceed 5 of the measured value if ambient temperature is changed by 15 K in the range of 5 and 20 or by 20 K in the range of 20 C and 40 6 2 Equipment Climatic chamber for a temperature range of 5 to 40 C zero filter for testing the zero point and span foil set for testing the span point 6 3 Performance of test In order to test the dependence of zero point and measured values on the surrounding tem perature the complete measuring systems were operated in a climatic chamber For the zero point test zero filters were installed at the inlets of both measuring systems SN 1 and SN 2 to which particle free sampling air was applied The reference point test comprised a check of the mass coefficient in order to test the stabil ity of the sensitivity of both candidates SN 1 and SN 2 It is not possible to produce a reproducible signal for the sensitivity of the nephelometer us ing external test standards Since the nephelometer is continuously calibrated with a very stable radiometric measurement a separate examination of the stability of the nephelome ters signal at the reference point under operating conditions
497. peration lowers the vacuum chamber plate advances the filter tape a fixed length raises the vacuum chamber plate and initiates the pump operation and a zeroing of the sample spot Immediately after a filter change a new measurement cycle is initiated with an automatic zero adjustment of the mass signal The filter change interval and time of day can be user adjusted Additionally automatic filter changes will occur if the mass on the filter exceeds 1 500 pig since the last filter change or if the flow rate through the filter tape is reduced by more than 5 due to potentially restrictive particle deposition Using the example of PM25 monitoring ambient air is drawn into a 10 micron pm size selective inlet which discriminates against 50 of the particles with an equivalent aerodynamic diameter above 10 pm This inlet has been approved previously through prior U S EPA designations RFPS 0699 130 131 and 132 and is also listed within 40 CFR Part 50 Appendix L as a 10 MICRON INLET including model SA246b Further particle discrimination is achieved by inserting a PM2 cyclone between the 10 micron inlet and sample tube European style inlets are also available with the 5030 The volumetric flow rate at the inlet entrance is 16 67 liters per minute 1 m hour In addition the ambient temperature and relative humidity is measured via a naturally aspirated radiation shield and standard sensor as part of the volumetric flow control and dynamic
498. pgrade Procedures describes the 5014 to 50302 upgrade procedures Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual e Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Gesytec Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix E ESM Protocol Commands provides a description of the ESM Protocol commands from the prior 5030 platform that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards a
499. pha count alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm alpha count Reports alpha count alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm amb rh max Reports sets ambient relative humidity alarm maximum value B 14 Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Command Description Page alarm amb rh min Reports sets ambient relative humidity alarm minimum value B 14 alarm amb temp Reports sets ambient temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm amb temp Reports sets ambient temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm baro pres max Reports sets barometric pressure alarm maximum value B 15 alarm baro pres min Reports sets barometric pressure alarm minimum value B 15 alarm bench status Reports the bench status B 15 alarm beta count Reports beta count alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm beta count Reports beta count alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm board temp Reports sets board temperature alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm board temp Reports sets board temperature alarm minimum value B 16 min alarm conc avg Reports sets average nephelometer concentration alarm B 16 neph max maximum value alarm conc avg Reports sets average nephelometer concentration alarm B 16 neph min minimum value alarm conc avg pm Reports sets average PM concentration alarm maximum B 17 max value alarm conc avg pm Reports sets average PM concent
500. pied in the January 2010 version It is the opinion of TUV Rheinland and their UK partners that the Model 5030i SHARP measuring system for PM25 is indeed being penalised by the mathematics for being accurate It is proposed that the same pragmatic approach is taken here that was previously undertaken in earlier studies Therefore according to Table 35 the slope offset should be corrected for PM25 due to its significance Nonetheless it should be noted that the determined uncertainties Won lie below the specified expanded relative uncertainty Waqo of 25 for particulate matter for all datasets considered without application of correction factors In this particular case the slope for the complete dataset comparison is 1 068 Therefore un der point 6 1 5 4 11 Application of correction factors and terms an additional evalua tion using the respective calibration factor for the datasets is carried out The intercept for the complete dataset comparison is 0 103 The reworked version of the Guide of January 2010 requires that when operating in net works a candidate method needs to be tested annually at a number of sites and that the number of the instruments to be tested is dependent on the expanded measurement uncer tainty of the device The respective realisation is the responsibility of the network operator or of the responsible authority of the member state However TUV Rheinland and their UK partners recommend that the expanded uncertainty f
501. port No 936 21209885 F Blank page TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 13 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 1 Summary and proposal for declaration of suitability 1 1 Summary According to Directive 2008 50 EC of 21 May 2008 7 on Air quality and cleaner air for Eu rope replaces Council Directive 96 62 EC of 27 September 1996 on ambient air quality as sessment and management including its daughter directives 1999 30 EC 2000 69 EC 2002 3 EC and the Council Decision 97 101 EC the methods described in Standard EN 12341 Air quality Determination of the PM fraction of suspended particulate matter Ref erence method and field test procedure to demonstrate reference equivalence of measure ment methods and Standard EN 14907 Ambient air quality Standard gravimetric meas urement method for the determination of the PM25 mass fraction of suspended particulate matter serve as reference methods for suspended particle measurement of the respective mass fraction However EC member states are free to use any other method in the case of particulate matter for which the Member State concerned can demonstrate displays a con sistent relationship t
502. proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 153 decimal which directs the command to the Model 50303 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit mg m3 instead of the correct command set conc unit mg m3 Send set unit mg m3 Receive set unit mg m3 bad cmd Thermo Fisher Scientific Commands List Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response Description Commands bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically becaus
503. put channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Themistor Replacement 7 26 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale Themistor Replacement A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 11 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 At the Analog Input Cal screen press _ 4 _ to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press Press to scroll to Calibrate Full scale and press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel Use gt Jand t to enter the source voltage and press e Jto calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage Press gt J to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Use the following procedure to replace the optional ambient temper
504. r change Reel nuts not tight No more filter tape Filter not properly adhered or broken Filter tape transport drive motor defective Optical tape counter defective Tighten reel nuts Replace with new filter tape Adhere filter tape to take up reel and wind over itself once Replace motor Replace optical tape transport sensor Pressure sensor s board do not hold calibration Valves closed Loose plumbing Pressure board defective Verify AP valves on rear panel are in the closed position Verify all plumbing connections Replace pressure printed circuit board Highly variable concentration Recorder noise Sample concentration varying Foreign material in optical bench Digital electronics defective Replace or repair recorder and or leads Run Model 5030 on a zero filter if quiet there is no malfunction Clean optical bench Replace board with a spare board Instrument does not calibrate properly System leak Pressure or temperture out of calibration Digital electronics defective Flow Find and repair leak Re calibrate pressure or temperature Replace one board at a time with a spare board to isolate the defective board Verify AP valves on rear panel are in the closed position Re calibrate Display is off 6 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Wrong contrast setting Adjust contrast setting Thermo Fisher Scientific Trouble
505. r Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config pranih pruni Ph dm PP PPP LES ited Beh P WE mid Streaming Data Interval The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval Pra Bs EEE TE Sanat Bone Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A Choose Stream Data The Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Item 1 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Volumetric Conditions Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data it
506. r Variable 91 amp 92 EXT ALARMS 93 amp 94 NEPH TEMP 95 amp 96 NEPH RH 97 amp 98 NEPH IRED 99 amp 100 NEPH REF 101 amp 102 BETA REF 103 amp 104 NOT USED 105 amp 106 COMMON FLAGS 107 amp 108 BETA DETECTOR FLAGS 109 amp 110 NOT USED 111 amp 112 COMP MASS 113 amp 114 NOT USED 115 amp 116 AVG NEPH IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered if there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 4 Table C 3 Write Coils for 50307 Coil Number Action Triggered 100 INVALID 101 NOT USED 102 NOT USED 103 NOT USED 104 AOUTS TO ZERO 105 AOUTS TO FS Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual C 11 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Coil Number Action Triggered 106 FILTER TAPE COUNT RESET TO ZERO 107 FILTER T
507. r period value This command sets the number of hours to be added to filter next time for the filter tape change to value where value is a floating point representation of the filter period in hours The following example sets the filter period to 10 hours Send set filter period 10 Receive set filter period 10 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration filter time This command reports the next date and time of the filter tape change The following example reports that the date and time is January 1 2008 6 12 pm Send filter time Receive filter time 01Jano8 18 12 set filter time dd mm yyyy hh mm ss dd day mm month yy year hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the next filter tape change The following example sets the filter time to October 1 2008 11 32 pm Send set filter time 10 01 2008 23 32 Receive set filter time 10 01 2008 23 32 ok flow target This command reports the current flow The following example reports that the flow is 16 0 LPM Send flow target Receive flow target 16 00 set flow target value This command sets the flow to value where value is a floating point number representation of flow between 1 to 20 LPM The following example sets the flow to 16 67 LPM Send set flow target 16 67 Receive set flow target 16 67 ok ht control This command reports the current status of the heater off RH
508. r to External Device Connection Components on page 7 8 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 8 Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Six feet Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 27 PINK RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE 32 LIGHT BLUE V
509. ration alarm minimum B 17 min value alarm conc avg Reports sets average SHARP concentration alarm maximum B 17 sharp max value alarm conc avg Reports sets average SHARP concentration alarm minimum B 17 sharp min value alarm conc inst Reports sets instant nephelometer concentration alarm B 17 neph max maximum value alarm conc inst Reports sets instant nephelometer concentration alarm B 17 neph min minimum value alarmconcinstpm Reports sets instant PM concentration alarm maximum value B 18 max alarm conc inst pm Reports sets instant PM concentration alarm minimum value B 18 min alarm conc inst Reports sets instant sharp concentration alarm maximum B 18 sharp max value alarm conc inst Reports sets instant sharp concentration alarm minimum B 18 sharp min value Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm filter tape Reports the filter tape status B 19 status alarm flow max Reports sets flow alarm maximum value B 19 alarm flow min Reports sets flow alarm minimum value B 19 alarm flow pres max Reports sets flow pressure alarm maximum value B 19 alarm flow pres min Reports sets flow pressure alarm minimum value B 19 alarm flow temp Reports sets flow temperature alarm maximum value B 20 max alarm flow temp Reports sets flow temperature alarm minimum value B 20 min alarm ib stat
510. re 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Sample path within the Model 50301 SHARP measuring systeM 32 Hardware components Model 50301 SHARP Optics module 0008 33 Hardware components Model 5030i SHARP Beta module ccccee 33 Picture of hardware components Model 50301 SHARP Beta module 34 Diagram Set up of Model 50301 SHARP ccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeess 35 Model 50301 SHARP SHARP optics modules top SHARP beta module OOHONN sseserce createed ete ceay a csten siaceentten poasteeneteneseretensdeeentnenmetieas 37 European PM25 sampling inlet for Model 50301 SHARP onssa 38 Heated sampling tube DAS ssssccicicieitissacssdanticidensseiaintet etn dedeiens 39 Model 50301 SHARP measuring system eeeeeeeeeeeee teeter ee eeectaeeeeeeeeeee erent 39 Model 50301 SHARP measuring system Optics MOdUIe cccccceeeeeeteeees 40 Model 50301 SHARP measuring system Beta moOdule ccccccceceeeeeeees 40 Model 50301 SHARP measuring system Systems 1 and 2 from right at measuring Station sec cct cetersconerccarcrencieeecaecstete
511. re 7 30 Replacing the Internal SHARP Cable Assembly Case Cable Use the following procedure to replace the case cable Figure 7 31 Replacement Equipment Required Case Cable Philips screwdriver Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord remove the electrical connector loosen the two captive screws on the SHARP optics base plate and remove the SHARP assembly from the base unit 2 Remove the two SHARP cover screws and remove the cover 3 Remove the hex nut from the cable clamp 7 52 Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Zeroing Filter 4 Replace the case cable assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Unplug Hex Nut Cover Screw Cover Screw Figure 7 31 Replacing the Case Cable External Ze roing Use the following procedure to replace the external zeroing filter Figure 7 2 Filter Equipment Required Adjustable wrench amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Note the orientation of the arrow on the filter assembly See Figure 2 7 for orientation
512. reatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in srecs B 28 date Reports sets current date B 52 default params Sets parameters to default values B 52 det Reports sets the status of the detector board B 53 det status Reports the current mass for the detector B 24 dhcp Reports sets state of use of Dynamic Host Configuration B 57 Protocol DHCP diag volt det Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the detector board B 24 diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the I O expansion board B 24 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the motherboard B 24 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the measurement B 25 interface board diag volt neph Reports diagnostic voltage levels on the nephelometer B 25 interface board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 62 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 62 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 44 dout Reports sets digital output channel and active state B 63 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 63 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 44 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 28 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 28 measurements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format B 30 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8
513. record field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Reset to Default Content 3 32 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions PE PTT PEE ETE bel tO PEL a EA Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging RCRSE CHS mito Wi mht E PORE TE Saad foose i r Sel be hb Bedi beet Bhi Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the selected record format srec or lrec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Logging Period Min a ed ne Patio pH mith Marian mF mii Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type lrecs or srecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to
514. reesstessreesrresereeseee 3 30 Analog Inputs se crc cae Rate R a R R Ekas 3 31 Commit Contente a na a she R A teens betas eed 3 32 Reset to Default Content ssssesssseesrsssrrssressreessressreesseessressrresreeseee 3 32 Configure Datalogging seesesesesesesssesesrsesrsrsesetesrereeresesesserssse 3 33 Logging Period Minecisalsisnninannenia ni i otis 3 33 Memory Allocation Percent ssessesssssessssessesessersesesseseseseesesessese 3 33 Data Treatments eoan E E E an 3 34 Flag Status Data siota a a a D 3 34 C mm nication Set MES assor aiia ia 3 35 Serial Seting Soni drt ouon dirt bianstvbetushasat anata Duan tuat at yah eeetestas 3 35 Bait RAG EE AE E E TETE 3 35 Data EI OSE EE TE E N E E EEE EA ETE 3 36 PALLY e se ade Ae a a Ge ee ee eee 3 36 Stop Bits sssislsdeats onei aia eiea N aii a i ai 3 36 RS 232 RS 485 Selection eeseeeeeeeeeeeeesessesssressersseessressrresereesses 3 37 Instrument IDa A N A a 3 37 Gesytec Serial Nunb r x sansa saevsscsveesvnsbatcorsarege coteassecdadsvansytabenen sear 3 38 Communication P totecol ai sanieti vdieo hi went tlasas 3 38 Streaming Data Configuration veaase tala etic esas 3 38 Streaming Data Interval sisine rniii anea E Goatees a 3 39 Choose Stream Data sssssessesssseeseeesersseessreeseresereeseessrresrreeereeseee 3 39 Concentrations nern i a E E E R 3 40 Other Measurements sssssesssseereeesersserssressrersrerssressrresrreesreessee 3 40 Analog I PUES seit osare ai kr a aeeai 3 41 TEPIP
515. rement Interface Board Connectors Flow Sensor System Pressure Sensor Assembly Detector Amplifier Assembly Digital Output Board 8 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Connectors located on the measurement interface board include Data communication with the motherboard e 24 Vand 120 VAC power supply inputs e Fan and solenoid outputs e 120 VAC output and thermistor input from the sample heater e Flow and pressure sensor inputs e Proportional valve output e Optical pickup input e Pre amp board e Ambient temperature RTD and RH e FlowRTDs The flow sensor system consists of a subsonic orifice inside the primary measurement head a differential pressure and vacuum sensors and a flow temperature RTD The flow system output is produced by measuring the pressure difference across a precision orifice This unit is used for measuring the flow of sample gas in the measurement system The pressure sensor assembly consists of a board containing three pressure transducers with tube connections The pressure transducer output is produced by measuring the pressure difference between the sample gas pressure and ambient air pressure The detector amplifier assembly amplifies the signal from the proportional detector that receives beta particle emissions from the C 14 source through the sample and filter tape The output of the detector amplifier is fed to the measurement interface board A coaxial cable from the detector amplifier supplies po
516. reshold at the sample filter tape The purpose of this heating system is specifically designed to force the continuous mass monitor to agree with the gravimetric reference method and the relative humidity conditions to which the reference filter samples are conditioned Furthermore sufficient flexibility is provided within the firmware to configure the heating conditions to satisfy global monitoring protocols The measuring range of the Model 5030 is 0 10 000 pg m A complete particulate measuring assembly consists of the following main parts e SHARP Optics Module e SHARP Beta Module e Ambient Inlet Sampling System PMio PM2 5 PM1 0 e Dynamic Heater Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Diaphragm Vacuum Pump External Ambient T RH Sensor Assembly Internal Data Recording Unit and External Communication Ports Optional 6 Foot Sample Extension Tubes Optional Tripod Support Optional Roof Flange Kit The Model 50307 combines proven technology easy to use menu driven firmware and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 50302 has the following features 320 x 240 pixels graphics display Menu driven firmware Field programmable ranges Multiple user defined analog outputs Analog input options Linearity through all ranges User selectable digital input output capabilities Standard communications f
517. rformance of test Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report 6 5 Assessment Not applicable to PM25 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable to PM2 5 sampling systems Reference is made to module 5 4 9 of this report 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 132 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 4 Calibration The systems under test shall be calibrated in the field test by comparison measure ments with the reference method Here the relationship between the output signal and the gravimetrically determined reference concentration shall the determined as a steady function 6 2 Equipment See module 5 4 10 6 3 Performance of test For PM3 s5 The comparability of the measuring systems according to module 5 4 10 was demonstrated during the test The determination of the calibration and analysis function was carried out using the complete dataset 209
518. rial port in real time for capture by a serial printer datalogger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components RS 485 Connection Ethernet Connection External Accessory Connector 8 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Refer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address ma
519. ring lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt OO00000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP d t T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt Example of response to DA command from an instrument with Gesytec serial number set to 123 The Gesytec serial number is bold in the example Gesytec Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MD03 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 1230000000 lt SP gt 002 lt SP gt t T t Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 56814 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T t d Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 1230000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode will report a value of 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements reported in response to DA command Thermo Fisher Scientific Gesytec Ba
520. rmine whether the comparability of both candidates with the reference method according to Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods 4 is also given for days with more than 70 relative humidity 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 135 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 5 Assessment No deviation of the measured signal from the nominal value gt 0 5 ug m caused by interfer ence of moisture in the sample could be observed for PM25 No negative influence on the measured values at varying relative humidity was detected during the field test Comparabil ity of the candidates with the reference method according to Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods 4 is also given for days with a relative hu midity gt 70 Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results A summary of the results is presented in Table 27 Table 27 Deviation between reference measurement and candidate on days with a relative humidity gt 70 measured component PM 5 Field test days with a relative humidity gt 70 pT tare oT ae Deviation from om refer
521. rms Menu RH Temperature The RH Temperature Alarms submenu allows the user to view and set the P Alarms relative humidity or temperature alarm parameters e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms Ambient RH The Ambient RH screen displays the current ambient relative humidity value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 95 If the ambient RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Termperature Alarms gt Ambient RH ep gies Piet Min and Max AmbientRH The Minimum Ambient RH alarm limit screen is used to change the Limits minimum ambient RH alarm limit The minimum and maximum ambient RH screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt RH Temperature Alarms gt Ambient RH gt Min or Max 3 72 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Sample RH The Sample RH screen displays the current sample relative humidity value and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 5 to 95 If the sample RH reading goes beyond the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt
522. rms is allowed Values cor rected shall meet the require ments of chapter 9 5 2 2 ff of the guidance document Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods Shall comply with the require ments set for each component also in the case of simultane ous operation of all measuring channels The candidate systems fulfil the re quirements on data quality of ambient air quality measurements during the test even without application of cor rection factors A correction of the slope leads nevertheless to a signifi cant improvement of the expanded measuring uncertainty of the full data comparison Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 28 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 2 Task definition 2 1 Nature of test Thermo Fisher Scientific has commissioned TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH to carry out suitability testing of the measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator The test was performed as a complete suitability test 2 2 Objective The AMS shall determine the content of PMz5 fine dust in ambient air within the concentra tion range of 0 10
523. rough he roof flange assembly and connect to the bottom of the ambient T RH assembly 14 Connect the other end of the T RH cable to the back of the instrument RH Temp 15 Attach the heater power connector to HEATER 1 16 Using the available 3 8 inch green vacuum tubing connect the intake of the pump to the vacuum fitting at the rear panel of the 50302 17 Plug the pump power chord into the AC PUMP receptacle at the rear of the 50302 instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 15 Installation Setup lt RH Temperature Final Assembly SHARP Electric Connection Exhaust Local PC Zero Air Make up Figure 2 7 Rear Panel Plumbing Schematic 2 16 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connecting External Devices Terminal Board PCB Assemblies 1 0 Terminal Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies standard e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 8 The terminal board PCB assemblies are circui
524. roup choice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output RCPS E CHS mito DN EEE TE Sanat Bone ETET Aad Bast ade ae i aa pe Pri ii ny es perry T had ie oie Table 3 5 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs None None None PM Barometer Pressure Analog Input 1 if the I O expansion Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Volumetric Conditions Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs board is installed AVG PM Vacuum Analog Input 2 if the I O expansion board is installed Neph Flow Pressure Analog Input 3 if the I O expansion board is installed SHARP Ambient RH Analog Input 4 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed AVG SHARP Sample RH Analog Input 5 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed AVG Neph Ambient Temp Analog Input 6 if the I O expansion board is installed Board Temp Analog Input 7 if the I O expansion board is installed Flow Temp Analog Input 8 if the 1 0 expansion board is installed Flow Vol Beta Beta Raw Alpha Raw Mass Beta Zero External Alarms Neph Temp Neph RH Neph IRED Neph Ref Beta Ref Common Flags Det Flags Mass Comp Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of
525. rument ID of 14 For more information about the instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Instrument ID Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Volumetric Conditions Gesytec Serial Nunber The Gesytec Serial Number screen is used to set the serial number for the Gesytec protocol The Gesytec serial number defaults to zero For more information about the serial number see Appendix D Gesytec BH Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Gesytec Serial No DH Guided Piet Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible choices include C Link MODBUS Gesytec and Streaming Data e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Communication Protocol Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Stream Data submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from 3 38 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions Choices are Concentrations Othe
526. s 6 1 5 3 18 Overall uncertainty not relevant for particulate devices covered by 5 4 10 For this reason an official request to the competent German body was made to define a co ordinated procedure for dealing with inconsistencies in the Standard The following procedure was suggested Test points 5 3 2 5 3 7 5 3 8 5 3 11 and 5 3 12 are evaluated as before basing on the min imum requirements stated in VDI 4202 Part 1 of 2002 i e using the reference values Bo B and B3 The performance of the test points 5 3 3 5 3 4 5 3 13 and 5 3 18 is omitted as they are not relevant for particulate measuring devices 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 15 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The competent German body agreed with the proposed procedure by decisions of 27 June 2011 and 07 October 2011 Since according to the applied standards the reference values to be used are explicitly ad justed to component PMio for component PMz5 the following reference values have been agreed upon PMz2 5 PMio for comparison Bo 2 g m 2 g m B 25 g m 40 g m B2 200 g m 200 g m B shall be merely adjusted to the level of t
527. s Lg m3 C C hPa m s 4 mm 271 8 30 2012 Teddington Summer 0 9 12 6 17 7 1005 70 1 1 5 302 0 0 272 8 31 2012 1 2 15 3 19 4 1010 60 5 0 7 289 0 0 273 9 1 2012 1 8 16 6 22 7 1006 75 4 0 2 210 0 0 274 9 2 2012 2 7 16 8 19 5 1007 88 3 0 1 238 0 0 275 9 3 2012 3 3 18 4 26 9 1006 74 1 0 2 239 0 0 276 9 4 2012 8 8 3 0 33 8 18 9 26 6 1005 64 6 tA 295 0 0 277 9 5 2012 10 8 1 2 10 8 14 7 21 9 1010 63 9 1 0 144 0 0 278 9 6 2012 11 3 2 5 22 1 16 3 23 2 1008 67 9 0 2 198 0 0 279 9 7 2012 2 4 17 5 28 4 1005 63 9 0 1 219 0 0 280 9 8 2012 2 6 tA 28 3 998 64 8 0 1 208 0 0 281 9 9 2012 1 9 20 1 27 4 991 66 5 0 8 191 0 0 282 9 10 2012 2 5 17 5 21 0 991 75 3 0 9 192 0 0 283 9 11 2012 4 4 1 3 30 5 12 8 19 4 997 63 4 0 4 252 0 0 284 9 12 2012 1 5 13 4 20 4 998 72 4 0 5 267 2 5 285 9 13 2012 4 7 2 0 43 2 16 3 21 4 998 63 9 0 3 205 0 0 286 9 14 2012 5 2 1 8 34 2 14 3 21 3 997 70 8 0 7 257 0 0 287 9 15 2012 8 7 2A 24 4 17 0 24 3 997 71 9 0 2 204 0 0 288 9 16 2012 3 4 1 6 46 7 15 6 19 6 994 75 9 0 2 207 0 0 289 9 17 2012 5 9 2 0 33 7 15 5 20 7 994 67 9 0 2 207 0 0 290 9 18 2012 6 4 1 0 14 9 11 7 19 3 1000 64 2 0 7 278 0 0 291 9 19 2012 8 2 1 4 17 3 12 2 18 3 1004 65 9 0 4 260 0 0 292 9 20 2012 5 7 1 9 32 9 13 3 19 3 1001 70 9 0 2 203 0 0 293 9 21 2012 5 3 2 1 39 9 12 1 17 3 998 77 3 0 4 273 1 3 294 9 22 2012 7 5 1 8 24 6 12 5 17 2 1000 60 6 0 8 89 0 0 295 9 23 2012 12 4 6 3 50 7 11 8 14 7 981 93 8 1 3 80 30 0 296 9 24 2012 3 2 2 3 70 8 12 2 16 6 971
528. s and corresponding actions The following example sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration dout channel This command reports the index number output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of flowl alarms Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 FLOW ALARMS open set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding state The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This command reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to Table B 13 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 a All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the defaul
529. s command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 4 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time 1 Receive set stream time 1 ok Table B 4 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 0 Disables time stamp to streaming data string 1 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string alpha eff This command reports the current value of alpha efficiency for the detector The following example reports that the alpha efficiency is 0 12 Send alpha eff Receive alpha eff 0 120 set alpha eff value This command sets the alpha efficiency for the detector to value where value is a floating point number representing the alpha efficiency for the detector The following example sets the alpha efficiency to 0 15 Send set alpha eff 0 15 Receive set alpha eff 0 15 ok alpha th This command reports the current value of alpha threshold for the detector The following example reports that the alpha threshold is 1220 Send alpha th Receive alpha th 1220 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set alpha th value This command sets the alpha threshold for the detector to value where value is a floating point number representing the alpha threshold for the detector The following example sets the alpha threshold to 1250 Send set alpha th 1250 Receive set alpha th 1250 ok amb rh
530. s in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service RH T emperature The RH Temperature Calibration submenu allows the user to view and set Calibration tbe relative humidity and temperature sensor calibration The RH temperature calibration submenu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 85 Operation Service Menu Ambient Temperature The Ambient Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate ambient temperature Adjust the zero offset until the ambient temperature agrees with your treaceable standard e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration gt Ambient Temp Flow Temperature The Flow Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate flow temperature Be sure to have the cover removed and equilibrated to room temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibration gt Flow Temp EHO guided Piet Ambient Relative The Ambient Relative Humidity screen allows the user to view and Humidity calibrate relative humidity Adjust the zero offset until the RH agrees with your treaceable standard e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt RH Temp Calibrat
531. s liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For these menus use _ _ and to move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons 3 0 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto NS The Pushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function Soft Keys The soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below gt Run The gt is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the current SHARP concentrations but also has additional Run screens for ambient conditions sample conditions and mass sensor data Press and to scroll through th
532. s screwdriver 2 Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Document the Nephelometer Coefficient From the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Neph Coef Record the nephelometer coefficient value 2 Document the Nephelometer Calibration From the Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration Record the nephelometer RH value the nephelometer temperature value and the nephelometer source level value 3 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the SHARP otpics cover Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing SHARP Interface Board Replacement 2 Pin Male not used 7 48 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Unplug all connectors from the SHARP interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection Loosen the two screws from the bottom of the rear board panel and remove Unfasten the two screws at the top of the SHARP interface board Slide the SHARP interface board up from the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board To install the SHARP interface board follow the previous steps in reverse Restore the nephelometer coefficient value previously documented Restore the nephelometer RH value the nephelometer temperature value and the nephelometer source level value previously documented
533. sacteentencdietbenstsciencvents 2 13 Rack Mounting Options neten aaa en sal Cae es 2 13 Monitor Installation sere tessa ase Gsncnacscccee cal acta he acsstar 2 13 Connecting External Devices 528s aise eA ca eon Se eu 2 17 Terminal Board PCB Assenib tess i casstavssasdoasconayscesaebsaavensdstecesbirs 2 17 TO Retinal Board sa cessicssiiscsitteasisiceavaveasiaseaikwiecntiacienunenns 2 17 D O Terminal Boatd assii sant vesbuacosstrege annsin ikse 2 19 25 Pin Terminal Board s s ssssssssesseseseeessesesseseseseesesesesresesesseseseeee 2 20 Power Connections nnenernena i ene a a e es 2 22 Stat prea a O A E desta aE AAEE a ia 2 22 Data Content seiiet ier s aa aN ee ee eds 2 23 Shutdown seirinin ne ur e a a E a 2 23 Imp rtant Tipsene gn a e a a aai 2 23 Oper ti i izina aa aaa aaa a araia 3 1 Displayen annia T da 3 1 Push Dutton Seii ut aao ne e Rro ES a EErEE EEES Are aides 3 2 DOU E A E E AE 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry Screen aeinn haraa oeaan 3 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual vii Contents Firmware COVELVICW sa cacesacasies nish cnetands seta testeaeaasssvases aiaa 3 4 Power Up Screen saiisine tiisin siaina ninesi 3 6 R n Screens uasai iape aip a h aie EA Maxi ave a 3 6 Ambient Conditions Run Screenis ciciccscccevsesctiecctientevtenersidetiaenss 3 7 Sample Conditions Run Screen ssseeeeeeerrrrrsesrsesses 3 8 Mass Sensor Data Run Screen sssssesssesessessrresesrsrrsresreresresrreresrsreees 3 8 Hybrid Data Run Screen sesss
534. screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt Volts ae i ao ee Poh Fly PPT PS Pi ELSES Pi AG sae a ae Le CH mtb User Value The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt User Value Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Volumetric Conditions Screen Contrast Service Mode 3 56 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 100 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in t
535. screws from the connection bracket and align the bracket onto the wall plate as shown above in Step 4 and insert the two screws through the wall plate and tighten 4 Reinstall the tape pickup spool in the reverse order of removal in Step 2 by sliding all the spacers O rings and rear support guide plate into its original assembly order 5 Install the filter tape following the filter tape path shown in Figure 10 3 Use adhesive tape to adhere the filter tape to the take up spool and wind the tape over itself at least once Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 10 3 Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures SHARP Connection Bracket Assembly Installation Figure 10 3 Filter Tape Installation Pathway 6 Complete the installation of the SHARP Optics Connection Bracket by connecting the 4 pin connector to the SHARP 1 connector on the measurement interface board as shown below in Figure 10 4 Note It should not be necessary to remove the electronics from the instrument case to achieve this connection and the spare 2 pin connector is not used A 10 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 5014i to 50301 Upgrade Procedures Radius Tube Adapter Installation ote P atl Figure 10 4 Connecting Connection Bracket Wiring to Measurement Interface Board Radius Tube Use the following procedure for radius tube adapter installation Adapter Installation 1 Loosen the Ra
536. scssssccssscecsssseesseeeesees 3 89 Calibrate Vacuum Pressure Span 3 89 Calibrate Flow Pressure Span cictcc2ceecetaceeeiiecohr di captea eet eden 3 90 Restore Default Calibtatiotiicsaicicidctgccatiavacsett azine nleatenc ease ides 3 90 Flow Calibration yam seman cet natn ene SNe TI Rte CPN AR er at ener mroe 3 91 Auto Flow Calibration esccasaciessishcactsagshenicasstanssacneees ateacadseeettecebaas 3 91 Manual Flow Calibration sssseeeseessseeeseeereeeseessressrresrresereesserssress 3 92 Mass Calibrations aert e an cabin a A 3 92 Thermal Mass Coefficient sss ntiaise nsiaion oinadiatuntsuateanteniantoaSes 3 92 Vacuum Mass Coefficient s5 c1cdcasssctoencitadeistnadvcantvvorctodieeieaneats 3 93 Barometer Mass Coefficient ccccccccccccssssscscssssscssssscssssscssssscoseess 3 93 Mass Coefficient ssesessseeeseesseeeseeesreesrressrersseresetssresseressreesserssrese 3 93 Auto Mass CO cticie ni Gics avsacerssasataanleaseane ce iacdees tacaudsaastoandaeaeaeacets 3 94 Manual Mass Coefficient sesnies odd iunas sot euccraslagthinantettauasaatnases 3 94 Alpha Efficiency Coemicient sic cccecsancbetdcsennce cciasencdatvacatonteteuts 3 94 Detector Calibration isicwwecn del a a a a ss 3 95 Auto Detector Calibiatl O fives ian intoncddots nats sadelaawieetenntes 3 95 Manual Detector Calibration cc ccscscsssssssssssssssscassesenses 3 96 Beta Ref Alpha Re Oe 5 esc cc a ae le hel as 3 96 PSV Ota eats site enina aE ode cheater RR race nce ee
537. sdicusdsateavscialsuatesneaateanteaeiesteeaeetet 5 7 Greasing the Gani cas one n A a a n Sk 5 8 External Pump Exhaust Filter site Goedel thse eee 5 8 Cleaning the SHARP Optics Assembly s s s 5 10 Troubleshooting irsidir ea a a a a a 6 1 Salty Veet INS v urnie a oina ea 6 1 Troubleshooting Guides sssesseeeeeeessseessssrsssssesrsssisrsrsesrsrsesesesesesesee 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagrams ssessesseseeesesesrsesrrrsereressseseseseses 6 8 Connector Pin Descriptions seesssseseerssresesreresresterrssrsrreresreresreseerese 6 10 Seryic L cati n Siia a a a a a a 6 25 STIATE sts E a E E E vnatestanceraiaeovaanaes 7 1 Safety Precautions renan a a R R ANRT 7 3 Fitmware Updatesioioueniis radai A a a 2 7 4 Accessing the Service Mode ssnin onae ana 7 4 Replacement Parts LIsCresnerie ninani To a E E acl 7 5 Cable ASE a con est daencce ate a aa E A NS 7 7 External Device Connection Components s s ss sesesesessssssessersreeseeeseseses 7 8 Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly s s 7 11 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel dman an a a a e NR 7 12 Fuse Replacement chit Giese atest EAS 7 14 Fan Filter Rep cements Atle aa a aE EE 7 14 Detector Amplifier Assembly Replacement ssssssseseseeeeereereerrsesese 7 15 Detector Amplifier Board Calibration ssseeeeeeerrsssese 7 17 External Pump Replacement 4 2 2 20 Giuctintiicsoinuemnaciedtincieente dS 7 17 Pressure Board Replacement lt 422entacee ccseues th
538. sely Right Page 182 of 424 Annex 5 Manufacturer Type of instrument Serial No Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50301 SHARP SN1 SN2 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Measured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 1 of 11 PM2 5 Measured values in pg m ACT Ref 1 Ref 2 Ratio Test site PM10 PM10 PM2 5 PM10 ugm _ ug ms ONOahWNM 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx 3 8 2011 3 9 2011 3 10 2011 3 11 2011 3 12 2011 3 13 2011 3 14 2011 3 15 2011 3 16 2011 3 17 2011 3 18 2011 3 19 2011 3 20 2011 3 21 2011 3 22 2011 3 23 2011 3 24 2011 3 25 2011 3 26 2011 3 27 2011 3 28 2011 3 29 2011 3 30 2011 3 31 2011 4 1 2011 4 2 2011 4 3 2011 4 4 2011 4 5 2011 4 6 2011 Cologne Winter Complete power loss Recovery after re start Power loss only Thermo Recovery after re start TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 5
539. seseseesssessssesrsstsesesessestsetersesesseseseees 3 9 Main Ment mkeo atie iaer o aAA EATE SE N A EEE enO 3 9 Range Men hinh taa A E A Saat 3 10 Concentraci n UNIS sisas ers tiisin ani a aeia seas 3 10 SHARP ATIC Cec 2 sstsatscgsi ennnen e i itii 3 11 Set Custom RAR SES s cscop dels iostecseaccastieod national aa e N 3 12 Custom RANGES sc fsdee ei A a RA ATA Ni 3 13 Integration Timed siaciduetucs dete a a aa 3 13 24 Hour Averigue atit A a E 3 14 24 Hour Average Start TiMe ssseeessseseseseeresrsreseserreresrsrrsesesreresrees 3 14 Calibration Factors Menu 4c chet tee eld Ca asa a Tec acta ac 3 14 PM Background zeerste naisessa otri a ai aa 3 15 PM Coefficients anie aati Sale ete TS 3 15 SHARP Backgrounds osiers stae cker iaip t 3 16 SHARP Coefficient ics zescfevvevas asda cisascsalesiserat eiTe NE E Eai 3 16 Nephelometer Background Values s seseseseseseseseseeseeseeesssssessssse 3 16 INephelomieter Mode rror esos Gk Ra 3 17 Vallese E a S Shea A A 3 17 Restore Previous Values seseseesessssesesesrsssesssisrsisesesesrseeesesrseses 3 17 Nephelometer Coefficient s sseeessssesssesesersereereisisrsesesrsesesesesesesee 3 18 Instrument Controls Menu secs sca adie sc peaca fonstytoucaresiontiteceanudeeseeonibenenes 3 18 Set Flow Pump 4 2 s0 dniiu identi EEE aS 3 19 1 Esp eee eee tee eam Re See tee hae N E A een 3 19 PPO Ps srie a a comedagaedirea ses a seaweeds Aaaa aii 3 19 Set Heaters riii i i 3 20 Sve i n caged tre de ete
540. settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Set Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 103 Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation Change Password 3 104 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Lock Instrument If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password gt Lock Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the front panel is locked where data can be viewed settings can be vi
541. shooting Troubleshooting Guides Malfunction Possible Cause Action LCD cable loose Check connection and cable integrity LCD defective Replace display The change of Keyboard not enabled Enable keyboard through menu parameters is not possible No mass value ADC defect Mains are broken No high voltage value Detector defect Change the main circuit board Check and repair Check HV Change detector No automatic filter change Mechanical defect If pump is not running If the filter change parameter reaches the FC value for the second time then the monitor stops Check filter transport motor and mechanics Make sure tape is adhered to take up reel and intact Check pump power supply and wires Adjust filter change parameters LCD out of function or dark Wrong contrast LCD defect Connection cables from the main board are broken Adjust contrast Change LCD Replace display ribbon cable Thermo Fisher Scientific Air flow rate disturbance or air flow is too low Neph Board Failures Low Source Current Air flow parameters wrong No connection with plug 25 gump Pump do not work properly Very high pollution or blocking in the air passage Check AP calibration valve are in closed position External cable not connected Internal cable not connected Disconnected Source Ref cable Check air flow rate parameters Put in the plug pump regulation input
542. sion EN 14907 2005 4 Guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods English version of January 2010 5 Operating manual Modell 5030i SHARP 12 March 2013 6 Operating manual LVS3 Stand 2000 7 Directive 2008 50 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 May 2008 on ambient air quality and cleaner air for Europe 8 Report UK Equivalence Programme for Monitoring of Particulate Matter Report No BV AQ AD202209 DH 2396 of 5 June 2006 9 Technical specification CEN TS 16450 Ambient air Automated measuring systems for the measurement of the concentration of particulate matter PM10 PM2 5 English Version of May 2013 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 174 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 9 Appendix Appendix 1 Measured and calculated values Annex 1 Detection limit Annex 2 Temperature dependence of zero point Annex 3 Temperature dependence of the sensitivity Annex 4 Dependence on supply voltage Annex 5 Measured values at the field test sites Annex 6 Ambient conditions at the field test sites Annex 7 Measuring Values from the additional campaign Bornhei
543. sion numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Program Versions 3 58 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu CREE CRE Te Wi mri E PURE TE Aaad Fooss PUG Fad LT FO bed HH Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages CREED CE pre Wi mpini E PURE E Aad feoeo PEO Saad Eee dedi bet HH Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Motherboard ERED CH perm Be Ebb Eeh bias ini CH io bet Bis EEE TE Sanat Bone TOP Fae Bast ade 5 i iNi i Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt Interface Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Diagnostics Menu E a a
544. sol light scattering nephelometer and beta attenuation Model 5014 Beta to measure Operation precise and accurate ambient aerosol concentrations The Model 50302 SHARP aerosol sample pathway is shown in Figure 1 1 Conditioned Aerosol Sample SHARP Board SHARP Box shown with Cover Off Beta Attenuation Nephelometer Figure 1 1 SHARP Monitor Sample Path Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The SHARP optical assembly senses the light scattered by the aerosol passing through an 880 nm illumination beam The nephelometry response is linear with aerosol concentration independent of sample flow rate and a running one minute average and dynamic average are continuously calculated A relative humidity RH measurement is located at the sample filter tape assuring a representative measurement of the aerosol conditioning prior to real time mass determination Thereafter the aerosol is deposited onto a glass fiber filter tape The filter tape will accumulate an aerosol sample towards a threshold value whereupon the filter tape will automatically advance prior to reaching saturation During the collection of aerosol onto the filter tape the SHARP Monitor uses the radiometric principle of beta attenuation through a known sample area to continuously collect and detect the deposited mass Additionally the beta atten
545. span foil test for checking the mass coefficient of the radi ometric measurement can only be activated directly on the instrument 6 4 Evaluation All operating procedures that do not require practical work on site can be monitored by the user directly on the instrument as well as by telemetric remote control 6 5 Assessment In principle all necessary operations for performing a functional check can be monitored di rectly on the system or via telemetric remote control Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 94 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 7 Maintenance interval The maintenance interval of the measuring system shall be determined during the field test and specified The maintenance interval should be three months if possible but at least two weeks 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test This test was carried out in order to determine which maintenance procedures are required at which period to maintain the correct functionality of the measuring system Furthermore
546. st of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 134 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 4 5 Cross sensitivity The interference caused by moisture in the sample may not exceed 10 of the limit value in the range of the limit value 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The determination of interference caused by moisture in the sample was carried out under field conditions For this purpose the differences between the determined reference value nominal value and the measured value of the respective candidate were calculated for days with more than 70 relative humidity during the field test The average difference was set as conservative estimate of the interference caused by moisture in the sample In addition the reference equivalence functions of both candidates were determined from the field investigations for days with more than 70 relative humidity 6 4 Evaluation The average difference between the determined reference value nominal value and the measured value of the respective candidate was calculated for days with more than 70 relative humidity during the field test The relative deviation from the average concentration was calculated Annual limit value PM25 25 g m8 10 of ALV 2 5 g m Further investigations were made to dete
547. summer Allsites e ae 1 970 SN 1 Concentration averages system SN 1 SN 2 Concentration averages system SN 2 Concentration averages of systems SN 1 amp SN 2 e Ol OI Ol ges The single values are presented in annex 5 of the appendix 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 117 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMs 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift The long term drift at zero point and reference point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 in the field test A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note This item cannot be evaluated according to the current versions of Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 and VDI 4203 Part 3 September 2010 when testing particulate meas uring systems due to the fact that a minimum requirement has not been defined By resolu tion of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 reference is made to the following requirement in the previous version of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 June 2002 The temporal change in the measured value at zero concentration shall not
548. sure span B 43 vac pres offset Reports the vacuum pressure offset B 44 vf pres cal def Sets vacuum and flow pressure calibration defaults B 44 avg24 time Send Receive The following example shows that the averaging time is set to 18 30 avg24 time avg24 time 18 30 set avg24 time hh mm hh hours 01 to 23 mm minutes 01 to 59 This command reports the 24 hour averaging time in hours and minutes This command sets the 24 hour averaging time to start averaging the concentration from h mm until next 24 hours It is then set to next 24 hours automatically The following example sets the 24 hour averaging time to 17 50 Send Receive set avg24 time 17 50 set avg24 time 17 50 ok Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 12 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual flags This reports 8 hexadecimal digits or flags that represent the status of the mode pressure and temperature compensation status concentration units concentration modes and alarms To decode the flags each hexadecimal digit is converted to binary as shown in the Figure B 1 It is the binary digits that define the status of each parameter Send flags Receive flags 00000000 Figure B 1 Flags Field neph This command reports the 1 minute running average nephelometer concentration The following example reports the 1 minute running average value Send neph Receive neph 1 405E 01 pg m3 neph 24a
549. sured value display 4 1 2 Easy mainte Necessary maintenance of the Maintenance works can be carried out nance measuring systems should be with commonly available tools taking possible without larger effort if reasonable time and effort possible from outside 4 1 3 Functional check If the operation or the function All system functions listed in the al check of the measuring sys manual are available can be activat tem require particular instru ed and function well The current sys corresponding sub tests and included in the assessment 4 1 5 Instrument de Shall be specified in the in The instrument design specifications sign struction manual listed in the operating manual are complete and correct 4 1 6 Unintended ad justment ing system against illicit or un intended adjustment during up in a measuring cabinet operation 4 1 7 Data output alogue signals 5 Performance requirements 5 1 General The manufacturers specifica No differences between the instru tions in the instruction manual ment design and the descriptions giv shall be by no means better en in the manual were detected than the results of the perfor mance test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx A TUVRheinland TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the compan
550. sured values from field test sites related to actual conditions Page 3 of 11 Manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific PM2 5 Type of instrument Model 50301 SHARP Measured values in pg m ACT Serial No SN1 SN2 Test site 5 7 2011 19 1 k Cologne Winter 5 8 2011 12 3 7 25 2011 12 1 17 8 65 4 Recovery after zero point Bornheim Summer 7 26 2011 11 8 i 19 1 61 2 7 27 2011 14 3 k i 20 9 65 9 7 28 2011 17 5 5 25 2 70 6 SN2 NEPH malfunction 7 29 2011 10 2 16 6 54 2 SN2 in repair 7 30 2011 SN2 in repair 7 31 2011 9 8 F 14 2 70 4 SN2 in repair 8 1 2011 12 7 19 2 64 8 SN2 in repair 8 2 2011 10 3 20 1 52 1 SN2 in repair 8 3 2011 17 0 26 1 66 5 SN2 in repair 8 4 2011 8 7 14 7 60 2 SN2 in repair 8 5 2011 8 6 18 0 54 7 8 6 2011 8 7 2011 2 8 i 6 4 49 5 8 8 2011 2 8 a a 7 5 44 1 8 9 2011 2 7 k 11 2 27 1 f SN 2 filter tape error 8 10 2011 5 3 12 7 47 0 8 11 2011 5 5 x 1141 47 3 8 12 2011 3 0 x 7 0 50 2 8 13 2011 8 14 2011 5 f 6 7 45 5 8 15 2011 13 9 41 7 8 16 2011 12 9 45 1 8 17 2011 25 0 56 3 8 18 2011 5 15 9 54 1 8 19 2011 12 8 48 8 8 20 2011 8 21 2011 17 2 60 4 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Luftreinhaltung Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particul
551. surements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PM25 test site Bornheim winter 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F A TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 149 of 424 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Candidate 2 yg m Model 5030i SHARP SN 1 SN 2 Teddington Summer Raw data 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Measured values Regression line y x Figure 45 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2 measured component PMz 5 test site Teddington summer Candidate 2 ug m a oO Model 5030i SHARP SN 1 SN 2 All test sites 218 g m Raw data 77 p 7 LEE PT ETE 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m o Measured values Regression line o y x Figure 46 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 1 SN 2
552. t suitability testing Bornheim summer 2013 SN 1 amp SN 2 component PMz25 slope correction 1 068 Results of Grubbs outlier test Reference PMoa5 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess Discarded reference PM2 5 paired values according to Grubbs 0008 Used filter materials sristi me m i a i aa Certification ranges dene ee mee ee ene meee eee ey Pere ee Determination of availability without test related outages Determination of availability including test related outages ee Detection limit PMo5 cccccccccccccseecceceseeeeeeeesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeueeeeeseneeeeees Dependence of the zero point SHARP on surrounding temperature deviation in g m average of three measurements nenene Dependence of sensitivity mass coefficient on surrounding temperature deviation in average of three MeasureMens seeseeeeseeeeeseeeeeees Dependence of the zero point NEPH on surrounding temperature deviation in g m average of three measurements eene Dependence of the measured values on mains voltage deviation in Concentration averages standard deviation uncertainty range and reproducibility in the field measured Component PMas ccccccceeceeeeeeeees Zero point drift SN 1 amp SN 2 test with Zero filter sseseeseeeeeseeeeeeeees Sensitivity drift SN 1 amp SN 2 sce ec tennxedaacbuca ciinespansdansstacsesepanddesndoasenSeausass
553. t Pin Piri i ERE CHa wee Be Ebb Eesi bias ini EN ETE EE Sanat Bone TON Fane Bast ade P Flow The Flow screen is used to view and adjust the flow e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump gt Flow set ERED CH Pa Tit ob popin pei PPP LES Pied Bei PERI PLP PRE Pump The Pump screen allows the user to toggle the pump to either ON or OFF e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Flow Pump gt Pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH pikari Ce a E S a EA Set Heater The Set Heater menu allows the user to set the status of the heater RH threshold and temperature threshold in various modes e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater DH pikari E a E SO EA Control The Control screen is used to set the status of the heater to either ON OFF RH threshold or TEMP threshold e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt Control Cachet EEE EE uat Bone BME UY Saad OPE T EEE of RH Threshold The RH Threshold screen is used to change the RH threshold value in percent The RH threshold is typically compatible with the gravimetric method being used for comparison e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Heater gt RH Threshold 3 20 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation
554. t channels at both zero and full scale The analog input calibration menu is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed and when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode earlier in this chapter Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Calibration 3 100 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu ERED CH perm if EN EUH TE Sanat Bone ETET Aad Bast Wi mid PRES CH mT Bet Ebb Eesi HERTE i EH ninii BPs EEE TE ueet Bone EEY Fad Bast ade P i iNi i Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Zero CRIED Agi THT gy mpi PPP L Pil Bei PERI PLP PRE Analog Input Calibrate The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal gt select Channel gt Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel Sead Bast abe POE Sek come EE fee PEE SEE EUs EEE TE Sanat Beee Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 1
555. t Analog Outputs PME ieee EE i The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 Parma Instrument Configuration The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing will toggle the selected item between yes and no A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Instrument Configuration Contact Information The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Contact Information Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu Alarms Menu The alarms menu allows the user to view a set of alarms for different boards and displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer The number of alarms detected is displayed to indicate how many alarms
556. t Equipment Required Transformer assembly Philips screwdriver 2 f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Radius Tube Replacement Radius Tube Replacement A 7 38 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect cables from the measurement interface board and motherboard 3 Unscrew the four mounting screws and lift out the transformer assembly 4 Install the new transformer by following the previous steps in reverse Unhook Short Cable from Transformer from Common Electronic Board AC INT BD Unhook Long Cable from Transformer to back of Unfasten Screws 4 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 20 Replacing the Transformer Use the following procedure to replace the radius tube Figure 7 21 Equipment Required Radius tube assembly Hex driver 9 16 inch Hex driver 7 64 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ambient RH Temperature Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord
557. t alarm conc inst pm max 10000 Receive set alarm conc inst pm max 10000 ok alarm conc inst sharp min alarm conc inst sharp max These commands report the current 24 hour instant SHARP concentration alarm minimum and maximum values setting The following example reports that the instant SHARP concentration minimum is 0 pg m Send alarm conc inst sharp min Receive alarm conc inst sharp min 0 000E 00 pg m3 set alarm conc inst sharp min value set alarm conc inst sharp max value These commands set the 24 hour instant SHARP concentration alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the instant SHARP concentration alarm maximum value to 10000 pg m Send set alarm conc inst sharp max 10000 Receive set alarm conc inst sharp max 10000 ok alarm filter tape status This command reports the status of the filter tape as FAIL or OK The following example reports that the filter tape status is OK Send alarm filter tape status Receive alarm filter tape status ok alarm flow min alarm flow max These commands report the current flow alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the flow alarm minimum value is 16 0 LPM Send alarm flow min Receive
558. t be installed in horizontal mounting position e g on a bench or a rack protected from weather inconsistencies The temperature at the installation site shall be within the range of 5 C to 40 C with a relatively low amount of temperature fluctuation no direct sunlight no direct exposure to heater or air conditioner The dimensions and weights of the measuring system conform to the specifications in the manual The power consumption of the measuring system and pump is specified by the manufacturer as a maximum of approx 880 W During a 24 hour test these specifications were checked At no time the mentioned value was exceeded during these investigations 6 5 Assessment The instrument design specifications listed in the operating manual are complete and correct Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not required for this test 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 84 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 6 Unintended adjustment It shall be possible to secure the adjustment of the measuring system against illicit or unintended adjustment during operation 6 2 Equipment
559. t boards with a D Sub connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other side These assemblies provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s I O connectors The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for iSeries instruments e T O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O expansion board Figure 2 8 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 2 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 17 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A See Detail B Assembled Connector 2 18 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Figure 2 8 O Terminal Board Views Table 2 2 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail A Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Analog1 13 Power_Fail_NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power_Fail_COM 3 Analog2 15 Power_Fail_NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL_Input1 5 Ana
560. t checks can be found in Section 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift of this report Minimum requirement fulfilled yes 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Please refer to Section 6 1 5 3 12 Long term drift 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 81 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 4 1 4 Set up times and warm up times The set up times and warm up times shall be specified in the instruction manual 6 2 Equipment A clock was required for this test 6 3 Performance of test The AMS were put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer s description The necessary set up and warm up times were recorded separately Constructional measures undertaken prior to the measurement such as the opening of an in let through the cabinet roof were not taken into account for evaluation 6 4 Evaluation The set up time comprises the time needed for all necessary works from system installation to start up The measuring system must be protected from weather inconsistencies e g in an air conditioned measuring cabinet Moreover extensive on site construction work is required in order to lead the sampling tube through the roof
561. t of problems See Service Locations on page 6 25 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 1 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 8 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 e Service Locations on page 6 25 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 1 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Table 6 2 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Table 6 1 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction No power Possible Cause Main fuses are blown are missing Digital electronics defective Action Check voltages from power supply Check that all boards and connectors are seated properly Replace with spare boards to isolate the problem No automatic filte
562. t selections may not apply A Table B 13 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments DtoA Function Range 1 Voltage Output PM 2 Voltage Output AVG PM 3 Voltage Output Flow 4 Voltage Output Ambient Temperature 5 Voltage Output Flow Temperature 6 Voltage Output Ambient Relative Humidity 7 Current Output PM Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 63 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 64 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual DtoA Function Range 8 Current Output AVG PM 9 Current Output Flow 10 Current Output Ambient Temperature 11 Current Output Flow Temperature 12 Current Output Ambient Relative Humidity list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital inputs or the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 5 CONC ALARM open 2 1 LOCAL REMOTE open 3 3 UNITS open list var aout list var dout list var din list var log These commands report the list of possible index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode for analog outputs digital outputs digital inputs and datalogging The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp f
563. taee wes B 51 Table B 7 Allow Mode Command Values cccccecceccesceseeeeseeeetesteseeseens B 56 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual xxiii Tables xxiv Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Table B 8 Reply Termination Formats 00 0 0 cccecccececeeseecetesesesteteseseetetenees B 58 Table B 9 Set Layout Ack Va lU S cccccecccccccccsscstesesteseseseeseseseseseseseseeneees B 59 Table B 10 Power Up Mode Values ccccceccccsceceesestetesesesteteseseseenenens B 60 Table B 11 Analog Current Output Range Values 0 0 cece ceeeceneeeens B 61 Table B 12 Analog Voltage Output Range Values oo cece cecseeteeeteees B 62 Table B 13 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments 0 cccccee B 63 Table C 1 Read Coils for S030 0 secctncncentetwadaente ernie C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 50308 ecsccscccseseceesccseccssesccsenccsescesenessere C 9 Table C 3 Write Coils for 50300 oo cecseeceesteseeseeseesestesteseeseenseteseeseens C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 50300 ccccccceceteseeteeeeteeee D 8 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 50303 cceccecceeeectesteseeseeseeesteseeseenee D 8 Table E 1 Read Commands for 50302 0 0 cecccccccsceseeseeeetestesteseeeeeetesteseesee E 1 Table E 2 Write Commands for 50303 occ eeseceeteetesteseeseeeeteeteseesee E 2 Table E 3 Control Commands for 50307 cccecceeeseeseeteeteseeseeeeteetesteseesee E 2 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1
564. te measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VRheinland Air Pollution Control gt Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 107 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 7 Sensitivity coefficient of surrounding temperature The sensitivity coefficient of surrounding temperature at zero and reference point shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 A value c at 70 to 80 of the upper limit of the certification range shall be used as reference point Note This item cannot be evaluated according to the current versions of Standards VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 and VDI 4203 Part 3 September 2010 when testing particulate meas uring systems due to the fact that a minimum requirement has not been defined By resolu tion of the competent German body see module 5 3 1 reference is made to the following requirement in the previous version of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 June 2002 The temperature de
565. ted by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled automatically A The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x Thermo Fisher Scientific Format Specifier for Thermo Fisher Scientific Erec Layout Text Value String Value Source C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number
566. ters for 5030 Register Number Variable 0 INVALID 1 amp 2 PMa 3 amp 4 NOT USED 5 amp 6 BARO PRES 7 amp 8 VACUUM 9 amp 10 NOT USED 11 amp 12 FLOW PRES 13 amp 14 NOT USED 15 amp 16 AMB RH 17 amp 18 SAMP RH 19 amp 20 NOT USED 21 amp 22 AMB TEMP Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Number Variable 23 amp 24 BOARD TEMP 25 amp 26 FLOW TEMP 27 amp 28 NOT USED 29 amp 30 NOT USED 31 amp 32 NOT USED 33 amp 34 FLOW VOL 35 amp 36 NOT USED 37 amp 38 BETA 39 amp 40 ANALOG IN 1 41 amp 42 ANALOG IN 2 43 amp 44 ANALOG IN 3 45 amp 46 ANALOG IN 4 47 amp 48 ANALOG IN 5 49 amp 50 ANALOG IN 6 51 amp 52 ANALOG IN 7 53 amp 54 ANALOG IN 8 55 amp 56 BETA RAW 57 amp 58 ALPHA RAW 59 amp 60 AVG PM 61 amp 62 NOT USED 63 amp 64 MASS 65 amp 66 NOT USED 67 amp 68 BETA ZERO 69 amp 70 NOT USED 71 amp 72 NEPH 73 amp 74 NOT USED 75 amp 76 NOT USED 77 amp 78 NOT USED 79 amp 80 NOT USED 81 amp 82 NOT USED 83 amp 84 SHARP 85 amp 86 NOT USED 87 amp 88 AVG SHARP 89 amp 90 NOT USED C 10 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Register Numbe
567. test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland gt Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 114 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 10 Averaging effect For gaseous components the measuring system shall allow the formation of hourly av erages The averaging effect shall not exceed the requirements of Table 2 of Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 September 2010 Note This test is not relevant for particulate measuring systems 6 2 Equipment Not applicable 6 3 Performance of test Not applicable 6 4 Evaluation Not applicable 6 5 Assessment Not applicable Minimum requirement fulfilled 6 6 Detailed presentation of test results Not applicable 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH T VR hei n land Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 115 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 3 11 Standard deviation from paired measurement The standard deviation fro
568. test site Teddington 2 2 ci aca etieaendiie eee ais dope ee dietieeeenie 60 Comparison of reference and candidate SN 1 measured component PM25 Teddington summer relative humidity threshold adjusted to 50 63 Comparison of reference and candidate SN 2 measured component PM25 Teddington summer relative humidity threshold adjusted to 50 63 Grubbs test results for the PM25 reference method Cologne winter 70 Grubbs test results for the PM 5 reference method Bornheim Summer 71 Grubbs test results for the PM 5 reference method Bornheim winter 71 Grubbs test results for the PM25 reference method Teddington summer 72 Display of the measured SHARP concentration ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 76 Rear view of Model 50301 SHARP cccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 86 Software version here V02 00 00 232 displayed by selection of the menu Diagnostics Program Versions cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Zero point drift SN 1 measured Component PMo5 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeees 120 Zero point drift SN 2 measured Component PMo5 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 120 Drift of the measured value SN 1 measured component PMos ccccccceee 122 Drift of the measured value SN 2 measured component PMos cccccceeee 122 Flow of candidate SN 1 field siicieicsstietievanie Maaeaniiee eae 14
569. th a hose to the air inlet Test sites and arrangement of the measuring systems During the field test the measuring systems were arranged in such a way that the sampling inlets were positioned outside the measuring cabinet above its roof The central units of both candidates were located inside the air conditioned measuring cabinet The entire reference equipment LVS3 was placed outdoors on the roof of the cabinet The field test was carried out at the following test sites Table 5 Field test sites No Measurement site Period Characteristics 1 Cologne parking 03 2011 05 2011 Urban background lot winter 2 Bornheim motor 07 2011 11 2011 Rural structure traffic way parking lot influence summer 3 Bornheim motor 01 2012 03 2012 Rural structure traffic way parking lot influence winter 4 Teddington 07 2012 10 2012 Urban background summer 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 57 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Figure 19 to Figure 22 show the course of PM25 concentrations at the field test sites obtained with the reference systems 70 a
570. the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 5030i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Parameters on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 5030 SHARP Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for
571. the sensors with regard to ambient air temperature flow temperature ambient humidity air pressure and flow Furthermore it allows for checking adjusting the radiometric determina tion mass coefficient calibrating the detector to be performed by a service technician of the manufacturer only and nephelometer as well as setting up the analogue inputs and outputs The Password sub menu allows the user to configure and activate password protection for the instrument the lock icon on the main screen indicates that password protection is active 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx Precisely Right Page 45 of 424 A TUVRheinland Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Figure 15 provides an overview of the menu assisted firmware Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Report No 936 21209885 F TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control opu yOHRUCD a209 ypa pubog vosuedg OA uogunS yuo g weUINs SU Di PULE IDLA TW sndyno Bowuy ise Or NaNO sons Ajoy 9 4 pdu synduj pey Big 1 ul Gopuy sedey on dul Sojeuy swuey 2009 Si NI synyog Hope j aozsoy suey Moy sSulpeey ynduj Bojeuy synepq sn aozsoy NO uyo 390 joxig Bjdsia WNNOEA 20508900 JOY B OUD mdu sax oeg qweun9 037 voRne ges ndu Gojeuy suue WNnoByyelnsseld Hai HAIN Si puu waung dwa peog dwal HAIN Ot PWO HUN AL
572. the 8 analog input 3 52 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Descriptor Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Units Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Volumetric Conditions PGi
573. the instrument sample zero air for about 90 minutes 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Detector Calibration gt Auto The Auto Detector Calibration screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Detector Calibration screen press to start the auto detector calibration Use the following procedure to replace the pump Figure 7 8 Equipment Required Pump Adjustable wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the pump power cable from the rear panel 3 Remove both lines from the pump Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Pressure Board Replacement 4 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse 5 Perform a leak test as described in the Preventive Maintenance chapter Connect SHARP Valve Port 1 Connect to Rear Panel Elec Pump Connect to Rear gt Panel VACUUM Figure 7 8 Replacing the Pump Pressure Board Use the following procedure to replace the pressure board Figure 7 9 Replacement Equipment Required Pressure board Philips screwdriver 2 amounts of stat
574. the pump power To continue with the acceptance testing e From the Main Menu select Diagnostics gt RH Temperature premik prn in Ph dm PrP LES E bii i pHo mnie The RH Temperatures screen read only displays the current relative humidity in percent and the temperature readings in C The board temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures e Press to return to the Diagnostics menu and choose Pressure Vacuum rp Guided Pii ERE i The Pressure Vacuum screen read only displays the barometric vacuum and flow pressure readings in mmHg The pressure is measured by a pressure transducer The vacuum is the amount of vacuum under the filter tape The flow pressure is the pressure differential across the orifice Table 2 1 Pressure Units Conversion Pressure Conversions mmHg atm x 0 75006 mmHg inHg x 25 4 mmHg hPa x 0 75006 Assuming adequate time has passed for thermal equilibration approximately 1 hour and the vacuum pump has been drawing room air into the instrument compare the ambient temperature sample temperature and flow temperature to your NIST traceable thermometer placed at the inlet tube see Figure 2 2 Note Please be sure that the pump exhaust or any other heat source is not influencing the sensor reading of the te
575. the volumetric flow rate measurement with an accuracy of 2 percent This flow rate standard must be a separate stand alone device It must have its own certification and be traceable to a NIST primary standard for volume or flow rate Dry piston meters and bubble flow meters should only be used under controlled laboratory conditions Ambient field measurements should use a NIST traceable low pressure drop orifice venturi flow meter such as BGI Delta Cal or a Streamline Pro Model SX Kit 2 25 L min e A relative humidity RH standard capable of measuring in the range of 35 75 RH readable to the nearest 0 5 RH and accurate to within 2 RH Prior to calibration be sure the Model 5030 is operating properly The Model 50307 s internal diagnostics makes this a quick and simple process Turn on the instrument and allow it to stabilize for one hour prior to calibrating If you are receiving this instrument for the first time the optional acceptance testing in the Installation chapter should also be reviewed If the internal flow temperature sensor requires calibration the dynamic heating system should be turned OFF the cover should be removed and the instrument should sample room temperature air at least one hour prior to calibrating The order of calibration described below is preferred for optimal performance of the 5030i and comes from many years of experience working with and developing ambient particulate monitoring instru
576. tion gt Neph RH a pe a The Nephelometer Temperature screen allows the user to view and calibrate the nephelometer temperature sensor calibration Note Calibration of the nephelometer temperature must be done with the heater in the OFF position A Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 4 13 Calibration Calibration Procedure e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration gt Neph Temp Nephelometer Source The Nephelometer Source Level screen allows the user to view and Level calibrate the source level This should be within 60 70 mA If it is outside of this range please adjust the SRC Level until the IRED reads 65 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Neph Calibration gt Neph Src Level 4 14 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly you should inspect the components frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following preventive maintenance information e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Replacement Parts on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Outside Case on page 5 2 e Cleaning the Inlets on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and
577. tion of test results Please refer to Section 6 4 of this module 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland j Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 88 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 6 1 5 2 1 Certification ranges The certification range intended for testing shall be determined 6 2 Equipment No additional equipment required 6 3 Performance of test The certification range intended for testing shall be determined 6 4 Evaluation Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 contains the following minimum requirements on certification ranges for systems measuring suspended particulate matter in ambient air Table 15 Certification ranges Measured com Lower limit Upper limit Limit value ponent of CR of CR in pg m in pg m in pg m The certification ranges are related to the limit value with the shortest assessment period and used for the assessment of the measuring system in the range of the limit value This as sessment of the measuring system in the range of the limit value is performed as part of the determination of the expanded uncertainty of the candidates according to Guide 4 For this purpose the following values are used as reference values in accordance with
578. tnnneseeerenennn ennet 79 6 1 4 1 4 Set up times and warm up tiMeS ssssseeseeessserenrrrrtrsstrrtrrnnnesstrrrnernnnnsnneeeet 81 6 1 4 1 5 Instrument design eee arte cess ee ctecee pata eens a Bcesertnetceackacteaneu na pactettenmeigess 83 6 1 4 1 6 Unintended adjustment sicasi2sedixctiviatesisseSincidetaieetee de scaeteeie pe asad cee 84 6 1 4 1 7 Data output ase crecctacestenenesad macecnniectsmiadeendstieunebeadmeenaiananiorenciecenuataaseumenbiedemtetaane 85 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 6 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F RE 210 2 ee eemeeeree aera ver om eer Er ee ee ee ee 87 5 2 1 Certification ranges see cto asd dened aia det eementeeeedsecsatia ys oe end eciee se aeneneeecaas 88 B22 Measuring ANOS scrire eaa Ee EEA E EN EAEE AEREAS 89 5 2 3 Negative output signals sseesseseenererersserettrrrrtrtssrrtnnrrnnrrnnnresertnnnrnnnnnseeeenne 90 5 2 4 Failure in the mains voltage sssessneneeeessesreerrrnreessrre
579. tor of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 201 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 9 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation m5 ym3 A C C hPaj A m s mm 241 7 31 2012 Teddington Summer 9 3 2 3 25 0 17 2 21 0 994 84 5 0 4 170 0 5 242 8 1 2012 5 9 2 0 33 9 18 4 23 3 989 75 5 0 7 185 0 0 243 8 2 2012 5 4 1 5 28 4 17 7 22 6 993 73 1 0 8 195 0 0 244 8 3 2012 1 7 17 8 22 7 993 71 6 0 8 180 2 3 245 8 4 2012 5 1 2 3 46 1 16 4 21 0 990 80 7 0 6 200 1 8 246 8 5 2012 47 22 45 7 17 3 22 4 988 77 6 0 4 210 2 3 247 8 6 2012 3 5 0 5 15 5 16 0 23 3 995 77 5 0 2 190 0 8 248 8 7 2012 3 4 1 5 44 9 17 2 21 1 1003 80 7 0 3 201 0 8 249 8 8 2012 8 1 2 3 28 8 19 0 25 5 1005 73 0 0 2 263 0 0 250 8 9 2012 11 5 2 7 23 5 21 0 28 3 1007 62 7 0 4 202 0 0 251 8 10 2012 13 3 4 4 32 8 21 4 29 4 1005 59 5 0 5 142 0 0 252 8 11 2012 15 1 5 0 33 4 19 8 24 4 997 63 9 1 9 78 0 0 253 8 12 2012 72 3 2 44 6 19 8 26 1 992 70 6 0 8 171 0 0 254 8 13 2012 47 2 5 53 9 19 2 23 2 992 81 2 0 7 184 1 5 255 8 14 2012 aa 3 0 38 6 21 1 26 1 991 66 3 0 9 139 0 0 256 8 15 2012 hell 21 29 8 19 0 23 3 989 71 8 1 0 187 0 5 257 8 16 2012 6 6 2 0 31 1 19 8 22 9 996 65 3 11 160 0 0 258 8 17 2012 6 7 2 2 32 2 23 4 2
580. trument is set to ignore the commands value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted upon but will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting and ok response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting A The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local and set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 7 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The following example reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host
581. ts current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 11 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 11 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 11 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 V analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 12 The following example reports that analog voltage output channel 2 is set to 3 0 10 V Model 50
582. ts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the SHARP optics assembly Refer to Removing the SHARP Optics Assembly on page 7 11 2 Remove the two philips screws and remove the SHARP optics cover Refer to Removing the SHARP Optics Cover on page 7 44 3 Disonnect the RH Temp connector from the SHARP interface board 4 Remove the eight socket head screws from the upper end plate 5 Gently remove the end plate Carefully remove the sealing gasket 6 Carefully vacuum out the optics chamber using caution not to scrap the interior of the optics chamber 7 Re assemble following the previous steps Take extra caution in re aligning the sealing gasket to avoid air leaks Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Troubleshooting Thermo Fisher Scientific Guides Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the even
583. tter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 37 Summary of the results of the equivalence test SN 1 amp SN 2 measured compo nent PMz5 raw data 29 1 2 17 ug m3 Orthogonal Regression Betw een Instrument Uncertainties Slope b Up Intercept a ua Reference Candidate All Data 1 068 0 013 0 103 0 225 PM2 5 5030i Sharp lt 18 pg m3 1 066 0 032 0 040 0 317 gt 18 ug m3 1 090 0 032 0 900 0 975 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Slope b Up Intercept a ua Wem 217 ug m3 Bornheim Winter 1 075 0 027 0 205 0 667 56 1 Dataset Cologne Winter 1 086 0 030 0 534 0 676 53 7 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 1 110 0 033 0 530 0 466 15 4 Teddington Summer 1 117 0 050 0 656 0 407 4 1 lt 18 ug m3 157 0 847 1 120 0 035 0 611 0 342 23 38 4 5 Combined Datasets 218 ug m3 52 0 952 1 111 0 034 1 326 1 050 22 93 100 0 All Data 209 0 967 1 087 0 014 0 408 0 240 20 28 28 2 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset Slope b Up Intercept a ua Wem 2 17 ug m3 C S Bornheim Winter 41 1 104 0 031 0 840 0 778 56 1 Cologne Winter 1 058 0 027 0 394 0 592 53 5 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 947 0 030 1 099 0 427 15 7 Teddington Summer 63 1 016 0 051 0 207 0 433 3 2 lt 18 ug m3 166 0 817 1 057 0 035 0 123 0 344 17 55
584. tware version V02 00 00 232 Restrictions None Notes 1 The requirements according to guide Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Moni toring Methods are fulfilled for the measured component PMo 5 The measuring system shall be operated within a lockable measuring cabinet 3 The measuring system is to be calibrated on site at regular intervals by application of the gravimetric PM25 reference method according to EN 14907 4 It is recommended that the measuring system is operated with a threshold for the relative humidity of 58 in particular at sites with significantly high ratio of volatiles in the sus pended particulate matter 5 The test report on the suitability test is available online under www qgal1 de N Test report T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Cologne Germany Report No 936 21209885 F of 20 September 2013 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control 3 Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 19 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PMz 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 1 3 Summary of test results filled Requirements on the instrument design 4 1 General requirements 4 1 1 Measured value Shall be available The measuring system is fitted with a display mea
585. ty measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PMz2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Page 207 of 424 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 8 Ambient conditions at the additional test site Bornheim Summer 2013 Page 2 of 2 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation pg m pg m C C hPa m s g mm 31 7 7 2013 Bornheim 11 0 1 1 10 0 23 1 29 7 1020 58 8 1 2 218 0 0 32 7 8 2013 11 0 1 4 12 9 23 0 29 8 1019 59 6 1 4 214 0 0 33 7 9 2013 14 4 27 19 2 23 4 29 9 1014 59 4 1 4 237 0 0 34 7 10 2013 10 0 1 8 18 1 19 5 24 2 1012 62 6 3 5 261 0 0 35 7 11 2013 14 0 1 4 10 0 15 7 19 7 1013 70 1 1 7 215 0 0 36 7 12 2013 16 7 3 4 20 4 16 5 21 9 1013 70 8 1 2 250 0 0 37 7 13 2013 15 3 28 18 5 17 7 22 9 1014 68 3 1 1 241 0 0 38 7 14 2013 14 5 3 7 25 5 18 9 24 2 1014 69 1 17 249 0 0 39 7 15 2013 17 4 2 0 11 3 21 3 27 8 1013 62 9 0 8 188 0 0 40 7 16 2013 19 4 27 14 2 22 5 29 2 1013 58 8 0 8 184 0 0 41 7 17 2013 13 4 2 0 14 8 23 2 29 3 1014 59 0 1 2 218 0 0 42 7 18 2013 2 0 24 5 31 6 1014 56 8 1 7 224 0 0 43 7 19 2013 8 2 17 21 3 23 5 29 1 1013 58 3 2 3 241 0 0 44 7 20 2013 9 8 1 7 17 5 21 1 26 6 1011 68 5 1 3 226 0 0 45 7 21 2013 12 6 1 8 14 6 25 3 32 3 1009 57 4 1 1 155 0 0 46 7 22 2013 15 2 2 2 14 4 27 6 35
586. uantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in the instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of Outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte Count 1 Byte N Output Status N Byte N NorN 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10
587. uation chamber measures alpha emissions from the accumulated aerosol and excludes negative mass artifacts from the presence of daughter nuclides from radon gas decay to achieve a refined mass measurement Simultaneous refined mass measurement and sample volume measurement through a calibrated orifice provide a continuous concentration measurement of the ambient mass concentration Thermo Fisher Scientific Ta Introduction Principle of Operation RHa INLET Pa HEATER HEPA FILTER 4 NEPHELOMETER T 3 WAY NC VALVE Y o DETECTOR E B SOURCE GF o VAC ORIFICE iI PUMP R EXHUAST 1 G PROPORTIONAL ice 4 VACUUM PUMP i MAKE UP AIR Figure 1 2 Nephelometer Sample and Zero Flow Schematic Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Principle of Operation 1 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual A clean filter spot is introduced by an automatic filter change to the combined sampling and detection chamber at least every 24 hours usually centered at midnight However the official filter tape change frequency for TUV and U S EPA testing is for both PM25and PM is every 8 hours The automatic filter changes are controlled by the instrument firmware which halts the pump o
588. uction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Primary Measurement Head Assy Tape Radius Guide Detector Amp Bottom Filter Tape Supply Reel Spindle Tape Wheel Assy SHARP Connection Bracket Assy Inlet External Solenoid Tube Mounting Block Assy h A Counter Wheel Photo Cam Final Assy o m E Interrupt Board Assy Cam Photo Interrupt SHARP Connection Board Bracket Assy Pressure Board Proportional Valve dikei Mall nad ney S w fitting Assy ai iF 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Front Panel gt Digital Output Board Front Panel Board Motor w Photo Power Supply eel Interface Interrupt Coupler Assy Meinerbgara Optional Transformer Figure 8 1 Model 50307 Hardware Components 8 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Reference Detector Board SHARP Board Assy Source Board SHARP Board Bracket Assy Scatter Detector Board Optical Bench RH Board Optical Bench Inlet Figure 8 2 SHARP Optics Component Hardware Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 8 3 System Description Hardware Nephelometer Assembly Primary Measurement Head Detector Amplifier Cam Photo Interrupt Board Counter Wheel Interrupt Board Assembly Proportional Valve Cam Motor Tape Motor 8 4 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual The nephelometer assembly uses an 880 nanometer incident light source a
589. ue between 100 pg m and 10000 ug m can be specified as a range Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Integration Time e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges Custom Ranges The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range For more information about selecting ranges see SHARP Range above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range gt Set Custom Ranges gt Custom Range 1 2 or 3 Integration Time The Integration Time screen allows the user to adjust the compounded averaging of the beta attenuation mass and concentration The default value should be set to 20 minutes and may be adjusted between 15 60 minutes The display shows the current integration time is set to 15 The next line of the display is used to change the integration time e Inthe Main Menu choose Integration Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation 24 Hour Average 24 Hour Ave rage The 24 Hour Average screen defines a start time during which concentration measurement is averaged over a daily 24 hours period The average concentration of the primary readings are calculated for that time period and averaged out A new 24 hour average concentration is displayed once per day The display shows the current 24 hour average SHARP concentration The next line of the display is used to change the
590. ue to 95 Send set alarm neph rh min 95 Receive set alarm neph rh min 95 ok Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 22 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual alarm neph temp min alarm neph temp max This command reports the current nephelometer temperature alarm maximum value setting The following example reports that the nephelometer temperature alarm maximum value is 5 0 C Send alarm neph temp max Receive alarm neph temp max 5 0 degC set alarm neph temp min value set alarm neph temp max value This command sets the nephelometer temperature alarm maximum value to value where value is a floating point number representing nephelometer temperature alarm limits in C The following example sets the nephelometer temperature alarm maximum value to 40 0 C Send set alarm neph temp max 40 Receive set alarm neph temp max 40 ok alarm sample rh min alarm sample rh max These commands report the current sample relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the sample relative humidity alarm minimum value is 5 Send alarm sample rh min Receive alarm sample rh min 5 0 set alarm sample rh min value set alarm sample rh max value These commands set the sample relative humidity alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing sample relative humidity alarm limits in percent The followin
591. um values to value where value is a floating point number representing vacuum pressure alarm limits in millimeters of mercury The following example sets the vacuum pressure alarm maximum value to 250 0 mmHg Send set alarm vac pres max 250 Receive set alarm vac pres max 250 ok amb rh This command reports the ambient RH in percent The following example reports that the ambient RH is 30 Send amb rh Receive amb rh 30 0 amb temp This command reports the current ambient temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the ambient temperature is 15 C Send amb temp Receive amb temp 15 0 degC Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics B 24 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual baro pres This command reports the current barometric pressure in mmHg The following example reports that the barometric pressure is 722 mmHg Send baro pres Receive baro pres 722 0 mmHg board temp This command reports the current board temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the board temperature is 15 C Send board temp Receive board temp 15 0 degC crn This command reports the current radon concentration for the detector The following example reports that the radon concentration is 1 2 Bq m Send crn Receive crn 1 20 Bg m3 det status This command reports the current mass for the detector The sequence is a B Bc Brer Each value is separated
592. umber of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual D 1 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Gesytec protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Gesytec 9882 The Gesytec instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The default instrument address is 14 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document lt CR gt is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 lt SP
593. umetric The flow rate of the Model 5030 should be verified during this acceptance Flow Rate Verification test Prior to this test it is important for the previous temperature and pressure acceptance tests to be completed Should the ambient temperature flow temperature or barametric sensors require calibration this should be done prior to the flow rate verification e Press to return to the Diagnostics menu and choose Flows EMUIRETED CHAT pyg CH coir i i i 5 L EPOPEE Emet Booe EOT Fe fat The Flow screen read only displays the volumetric flow rate in liters per minute The flow is measured by the internal pressure board sensors 2 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Leak Check Procedure Nephelometer Source Verification Nephelometer Zero Thermo Fisher Scientific Check Installation Acceptance Testing and Startup Procedures Attach the small sample tube adapter to the Model 50302 inlet Depending upon your NIST traceable volumetric flow transfer standard FTS you may either attach your FTS now or add the flow audit adapter to accommodate any flexible tubing that your FTS may require Allow 60 seconds to stabilize the flow after connecting Record the Model 50302 Volumetric Flow Rate as Qm and the FTS flow rate as Qi assuring that both are being recorded in units of actual liters per minute Take three readings each from Qm and Qi and average the respective values Use th
594. ured values as 5 minute averages or hour ly averages configuration used during suitability testing in the internal storage These val ues can for example be read out on the iPort software and processed as required with a spread sheet analysis Furthermore it is also possible to parameterise the AMS in a way that daily averages are calculated internally and output as such The filter tape transport itself takes approx 1 min After changing the filter tape both the ra diometric and nephelometric measurements are zeroed The zeroing of the nephelometric measurement is carried out within 10 min after the pump has stopped the radiometric meas urement zeroes within 15 minutes after pump stop It should be noted that the measuring system does not output new SHARP values during the first 10 min after filter tape change After completing the zeroing of the nephelometer the SHARP signal can be determined again since it is calculated from the nephelometer concentration and the auto calibration fac tor Nevertheless the auto calibration factor is frozen until the end of the zeroing phase of the radiometric measurement and is only updated upon its completion The time required for filter tape transport is 1 min It corresponds to approx 0 21 lag time for 24 h measurements with three tape changes a day The available time of the SHARP signal at cycles of 8 h is 470 min 480 min 10 min cov ering 97 9 of the total time 6 5 Assessment It
595. urrent flow span to the value where value is a floating point representation of the flow span specified at the time of calibration The following example sets the flow span to 1 5 Send set flow span 1 5 Receive set flow span 1 5 ok flow temp offset This command reports offset for flow temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the flow temperature offset is 5 C Send flow temp offset Receive flow temp offset 5 0 degC Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Calibration B 40 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set flow temp offset value This command sets the offset value for flow temperature where value is a floating point number representing flow temperature offset in degrees C The following example sets the flow temperature offset to 7 C Send set flow temp offset 7 Receive set flow temp offset 7 ok high volt This command reports the current high voltage for the detector The following example reports that the high voltage is 1400 V Send high volt Receive high volt 1400 set high volt value This command sets the high voltage for the detector to value where value is a floating point representation of the high voltage The following example sets the high voltage to 1445 V Send set high volt 1445 Receive set high volt 1445 ok mass coef This command reports the current mass coefficient The following example reports that the mass coefficient is 7100
596. us Reports the interface board status B 20 alarm io status Reports the I O expansion board status B 20 alarm mb status Reports the motherboard status B 20 alarm nb status Reports the status of the nephelometer interface board B 20 alarm ncal status Reports the status of the last nephelometer auto zero B 21 calibration alarm neph led cur Reports sets current nephelometer LED alarm maximum B 21 max value alarm neph led cur Reports sets current nephelometer LED alarm minimum value B 21 min alarm neph rh max Reports sets nephelometer relative humidity alarm maximum B 21 value alarm neph rh min Reports sets nephelometer relative humidity alarm minimum B 21 value alarm neph temp Reports sets nephelometer temperature alarm maximum B 22 max value alarm neph temp Reports sets nephelometer temperature alarm minimum B 22 min value alarm sample rh Reports sets sample relative humidity alarm maximum value B 22 max alarm sample rh min Reports sets sample relative humidity alarm minimum value B 22 alarm status det Reports the detector status B 22 alarm tape counter Reports sets tape counter alarm maximum value B 23 max alarm vac pres max Reports sets vacuum pressure alarm maximum value B 23 alarm vac pres min Reports sets vacuum pressure alarm minimum value B 23 allow mode cmd Reports sets the current set allow mode command B 55 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manu
597. us modes e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions an BEY Saad fat ad Temperature The Temperature screen is used to turn the temperature correction to Compensation actual or standard e Press to toggle and set the temperature compensation to actual or standard Standard Temperature The Standard Temperature screen is used to set the standard temperature e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions gt Temperature gt Standard 3 24 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Compensation Standard Pressure Datalogging Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Volumetric Conditions The Pressure Compensation screen is used to turn the pressure correction to actual or standard e Press to toggle and set the pressure compensation to actual or standard The Standard Pressure screen is used to set the standard pressure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Volumetric Conditions gt Pressure gt Standard Pare irog The Series instruments include a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two different types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs and srecs Each record can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record g
598. ut channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Select Range ETRE EE Saeed baose Pra Aad Minimum and Maximum The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 Value and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Volumetric Conditions analog output channel See Table 3 4 for a list of choices The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt IO Configuration 3 50 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Set Minimum or Maximum Value Table 3 4 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value PM Zero 0 Range Setting AVG PM Zero 0 Range Setting Neph Zero 0 Range Setting SHARP Zero 0 Range Setting AVG SHARP Zero 0 Range Setting AVG Neph Zero 0 Range Setting Barometer Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Vacuum User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flow
599. ve set save params These commands store all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok time This command reports the current time 24 hour format The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual B 53 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Communications Configuration B 54 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual This command sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 set addr dns address This command sets the domain name server address where address consists lt a gt of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive
600. ve humidity to control the sam ple heating from originally 50 to 58 necessary due to the results of the campaign in Teddington UK an additional campaign at one of the German sites with two candidate sys tems with settings of each 50 and 58 was performed decision of the 32 Expert meet ing test reports of May 14 15 2013 Table 2 gives an overview on the additional campaign The results of this campaign are shown in chapter 4 3 Field test from page 55 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUV Rheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Page 17 of 424 Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM25 Report No 936 21209885 F Table 2 Description of the test site additional campaign 2013 Bornheim motorway parking lot summer Period 06 2013 07 2013 No of paired values Candidates 45 Characteristics Rural structure motorway Rank of pollution Low to average The complete test was performed within the scope of the test programme Combined MCERTS and TUV PM Equivalence Testing Programme In the context of European har monisation the test programme was developed and carried out by British and German test institutes Bureau Veritas UK amp Ireland National Physical Laboratory NPL
601. ve the accuracy of the candidate systems Three different cases may occur a Slope b not significantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2u b intercept a significantly different from 0 la gt 2u a b Slope b significantly different from 1 b 1 gt 2u b intercept a not significantly different from 0 a lt 2u a c Slope b significantly different from 1 b 1 gt 2u b intercept a significantly different from 0 la gt 2u a With respect to a The value of the intercept a may be used as a correction term to correct all input values y according to the following equation Y corr yj a 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx aa 7 TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 166 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F The resulting values of yicor may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression Vicor C OX and Us_s Vicor _ u x c d 1 x P u a Ea n 2 with u a uncertainty of the original intercept a the value of which has been used to obtain Yi corr Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogo nal regression are described in detail in annex
602. ver ccccccccceceteceteeeteeee 7 44 Figure 7 25 Replacing the External Solenoid Valve ccccccccceceteeeteeee 7 45 Figure 7 26 Disconnecting the RH Temp Connector 7 47 Figure 7 27 SHARP Interface Board Connections c cccccccecceceeeteeeteeee 7 48 Figure 7 28 Replacing the SHARP Optics Board cece 7 49 Figure 7 29 Replacing the Delrin Nut s 7 50 Figure 7 30 Replacing the Internal SHARP Cable Assembly 0 0 000 7 52 Figure 7 31 Replacing the Case Cable o c cccccccccccscescecescetesteteeteteseeeeee 7 53 Figure 7 32 Replacing the External Zeroing Filter oo ccc ceceeeceteeseeee 7 54 Figure 8 1 Model 50307 Hardware Component ccccsccscesesceesceteeeeeees 8 2 Figure 8 2 SHARP Optics Component cece cece ccccseesesteseeeeseeteseeteseeseseseesenes 8 3 Figure 9 1 Bench WMOUnting 252s aie lat a ae as os aa te 9 4 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting oo cece cc cecesescecesesescetesesesteesesesteeseseateneness 9 5 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack MOUNTING ccc cece escetesesescetesesesteteseseeteenens 9 6 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly 0 c c cece cece ceesceesteseeteseeteseeeeees 9 7 Figure 9 5 Roof Flange Assembly ou ccc cccesceceesesceteseseseeteseseseetesesesteenens 9 8 Figure 9 6 Securing the Roof Flange 9 9 Figure 10 1 SHARP Optics Connection Bracket 0 0 ccccccccecseceteeeteeee 10 2 Figure 10 2 Tape Pick up Spool Removal c ccceccccecce
603. vg This command reports the last calculated 24 hour average nephelometer concentration which defaults to 9 999 pg m if 24 hours has not passed Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Send neph 24avg Receive neph 24avg 9 999E 03 pg m3 neph led current This command reports the nephelometer LED current The following example shows that the LED current is 65 7 mA Send neph led current Receive neph led current 65 7 mA neph raw This command reports the raw unaveraged nephelometer concentration The following example reports the raw unaveraged concentration value Send neph raw Receive neph raw 1 331E 01 pg m3 neph ref det This command reports the nephelometer reference detector voltage The following example reports that the reference detector voltage is 1096 mV Send neph ref det Receive neph ref det 1096 mV neph rh This command reports the nephelometer relative humidity The following example reports that the relative humidity is 27 2 Send neph rh Receive neph rh 27 2 neph temp This command reports the nephelometer temperature sensor The following example reports that the temperature sensor is 27 2 C Send neph temp Receive neph temp 27 2 degC pm This command reports the measured PM concentration The following example reports that the PM concentration is 14 1 mg m Send pm Receive pm 1 410E 01 mg m3 pm 24avg This command r
604. vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM 5s Teddington summer ovseccccctvesecenes cases liteadeeagsaagccneredeass ives aagessemnsermaueelseeerees 163 Figure 58 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM2s5 Teddington SUMIMEN oreceimicedecrscunciadencrmcetecerenteecnsredenenersasnautersinctmatenenpen 163 Figure 59 Reference vs candidate SN 1 measured component PM 5 Valles 2 73 GMM ors a R E a E E 164 Figure 60 Reference vs candidate SN 2 measured component PM2s5 yalues 2 18 WU MN a esa iieri ter sai dies nua ka as Sich nnd ada rara N ans Ea i aa aaae 164 Figure 61 Stability of standard weight sssssseeeeesssessnrrnrrrsserrtrrnrtrnsrrrrnttrnrrnnnnnseernnee 210 Figure 62 Stability of the Control filterS esssnnnneeeeseeeennrrnnnnsseerrnrrrnnrssertrrnrrnrrnnnneseernnee 212 Figure 63 Distribution for Emfab filters of A Pre spread weighed relative to the check weight and B Post spread weighed relative to the check weight ci susocotesasesanventvletwtanersansaeueanecanpeacsnusvcaniesonumerenees 219 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUVRheinland Precisely Right Page 12 of 424 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Re
605. ween uncertainty of the reference devices Ure is determined analogous to the un certainty between candidates and shall be lt 2 ug m The evaluated results are illustrated in Detailed presentation of test results of this test item A linear correlation y a bx is assumed between the results of both methods in order to evaluate the comparability of the candidates y and the reference procedure x The correlation between the average values of the reference devices and the candidates is established by orthogonal regression Regression is calculated for e All test sites and comparisons together e Each test site and comparison separately e 1 dataset with measured values PM25 2 18 g m Basis average value of reference measurement 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx a 3 D T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland 0 Air Pollut Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 152 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F For further evaluation the results of the uncertainty us s of the candidates compared with the reference method are described with the following equation which describes Ucr as a func tion of the PM concentration xi uay p UO fa 01 F With RSS Sum of the relative residuals from ort
606. wer and grounding to the detector The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides solenoid driver outputs and relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other Eight solenoid driver outputs open collector are provided along with a corresponding 24 VDC supply pin on the connector Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of OV tol0 VDC Six current outputs are provided with a normal operating range of 0 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the function key panel and graphics display It serves as a central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This boar
607. which ensures that the measured mass concentration remains unaffected by changes in the total particle population 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx T i VRheinl TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH U einland Air Pollution Control Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 32 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM2s5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F 3 2 Functionality of the measuring system The Model 5030i SHARP measuring system combines the principles of aerosol light scatter ing nephelometry and beta attenuation analogous to Model 5014i BETA see test report 936 21209985 H The particle sample passes through the PM 25 sampling inlet with a flow rate of 1 m h 16 67 I min and reaches via the heated sampling tube DHS dynamic heating system the actual Model 5030i SHARP measuring instrument The use of the dynamic heating system DHS ensures that the relative humidity of the air passing through the filter tape of the radiometric stage stays well below the point at which the collected particles accrete and condensation effects that may distort the measured value ap pear It also allows for maintaining the relative humidity below a specified threshold in the nephelometer set value during suitability testing 50 and 58 rel humidity This system minimises the internal temp
608. with PM 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F JN s Figure 25 Field test site Teddington In addition to the measuring systems used for determining the content of suspended particu late matter in ambient air a data acquisition system was installed at the cabi net measurement site in order to determine the meteorological characteristics Air tempera ture pressure and humidity as well as wind velocity direction and precipitation were continu ously assessed and their half hourly averages recorded The installation of the cabinet itself and the arrangement of the sampling probes are de scribed as follows e Height of cabinet roof 2 50 m e Height of the sampling point for testing 1 10 m 0 51 m above the cabinet roof e Reference instrument 3 61 3 01 m above ground e Height of weather vane 4 5 m above ground Germany 2 5 m above ground Uk Table 6 contains therefore not only an overview of the most important meteorological fac tors determined during measurement at the four test sites but also an overview of the PM ra tio during the entire test The individual values are presented in annexes 5 and 6 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH Air Pollution Control Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM25 pre separat
609. with parallel operated TEOM FDMS systems 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx ss TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUV Rheinland Luftreinhaltung Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Page 200 of 424 Model 5030 SHARP with PM pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Annex 6 Ambient conditions at field test sites Page 8 of 11 No Date Test site Mean PM2 5 conc PM2 5 volatiles Ratio volatiles PM2 5 Mean ambient temperature Max ambient temperature Ambient pressure Rel humidity Wind velocity Wind direction Precipitation ug m3 ug m3 C C hPa m s 4 mm 211 2 21 2012 Bornheim Winter 10 2 1 3 13 1 4 4 8 5 1023 70 8 1 8 176 0 0 212 2 22 2012 13 9 6 3 11 2 1017 69 6 1 6 156 3 0 213 2 23 2012 8 4 2 4 29 0 8 2 10 3 1016 86 2 1 0 191 0 0 214 2 24 2012 11 9 3 6 30 5 9 9 13 7 1017 86 4 2 8 256 1 2 215 2 25 2012 6 3 7 0 10 9 1016 78 1 3 4 269 0 3 216 2 26 2012 26 5 6 4 24 2 5 2 6 9 1019 87 2 1 9 244 0 6 217 2 27 2012 19 2 5 9 30 9 7 7 10 3 1016 77 4 1 1 211 0 6 218 2 28 2012 17 4 5 1 29 3 9 4 10 7 1016 86 5 1 8 252 0 0 219 2 29 2012 27 0 7 0 26 0 10 4 13 3 1017 87 9 0 6 142 0 0 220 3 1 2012 18 8 4 6 24 7 8 8 10 6 1018 90 5 0 8 178 0 0 221 3 2 2012 14 6 4 6 31 6 9 0 11 8 1016 87 0 22 151 0 0 222 3 3 2012
610. wn battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Timezone The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timezone that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone Cu gu PL a i Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the ver
611. y B 44 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual set vac pres span value This command sets the vacuum span to the value specified at the time of calibration where value is a floating point representation of vacuum span The following example successfully sets the new value for vacuum pressure span to 1 002 Send set vac pres span 1 002 Receive set vac pres span 1 002 ok vac pres offset This command reports the vacuum offset for the detector at the time of calibration The following example reports that the vacuum pressure offset is 0 3 Send vac pres zero Receive vac pres zero 0 3 set vf pres cal def This command resets the vacuum and flow pressure calibration to their default values Send set vf pres cal def Receive set vf pres cal def ok push button do me 1 down menu 2 en ri 3 enter right 4 he ru help run le up left button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok isc iscreen These commands retrieve the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific
612. y Thermo Fisher Scientific for the component suspended particulate matter PM2 5 Report No 936 21209885 F Page 20 of 424 filled General requirements on measuring systems 5 2 1 Certification ranges Measuring range Negative output signals Failure in the mains voltage Operating states Switch over Maintenance in terval Have to comply with the re quirements of Table 1 of the Standard VDI 4202 Part 1 The upper limit of measure ment of the measuring systems shall be greater or equal to the upper limit of the certification range Negative output signals or measured values may not be suppressed life zero Uncontrolled emission of oper ation and calibration gas shall be avoided The instrument pa rameters shall be secured by buffering against loss caused by failure in the mains voltage When mains voltage returns the instrument shall automati cally reach the operation mode and start the measurement ac cording to the operating in structions The measuring system shall al low the control of important op erating states by telemetrically transmitted status signals Switch over between meas urement and functional check and or calibration shall be pos sible telemetrically by computer control or manual intervention If possible 3 months minimum 2 weeks 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx It is possible to assess the measuring system in the range of the relevant limit values A me
613. y be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 50303 analyzer This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface Thermo Fisher Scientific Inlet Assemblies Sampling Tube Extensions 1 0 Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 5030 is available with the following options e Inlet Assemblies on page 9 1 e Sampling Tube Extensions on page 9 1 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 1 e 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly on page 9 1 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 2 e Cables on page 9 2 e Mounting Options on page 9 3 e Roof Flange Assembly on page 9 8 The Model 5030 can be used for different applications Using different inlet configurations PMio PM2 s PM Inlets several particle size fractions can be monitored The main application is the measurement of PMio and PM_s for ambient air quality monitoring and health effect studies Often the most compatible way to install the Model 50302 at air quality monitoring sites
614. y being re calibrated by the radiometric measurement during operation The principle of radiometric mass determination is based on the physics law of beta attenua tion as effect of passing through a thin layer of matter This relation is described as follows A f C In My Ot J J where Cs particle mass concentration A particle collection area filter spot Um mass attenuation coefficient dependent on the energy of the beta source Q sampling flow rate t sampling time fo initial beta count rate tare fi final beta count rate The radiometric mass determination is calibrated on site with help of null and span foils In using the mass transfer standard foil set span foil set the radiometric measurement can be checked anytime for quality assurance purposes and if required calibrated The output mass concentration Cm of Model 5030i SHARP is calculated as follows where Cm mass concentration SHARP Cn nephelometer signal averaged over 1 minute C radiometric mass concentration dynamically filtered over a variable time span Cn2 nephelometric concentration dynamically filtered over a variable time span 740300_2013_936_21209885F_EN docx TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH A TUVRheinland Air Pollution Control s Precisely Right Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system Model 5030 SHARP with PM2 5 pre separator of the company Thermo Fisher P
615. yern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands The following 14 measurements reported in response to DA command for the Model 5030 include e SHARP e PM e Nephelometer e Volumetric Flow e Ambient Temperature e Sample Temperature e Ambient RH e Sample RH e Flow Pressure e Vacuum Pressure e Barometric Pressure e Average SHARP e Average PM e Average Neph Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual D 7 Gesytec Bayern Hessen Protocol Gesytec Commands Operating and Error Status D 8 Model 50307 SHARP Instruction Manual See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Model 50302 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 5030 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 l1 No Password Protect 0 0 0 10 0 10 1 10 Pump Off 0 0 0 J0 0 J1 0 0 Heater Off 0 0 0 0 1 10 0 0 Filter Change 0 0 0 J1 0 0 0 0 Nephelometer Zero 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Nephelometer Standby 0 l1 0 10 0 10 0 10 Not Used 1 10 0 J0 0 0 0 J0 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 5030 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Filter Tape Cntr Alarm 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 l1 Filter Change 0 J0 0 0

21209885F

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents